Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 26, 2013

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

Form 20-F

 

 

(Mark One)

¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

or

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012

or

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from [                      ] to [                      ]

or

 

¨ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report                     

For the transition period from [                      ] to [                      ]

Commission file number: 001-35053

 

 

InterXion Holding N.V.

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

The Netherlands

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

Tupolevlaan 24

1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk

The Netherlands

+31 20 880 7600

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

 

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of Each Class

 

Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered

Ordinary shares, with a nominal value of €0.10 each   New York Stock Exchange

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

None

(Title of Class)

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

None

(Title of Class)

 

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report:

68,176,351 ordinary shares

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act:    Yes   x     No   ¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes   ¨     No   x

Note—Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes   ¨     No   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer   x                 Accelerated filer   ¨                   Non-accelerated filer   ¨

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

 

U.S. GAAP   ¨

  

International Financial Reporting Standards as issued

by the International Accounting Standards Board   x

   Other   ¨

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:    Item 17   ¨     Item 18   ¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).    Yes   ¨     No   x

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Sections 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court.    Yes   ¨     No   ¨

 

 

 


Table of Contents

Introduction

Presentation of Financial Information

Unless otherwise indicated, the financial information in this annual report has been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, or IFRS, as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. The significant IFRS accounting policies applied to our financial information in this annual report have been applied consistently.

Financial Information

The financial information included in “Financial Statements” is covered by the auditors’ report included therein. The audit was carried out in accordance with standards issued by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States).

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA

In this annual report we refer to our EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA. We define EBITDA as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from sub-leases on unused data center sites. Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. For a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit/(loss), see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA.” EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and other key performance indicators may not be indicative of our historical results of operations, nor are they meant to be predictive of future results.

Additional Key Performance Indicators

In addition to EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA, our management also uses the following key performance indicators as measures to evaluate our performance:

 

   

Equipped Space: the amount of data center space that, on the relevant date, is equipped and either sold or could be sold, without making any significant additional investments to common infrastructure. Equipped Space at a particular data center may decrease if either (a) the power requirements of customers at a data center change so that all or a portion of the remaining space can no longer be sold as the space does not have enough power and/or common infrastructure to support it without further investment or (b) if the design and layout of a data center changes to meet among others, fire regulations or customer requirements, and necessitates the introduction of common space (such as corridors) which cannot be sold to individual customers;

 

   

Utilization Rate: on the relevant date, Revenue Generating Space as a percentage of Equipped Space; Revenue Generating Space is defined as the amount of Equipped Space that is under contract and billed on the relevant date. Some Equipped Space is not fully utilized due to customers’ specific requirements regarding the layout of their equipment. In practice, therefore, Utilization Rate does not reach 100%;

 

   

Recurring Revenue Percentage: Recurring Revenue during the relevant period as a percentage of total revenue in the same period. Recurring Revenue comprises revenue that is incurred from colocation and associated power charges, office space, amortized set-up fees and certain recurring managed services (but excluding any ad hoc managed services) provided by us directly or through third parties. Rents received for the sublease of unused sites are excluded. Monthly Recurring Revenue is the contracted Recurring Revenue over a full month excluding power usage revenues, amortized set-up fees and the sub-leasing of office space;

 

   

Average Monthly Churn: the average of the Churn Percentage in each month of the relevant period. Churn Percentage in a month is the contracted Monthly Recurring Revenue which came to an end during the month as a percentage of the total contracted Monthly Recurring Revenue at the beginning of the month.

 

1


Table of Contents

EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA margin, Recurring Revenue and Average Monthly Churn are all non-GAAP measures. Together with the other key performance indicators listed above, they serve as additional indicators of our operating performance and are not required by, or presented in accordance with, IFRS. They are not intended as a replacement for, or alternatives to, measures such as cash flows from operating activities and operating profit as defined and required under IFRS. We believe that EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA margin and our other key performance indicators are measures commonly used by analysts, investors and peers in our industry. We have, therefore, disclosed this information to permit a more complete analysis of our operating performance. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA margin and our other key performance indicators, as we calculate them, may not be comparable to similarly titled measures reported by other companies. For a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit/(loss), see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA.” EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA margin and our other key performance indicators listed above may not be indicative of our historical results of operations, nor are they meant to be predictive of future results.

Currency Presentation and Convenience Translations

Unless otherwise indicated, all references in this annual report to “euro” or “€” are to the currency introduced at the start of the third stage of the European Economic and Monetary Union pursuant to the Treaty establishing the European Community, as amended. All references to “dollars,” “$,” “U.S. $” or “U.S. dollars” are to the lawful currency of the United States. We prepare our financial statements in euro.

Solely for convenience, this annual report contains translation of certain euro amounts into U.S. dollars based on the noon buying rate of €1.00 to U.S. $ 1.3186 in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York as of December 31, 2012. These translation rates should not be construed as representations that the euro amounts have been, could have been or could be converted into U.S. dollars at that or any other rate. See “Exchange Rate Information.”

Metric Convenience Conversion

This annual report contains certain metric measurements and for your convenience, we provide the conversion of metric units into U.S. customary units. The standard conversion relevant for this annual report is approximately 1 meter = 3.281 feet or 1 square meter = 10.764 square feet.

Rounding

Certain financial data in this annual report, including financial, statistical and operating information have been subject to rounding adjustment. Accordingly, in certain instances, the sum of the numbers in a column or a row in tables contained in this annual report may not conform exactly to the total figure given for that column or row. Percentages in tables have been rounded and accordingly may not add up to 100%.

No Incorporation of Website Information

The contents of our website do not form part of this annual report.

Terminology

The terms the “Group”, “we”, “our” and “us” refer to InterXion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries, as the context requires.

 

2


Table of Contents

MARKET, ECONOMIC AND INDUSTRY DATA

Information regarding markets, market size, market share, market position, growth rates and other industry data pertaining to our business contained in this annual report consists of estimates based on data and reports compiled by professional organizations and analysts, on data from other external sources, and on our knowledge of our sales and markets. In many cases, there is no readily available external information (whether from trade associations, government bodies or other organizations) to validate market-related analyses and estimates, requiring us to rely on internally developed estimates. While we have compiled, extracted and reproduced market or other industry data from external sources which we believe to be reliable, including third parties or industry or general publications, we have not independently verified that data. Similarly, our internal estimates have not been verified by any independent sources.

 

3


Table of Contents

Forward-Looking Statements

This annual report on Form 20-F contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, with respect to all statements other than statements of historical fact regarding our business, financial condition, results of operations and certain of our plans, objectives, assumptions, projections, expectations or beliefs with respect to these items and statements regarding other future events or prospects. These statements include, without limitation, those concerning: our strategy and our ability to achieve it; expectations regarding sales, profitability and growth; plans for the construction of new data centers; our possible or assumed future results of operations; research and development, capital expenditure and investment plans; adequacy of capital; and financing plans. The words “aim,” “may,” “will,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “believe,” “future,” “continue,” “help,” “estimate,” “plan,” “schedule,” “intend,” “should,” “shall” or the negative or other variations thereof as well as other statements regarding matters that are not historical fact, are or may constitute forward-looking statements.

In addition, this annual report includes forward-looking statements relating to our potential exposure to various types of market risks, such as foreign exchange rate risk, interest rate risks and other risks related to financial assets and liabilities. We have based these forward-looking statements on our management’s current view with respect to future events and financial performance. These views reflect the best judgment of our management but involve a number of risks and uncertainties which could cause actual results to differ materially from those predicted in our forward-looking statements and from past results, performance or achievements. Although we believe that the estimates reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, those estimates may prove to be incorrect. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend on circumstances that will occur in the future. There are a number of factors that could cause actual results and developments to differ materially from these expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. These factors include, among other things:

 

   

operating expenses cannot be easily reduced in the short term;

 

   

inability to utilize the capacity of newly planned data centers and data center expansions;

 

   

significant competition;

 

   

cost and supply of electrical power;

 

   

data center industry over-capacity; and

 

   

performance under service level agreements.

These risks and others described under “Risk Factors” are not exhaustive. Other sections of this annual report describe additional factors that could adversely affect our business, financial condition or results of operations. We urge you to read the sections of this annual report entitled Item 3 “Key Information–“Risk Factors,” Item 4 “Information on the Company” and Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” for a more complete discussion of the factors that could affect our future performance and the industry in which we operate. Additionally, new risk factors can emerge from time to time, and it is not possible for us to predict all such risk factors, nor can we assess the impact of all such risk factors to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statements. Given these risks and uncertainties, you should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements as a prediction of actual results.

All forward-looking statements included in this annual report are based on information available to us on the date of this annual report. We undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statement, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as may be required by applicable law. All subsequent written and oral forward-looking statements attributable to us or persons acting on our behalf are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained throughout this annual report.

 

4


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

PART I ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISORS

     6  

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

     7  

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

     8  

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

     29  

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

     40  

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

     41  

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

     63  

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

     71  

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

     75  

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

     76  

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

     78  

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

     95  

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

     96  

PART II ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

     97  

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

     98  

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

     99  

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

     101  

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

     102  

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

     103  

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

     104  

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

     105  

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

     106  

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

     107  

PART III ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     108  

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     109  

 

5


Table of Contents

PART I

ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISORS

For the identity of Directors and Senior Management reference is made to “Item 6: Directors, Senior Management and Employees”. Identification of Advisors is not applicable for this form 20-F.

 

6


Table of Contents

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

Not applicable.

 

7


Table of Contents

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data

The following selected financial data as of and for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements, which are included elsewhere in this annual report. The selected financial data as of and for the years ended December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements not included in this annual report. Our audited consolidated financial statements included in this annual report have been prepared and presented in accordance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and have been audited by KPMG Accountants N.V., an independent registered public accounting firm.

You should read the selected financial data in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements and related notes and Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” included elsewhere in this annual report. Our historical results do not necessarily indicate our expected results for any future periods.

 

    Year ended December 31,     Year ended December 31,  
    2012 (1)     2012     2011     2010     2009     2008 (2)  
   

(U.S. $’000, except per
share amounts and
number of shares in
thousands)

    (€’000, except per share amounts and number of
shares in thousands)
 

Income statement data

           

Revenue

    365,412        277,121        244,310        208,379        171,668        138,180   

Cost of sales

    (149,110     (113,082     (101,766     (91,154     (78,548     (63,069
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

    216,302        164,039        142,544        117,225        93,120        75,111   

Other income

    611        463        487        425        746        2,291   

Sales and marketing costs

    (26,504     (20,100     (17,680     (15,072     (11,253     (9,862

General and administrative costs

    (104,490     (79,243     (67,258     (55,892     (50,628     (35,352
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

    85,919        65,159        58,093        46,686        31,985        32,188   

Net finance expense

    (23,400     (17,746     (22,784     (29,444     (6,248     (3,713
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

    62,519        47,413        35,309        17,242        25,737        28,475   

Income tax (expense) / income

    (20,810     (15,782     (9,737     (2,560     715        8,899   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

    41,709        31,631        25,572        14,682        26,452        37,374   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share (3)

    0.62        0.47        0.40        0.33        0.60        0.87   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Diluted earnings per share (3)

    0.61        0.46        0.39        0.31        0.57        0.87   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Number of shares (3) (4)

    68,176        68,176        66,129        44,354        44,351        43,646   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted average number of shares for Basic earnings per share (3) (5)

    67,309        67,309        64,176        44,352        43,999        43,194   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted average number of shares for Diluted earnings per share (3) (5)

    68,262        68,262        65,896        47,707        46,792        46,302   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

8


Table of Contents
     Year ended December 31,     Year ended December 31,  
     2012 (1)     2012     2011     2010     2009     2008 (2)  
     U.S. $’000, except per
share amounts and
number of shares in
thousands)
    (€’000, except per share amounts and number of
shares in thousands)
 

Cash flow statement data

            

Net cash flows from operating activities

     117,464        89,082        64,043        74,379        51,378        35,991 (6)  

Net cash flows from investing activities

     (236,168     (179,105     (161,011     (100,164     (100,949     (92,252

Net cash flows from financing activities

     20,943        15,883        140,330        92,748        19,764        82,057   

Capital expenditures including intangibles (7)

     (235,148     (178,331     (161,956     (100,394     (101,053     (92,252

 

     Year ended December 31,      Year ended December 31,  
     2012 (1)      2012      2011      2010      2009      2008 (2)  
     (U.S. $’000)      (€’000)  

Balance sheet data

           

Trade and other current assets

     98,703         74,854         67,874         55,672         55,610         49,874   

Cash and cash equivalents (8)

     90,577         68,692         142,669         99,115         32,003         61,775   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current assets

     189,280         143,546         210,543         154,787         87,613         111,649   

Non-current assets

     890,949         675,678         533,738         391,975         320,407         250,307   

Total assets

     1,080,229         819,224         744,281         546,762         408,020         361,956   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current liabilities

     176,836         134,109         133,799         112,375         120,894         122,322   

Non-current liabilities

     408,161         309,541         279,921         279,118         152,749         134,708   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

     584,997         443,650         413,720         391,493         273,643         257,030   

Shareholders’ equity

     495,232         375,574         330,561         155,269         134,377         104,926   

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

     1,080,229         819,224         744,281         546,762         408,020         361,956   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) The “Income statement data,” “Cash flow statement data” and “Balance sheet data” as of and for the year ended December 31, 2012 have been translated for convenience only based on the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York as of December 31, 2012 for euros into U.S. dollars of €1.00 = U.S. $1.3186. See “Exchange Rate Information” for additional information.
(2) In fiscal year 2008, income not related to our core activities was reclassified to the line item “Other income.”
(3) “Basic earnings per share”, “Diluted earnings per share” and “Number of shares” have been adjusted to reflect the five-to-one reverse stock split, which occurred in conjunction with our initial public offering in January 2011.
(4) “Number of shares” is in thousands as at the end of the year.
(5) “Weighted average number of shares for Basic earnings per share” and “Weighted average number of shares for Diluted earnings per share” are in thousands.
(6) The 2008 “Net cash flows from operating activities” include a reclassification for foreign exchange results on working capital balances.

 

9


Table of Contents
(7) Capital expenditures including intangible assets, represent payments to acquire property, plant & equipment and intangible assets as recorded on our consolidated statement of cash flows as “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” and “Purchase of intangible assets” respectively.
(8) Cash and cash equivalents includes €5.0 million, €4.8 million, €4.2 million, €3.9 million and €3.9 million as of December 31, 2012, December 31, 2011, December 31, 2010, December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, respectively, which is restricted and held as collateral to support the issuance of bank guarantees on behalf of a number of subsidiary companies.

Exchange Rates

We publish our financial statements in euro. The conversion of euro into U.S. dollars in this annual report is solely for the convenience of readers. The exchange rates of euro into U.S. dollars are based on the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Unless otherwise noted, all translations from euro to U.S. dollars and from U.S. dollars to euro in this annual report were made at a rate of €1.00 to U.S. $ 1.3186, the noon buying rate in effect as of December 31, 2012. We make no representation that any euro or U.S. dollar amounts could have been, or could be, converted into U.S. dollars or euro, as the case may be, at any particular rate, the rates stated below, or at all.

The following table sets forth information concerning exchange rates between the euro and the U.S. dollar for the periods indicated.

 

     Low      High  
     (U.S. $ per €1.00)  

Month:

     

October 2012

     1.2876         1.3133   

November 2012

     1.2715         1.3010   

December 2012

     1.2930         1.3260   

January 2013

     1.3047         1.3584   

February 2013

     1.3054         1.3692   

March 2013

     1.2782         1.3098   

April 2013 (through April 19, 2013)

     1.2836         1.3141   

 

     Average  for
Period (1)
 
     (U.S. $ per
€1.00)
 

Year ended December 31,:

  

2008

     1.4695   

2009

     1.3955   

2010

     1.3211   

2011

     1.4002   

2012

     1.2909   

 

Source: Federal Reserve Bank of New York

Note:

(1) Annual averages are calculated from month-end exchange rates by using the average of the exchange rates on the last day of each month during the year.

On April 19, 2013, the noon buying rate was €1.00 to U.S. $1.3066.

 

10


Table of Contents

Risk Factors

In addition to the other information contained in this annual report on Form 20-F, you should carefully consider the following risk factors. If any of the possible events described below occurs, our business, financial condition, results of operations or prospects could be adversely affected. The risks and uncertainties below are those known to us and that we currently believe may materially affect us.

Risks Related to our Business

We cannot easily reduce our operating expenses in the short term, which could have a material adverse effect on our business in the event of a slowdown in demand for our services or a decrease in revenue for any reason.

Our operating expenses primarily consist of personnel, power and property costs. Personnel and property costs cannot be easily reduced in the short term. Therefore, we are unlikely to be able to reduce significantly our expenses in response to a slowdown in demand for our services or any decrease in revenue. The terms of our leases with landlords for facilities that serve as data centers are typically for 10 to 15 years (excluding our extension options) and do not provide us with an early termination right, while our colocation contracts with customers are initially typically for only three to five years. As at December 31, 2012, 39% of our Monthly Recurring Revenue was generated by contracts with terms of one year or less remaining. Our personnel costs are fixed due to our contracts with our employees having set notice periods and local law limitations in relation to the termination of employment contracts. In respect of our power costs, there is a minimum level of power required to keep our data centers running irrespective of the number of customers using them so our power costs may exceed the amount of revenue derived from power. We could have higher than expected levels of unused capacity in our data centers if, among other things:

 

   

our existing customers contracts are not renewed and those customers are not replaced by new customers;

 

   

internet and telecommunications equipment becomes smaller and more compact in the future;

 

   

there is an unexpected slowdown in demand for our services; or

 

   

we are unable to terminate or amend our leases when we have underutilized space at a data center.

If we have higher than expected levels of unused space at a data center at any given time, we may be required to operate a data center at a loss for a period of time. If we have higher than expected levels of unused capacity in our data centers and we are unable to reduce our expenses accordingly, our business, financial condition and results of operations would be materially adversely affected.

Our inability to utilize the capacity of newly planned data centers and data center expansions in line with our business plan would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Historically, we have made significant investments in our property, plant and equipment and intangible assets in order to expand our data center footprint and total Equipped Space as we have grown our business. In the year ended December 31, 2012 we invested €178.3 million in property, plant and equipment (€172.0 million) and intangible assets (€6.3 million). In the year-ended December 31, 2011, we invested €162.0 million in property, plant and equipment (€154.6 million) and intangible assets (€7.4 million). Investments in property, plant and equipment includes expansion, upgrade, maintenance and general administrative IT equipment. Investments in intangible assets include power grid rights and software development.

We expect to continue to invest as we expand our data center footprint and increase our Equipped Space based on demand in our target markets. Our total annual investment in property, plant and equipment includes maintenance and replacement capital expenditures. Although in any one year the amount of maintenance and replacement capital expenditures may vary, we expect that long term such expenses will be

 

11


Table of Contents

between 4% and 6% of total revenue. Except for two Paris data centers (PAR3 and PAR5), acquired in December 2011, our Schiphol-Rijk data center premises (AMS6), acquired in February 2012, and freehold land in Paris (PAR7) reported as a financial lease, we typically lease space for a data center and begin building it out before we have entered into agreements with customers to cover the capacity of the data center. In some cases, we enter into lease agreements for data centers or begin expansions at our existing data centers without any pre-existing customer commitments to use the additional space that will be created. If we open a new data center or complete an expansion at an existing data center, we will be required to pay substantial up-front and ongoing costs associated with that data center, including leasehold improvements, basic overhead costs and rental payments regardless of whether or not we have any agreements with customers to fill the space.

As a result of our expansion plans, we will incur capital expenditures, and as a result, an increase in other operating expenses, which will negatively impact our cash flow, and depreciation that together will negatively impact our profitability unless and until these new and expanded data centers generate enough revenue to exceed their operating costs and related capital expenditures.

There can be no guarantee that we will be able to sustain or increase our profitability if our planned expansion is not successful or if there is not sufficient customer demand in the future to realize expected returns on these investments. Any such development would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

If we are unable to expand our existing data centers or locate and secure suitable sites for additional data centers on commercially acceptable terms our ability to grow our business may be limited.

Our ability to meet the growing needs of our existing customers and to attract new customers depends on our ability to add capacity by expanding existing data centers or by locating and securing suitable sites for additional data centers that meet our specifications, such as proximity to numerous network service providers, access to a significant supply of electrical power and the ability to sustain heavy floor loading. We have reached high utilization levels at some of our data centers and therefore any increase in these locations would need to be accomplished through the lease of additional property that satisfies our requirements. Property meeting our specifications may be scarce in our target markets. If we are unable to identify and enter into leases on commercially acceptable terms on a timely basis for any reason including due to competition from other companies seeking similar sites who may have greater financial resources than us, or are unable to expand our space in our current data centers, our rate of growth may be substantially impaired.

Our capital expenditures, together with ongoing operating expenses and obligations to service our debt, will be a drain on our cash flow and may decrease our cash balances. The capital markets in the recent past have been and may again become limited for external financing opportunities. Additional debt or equity financing, especially in the current credit-constrained climate, may not be available when needed or, if available, may not be available on satisfactory terms. Our inability to obtain needed debt and/or equity financing or to generate sufficient cash from operations may require us to prioritize projects or curtail capital expenditures which could adversely affect our results of operations.

Failure to renew or maintain real estate leases for our existing data centers on commercially acceptable terms, or at all, could harm our business.

Except for two Paris data centers (PAR3 and PAR5), acquired in December 2011, and the Schiphol-Rijk data center premises (AMS6), acquired in February 2012, and freehold land in Paris (PAR7) reported as a financial lease, we do not own the property on which our data centers are located and instead lease the majority of our data center space. We generally enter into leases for initial periods of 10 to 15 years (excluding renewal options). The majority of our leases are subject to an annual inflation-linked increase in rent and, on renewal (or earlier in some cases), the rent we pay may be reset to the current market rate. There is, therefore, a risk that there will be significant rent increases when the rent is reviewed. Our leases in France, Ireland, Belgium and the United Kingdom do not contain contractual options to renew or extend those leases, and we have exhausted or may in the future exhaust such options in other leases. With respect

 

12


Table of Contents

to our operating leases in France, certain landlords may terminate our operating leases following the expiration of the original lease period (being 12 years from the commencement date), and the other leases in France may be terminated by the landlords at the end of each three year period upon giving six months prior notice in the event the landlord wishes to carry out construction works to the building. The non-renewal of leases for our existing data center locations, or the renewal of such leases on less favorable terms, is a potentially significant risk to our ongoing operations. We would incur significant costs if we were forced to vacate one of our data centers due to the high costs of relocating our own and our customers’ equipment, installing the necessary infrastructure in a new data center and, as required by most of our leases, reinstating the vacated data center to its original state. In addition, if we were forced to vacate a data center, we could lose customers that chose our services based on location. If we fail to renew any of our leases, or the renewal of any of our leases is on less favorable terms and we fail to increase revenues sufficiently to offset the higher rental costs, this could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our leases may obligate us to make payments beyond our use of the property.

Our leases generally do not give us the right to terminate without penalty. Accordingly, we may incur costs under leases of data center space that is not or no longer is Revenue Generating Space. Some of our leases do not give us the right to sublet, and even if we have that right we may not be able to sublet the space on favorable terms or at all. We have incurred moderate costs in relation to such onerous lease contracts in recent years.

We may experience unforeseen delays and expenses when fitting out and upgrading data centers, and the costs could be greater than anticipated.

As we attempt to grow our business, substantial management effort and financial resources are employed by us in fitting out new, and upgrading existing, data centers. In addition, we periodically upgrade and replace certain equipment at our data centers. We may experience unforeseen delays and expenses in connection with a particular client project or data center build-out. In addition, unexpected technological changes could affect customer requirements and we may not have built such requirements into our data centers and may not have budgeted for the financial resources necessary to build out or redesign the space to meet such new requirements. Furthermore, the redesign of existing space is difficult to implement in practice as it normally requires moving existing customers. Although we have budgeted for expected build-out and equipment expenses, additional expenses in the event of unforeseen delays, cost overruns, unanticipated expenses, regulatory changes, unexpected technological changes and increases in the price of equipment may negatively affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

No assurance can be given that we will complete the build-out of new data centers or expansions of existing data centers within the proposed timeframe and cost parameters or at all. Any such failure could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We face significant competition and we may not be able to compete successfully against current and future competitors.

Our market is highly competitive. Most companies operate their own data centers and in many cases continue to invest in data center capacity, although there is a trend towards outsourcing. We compete against other carrier-neutral colocation data center service providers, such as Equinix, Telecity and Telehouse. We also compete with other types of data centers, including carrier-operated colocation, wholesale and IT outsourcers and managed services provider data centers. The cost, operational risk and inconvenience involved in relocating a customer’s networking and computing equipment to another data center are significant and have the effect of protecting a competitor’s data center from significant levels of customer churn.

Further, the growth of the European data center market has encouraged new, larger companies to consider entering the market, in particular those from the United States who are active in this sector. This

 

13


Table of Contents

growth and other factors have also led to increasing alliances and consolidation. Many of these companies may have significantly greater financial, marketing and other resources than we do. Some of our competitors may be willing to, and due to greater financial resources, may be better able to adopt aggressive pricing policies, including the provision of discounted data center services as an encouragement for customers to utilize their other services. Certain of our competitors may also provide our target customers with additional benefits, including bundled communications services, and may do so in a manner that is more attractive to potential customers than obtaining space in our data centers.

While not currently a direct competitive threat to us, wholesale providers of data center space might change their business plan to compete with us directly or open new data centers, thus making large amounts of capacity available at a single point in time and facilitating the entry into the market or expansion of our direct competitors. Wholesale providers of data center space may compete with us for the acquisition of new sites, thereby increasing the average rental prices for suitable sites.

In addition, corporations that have already invested substantial resources in in-house data center operations may be reluctant to outsource these services to a third party, or may choose to acquire space within a wholesale provider’s data center, which would allow them to manage the equipment themselves. If existing customers were to conclude that they could provide the same service in-house at a lower cost, with greater reliability, with increased security or for other reasons, they might move such services in-house and we would lose customers and business.

We may also see increased competition for data center space and customers from wholesale data center providers, such as large real estate companies. Rather than leasing available space to large single tenants, real estate companies, including certain of our landlords, may decide to convert the space instead to smaller square foot units designed for multi-tenant colocation use. In addition to the risk of losing customers to wholesale data center providers, this could also reduce the amount of space available to us for expansion in the future. As a result of such competition, we could suffer from downward pricing pressure and the loss of customers (and potential customers), which would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our services may have a long sales cycle that may materially adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

A customer’s decision to take space in one of our data centers typically involves a significant commitment of resources by us and by potential customers, who often require internal approvals. In addition, some customers will be reluctant to commit to locating in our data centers until they are confident that the data center has adequate available carrier connections and network density. As a result, we may have a long sales cycle lasting anywhere from three months for smaller customers to periods in excess of one year for some of our larger customers. Furthermore, we may expend significant time and resources in pursuing a particular sale or customer that does not result in revenue.

The slowdown in global economies and their delayed recovery may further impact this long sales cycle by making it extremely difficult for customers to accurately forecast and plan future business activities. This could cause customers to slow spending, or delay decision-making, on our services, which would delay and lengthen our sales cycle.

Delays due to the length of our sales cycle may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our business is dependent on the adequate supply of electrical power and could be harmed by prolonged electrical power outages or increases in the cost of power.

The operation of each of our data centers requires an extremely large amount of power and we are among the largest power consumers in certain cities in which we operate data centers. We cannot be certain that there will be adequate power in all of the locations in which we operate, or intend to open additional

 

14


Table of Contents

data centers. We attempt to limit exposure to system downtime caused by power outages by using back-up generators and uninterrupted power supply systems; however, we may not be able to limit our exposure entirely even with these protections in place. We also cannot guarantee that the generators will always provide sufficient power or restore power in time to avoid loss of or damage to our customers’ and our equipment. Any loss of services or damage to equipment resulting from a temporary loss of or reduction in power at any of our data centers could harm our customers, reduce customers’ confidence in our services, impair our ability to attract new customers and retain existing customers, and result in us incurring financial obligations to our customers as they might be eligible for service credits pursuant to their service level agreements with us. Our customers may also seek damages from us.

In addition, we are susceptible to fluctuations in power costs in all of the locations in which we operate. Clients have two options with respect to power usage. They can either (i) pay for power usage in “plugs” in advance (typically included in the total cabinet price), which are contractually defined amounts of power per month, for which the customer must pay in full, regardless of how much power is actually used; or (ii) pay for their actual power usage in arrears on a metered basis. While we are contractually able to recover power cost increases from our customers, some portion of the increased costs may not be recovered or recovered in a delayed fashion based on commercial reasons and as a result, may have a negative impact on our results of operations.

Although we have not experienced any power outages that have had a material impact on our financial condition in the past, power outages or increases in the cost of power to us could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

A general lack of electrical power resources sufficient to meet our customers’ demands may impair our ability to utilize fully the available space at our existing data centers or our plans to open new data centers.

In each of our markets, we rely on third parties to provide a sufficient amount of power for current and future customers. Power and cooling requirements are generally growing on a per customer basis. Some of our customers are increasing and may continue to increase their use of high-density electrical power equipment, such as blade servers, which can significantly increase the demand for power per customer and cooling requirements for our data centers. Future demand for electrical power and cooling may exceed the designed electrical power and cooling infrastructure in our data centers. As the electrical power infrastructure is typically one of the most important limiting factors in our data centers, our ability to utilize available space fully may be limited. This, as well as any inability to secure sufficient power resources from third-party providers, could have a negative impact on the effective available capacity of a given data center and limit our ability to grow our business.

The ability to increase the power capacity or power infrastructure of a data center, should we decide to, is dependent on several factors including, but not limited to, the local utility’s ability and willingness to provide additional power, the length of time required to provide that power and/or whether it is feasible to upgrade the electrical infrastructure and cooling systems of a data center to deliver additional power to customers.

The availability of sufficient power may also pose a risk to the successful development of future data centers. In cities where we intend to open new data centers, we may face delays in obtaining sufficient power to operate our data centers. Our ability to secure adequate power sources will depend on several factors, including whether the local power supply is at or close to its limit, whether new connections for our data center would require the local power company to install a new substation or feeder and whether new connections for our data center would increase the overall risks of blackouts or power outages in a given geographic area.

If we are unable to utilize fully the physical space available within our data centers or successfully develop additional data centers or expand existing data centers due to restrictions on available electrical power or cooling, we may be unable to accept new customers or increase the services provided to existing customers, which may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

15


Table of Contents

A significant percentage of our Monthly Recurring Revenue is generated by contracts with terms of one year or less remaining. If those contracts are not renewed, or if their pricing terms are negotiated downwards, our business, financial condition and results of operations would be materially adversely affected.

The majority of our initial customer contracts are entered into on a fixed-term basis for periods from three to five years, which, unless terminated in advance, are automatically renewed for subsequent one-year periods. Please see Item 4 “Information on the Company—Customer Contracts.” As at December 31, 2012, 39% of our Monthly Recurring Revenue was generated by contracts with terms of one year or less remaining. Consequently, a large part of our customer base could either terminate their contracts with us at relatively short notice, or seek to re-negotiate the pricing of such contracts downwards, which, if either were to occur, would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our inability to use all or part of our net deferred tax assets could cause us to pay taxes at an earlier date and in greater amounts than expected.

As at December 31, 2012, we had €28.0 million of recognized and €1.5 million of unrecognized, net deferred tax assets. We cannot assure you that we will generate sufficient profit in the relevant jurisdictions to utilize these deferred tax assets fully or that the tax loss availability will not expire before we have been able to fully utilize them. In addition, applicable law could change in one or more jurisdictions in which we have deferred tax assets, rendering such assets unusable. Either such event would cause us to pay taxes in greater amounts than would otherwise occur, which may have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.

Our operating results have fluctuated in the past and may fluctuate in the future, which may make it difficult to evaluate our business and prospects.

Our operating results have fluctuated in the past and may continue to fluctuate in the future, due to a variety of factors, which include:

 

   

demand for our services;

 

   

competition from other data center operators;

 

   

the cost and availability of power;

 

   

the introduction of new services by us and/or our competitors;

 

   

data center expansion by us and/or our competitors;

 

   

changes in our pricing policies and those of our competitors;

 

   

a change in our customer retention rates;

 

   

economic conditions affecting the Internet, telecommunications and e-commerce industries; and

 

   

changes in general economic conditions.

Any of the foregoing factors, or other factors discussed elsewhere in this annual report, could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. Although we have experienced growth in revenues during the past three financial years, this growth rate is not necessarily indicative of future operating results. In addition, a relatively large portion of our expenses cannot be reduced in the short-term, particularly personnel and property costs and part of our power costs, which means that our results of operations are particularly sensitive to fluctuations in revenues. As such, comparisons to prior reporting periods should not be relied upon as indications of our future performance. In addition, our operating results in one or more future periods may fail to meet the expectations of securities analysts or investors. If this happens, the market price of our ordinary shares may decline significantly.

 

16


Table of Contents

We are dependent on third-party suppliers for equipment, technology and other services.

We contract with third parties for the supply of equipment (including generators, UPS systems and cabinet equipment) on which we are dependent to operate our business. Poor performance by, or any inability of, our suppliers to provide necessary equipment, products, services and maintenance could have a negative effect on our reputation and harm our business.

We depend on the ongoing service of our personnel and senior management team and may not be able to attract, train and retain a sufficient number of qualified personnel to maintain and grow our business.

Our success depends upon our ability to attract, retain and motivate highly-skilled employees, including the data center personnel who are integral to the establishment and running of our data centers, as well as sales and marketing personnel who play a large role in attracting and retaining customers. Due to several factors, including the rapid growth of the Internet, there is aggressive competition for experienced data center employees. We compete intensely with other companies to recruit and hire from this limited pool. In addition, the training of new employees requires a large amount of our time and resources. If we cannot attract, train and retain qualified personnel, we may be unable to expand our business in line with our strategy, compete for new customers or retain existing customers, which could cause our business, financial condition and results of operations to suffer.

Our future performance also depends to a significant degree upon the continued contributions of our senior management team. The loss of any member of our senior management team could significantly harm us. To the extent that the services of members of our senior management team would be unavailable to us for any reason, we would be required to hire other personnel to manage and operate our Company. There can be no assurance that we would be able to locate or employ such personnel on acceptable terms or on a timely basis.

Our failure to maintain competitive compensation packages, including equity incentives, may be disruptive to our business. If one or more of our key personnel resigns from our Company to join or form a competitor, the loss of such personnel and any resulting loss of existing or potential customers to any such competitor could harm our business, financial condition and results of operations. In addition, we may be unable to prevent the unauthorized disclosure or use of our technical knowledge, practices or procedures by departed personnel.

Disruptions to our physical infrastructure could lead to significant costs, reduce our revenues and harm our business reputation and financial results.

Our business depends on providing customers with highly reliable and secure services. A number of factors may disrupt our ability to provide services to our customers, including:

 

   

human error;

 

   

power loss;

 

   

physical or electronic security breaches;

 

   

terrorist acts;

 

   

interruptions to the fiber network;

 

   

hardware and software defects;

 

   

fire, earthquake, flood and other natural disasters;

 

   

improper maintenance by our landlords; and

 

   

sabotage and vandalism.

Disruptions at one or more of our data centers, whether or not within our control, could result in service interruptions or significant equipment damage, leading to significant costs and revenue reductions. Please see “—Risks Related to our Industry—Terrorist activity throughout the world and military action to counter terrorism could adversely impact our business.”

 

17


Table of Contents

Substantial indebtedness could adversely affect our financial condition and our ability to operate our business, and we may not be able to generate sufficient cash flows to meet our debt service obligations.

We have a significant amount of debt and expect to incur additional debt to support our growth. As of December 31, 2012, our total indebtedness was approximately €292.0 million, our stockholders’ equity was €375.6 million and our cash and cash equivalents totaled €68.7 million. Our substantial amount of debt could have important consequences. For example, it could:

 

   

make it more difficult for us to satisfy our debt obligations;

 

   

restrict us from making strategic acquisitions;

 

   

limit our flexibility in planning for, or reacting to, changes in our business and future business opportunities, thereby placing us at a competitive disadvantage if our competitors are not as highly leveraged;

 

   

increase our vulnerability to general adverse economic and industry conditions; or

 

   

require us to dedicate a substantial portion of our cash flow from operations to make interest and principal payments on our debt, reducing the availability of our cash flow to fund future capital expenditures, working capital, execution of our expansion strategy and other general corporate requirements;

 

   

limit our ability to borrow additional funds, even when necessary to maintain adequate liquidity, which would also limit our ability to further expand our business; and

 

   

make us more vulnerable to increases in interest rates because of the variable interest rates on some of our borrowings to the extent we have not entirely hedged such variable rate debt.

The occurrence of any of the foregoing factors could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

We may also need to refinance a portion of our outstanding debt as it matures, such as our €260.0 million 9.50% senior secured notes due in February 2017 and the €10.0 million mortgage due in November 2017. There is a risk that we may not be able to refinance existing debt or that the terms of any refinancing may not be as favorable as the terms of our existing debt. Furthermore, if prevailing interest rates or other factors at the time of refinancing result in higher interest rates upon refinancing, then the interest expense relating to that refinanced indebtedness would increase. These risks could materially adversely affect our financial condition, cash flows and results of operations

If we increase our indebtedness by borrowing under our revolving credit facility or incur other new indebtedness, the risks described above would increase.

Our insurance may not be adequate to cover all losses.

The insurance we maintain covers material damage to property, business interruption and third-party liability. This insurance contains limitations on the total coverage for damage due to catastrophic events, such as flooding or terrorism. In addition, there is an overall cap on our general insurance coverage per data center in any one year. There is, therefore, a risk that if one or more data centers were damaged, the total amount of the loss would not be recoverable by us.

Also, our insurance policies include customary exclusions, deductibles and other conditions that could limit our ability to recover losses. In addition, some of our policies are subject to limitations involving co-payments and policy limits that may not be sufficient to cover losses. If we experience a loss that is uninsured or that exceeds policy limits, or if customers consider that there is a significant risk that such an event will occur, this may negatively affect our reputation, business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

18


Table of Contents

Our failure to meet the performance standards under our service level agreements may subject us to liability to our customers, which could have a material adverse effect on our reputation, business, financial condition or results of operations.

We have service level agreements with substantially all of our customers in which we provide various guarantees regarding our level of service. Our inability to provide services consistent with these guarantees may lead to large losses for our customers, who consequently may be entitled to service credits for their accounts or to terminate their relationship with us. We have issued service credits to customers in the past due to our failure to meet service level commitments and we may do so in the future. We cannot be sure that our customers will accept these service credits as compensation in the future. Our failure or inability to meet a customer’s expectations or any deficiency in the services we provide to customers could result in a claim against us for substantial damages. Provisions contained in our agreements with customers attempting to limit damages, including provisions to limit liability for damages, may not be enforceable in all instances or may otherwise fail to protect us for liability damages.

We could be subject to costs, as well as claims, litigation or other potential liability, in connection with risks associated with the security of our data centers.

One of our key service offerings is our high level of physical premises security. Many of our customers entrust their key strategic IT services and applications to us due, in part, to the level of security we offer. If anyone is able to breach our security, they could physically damage our and our customers’ equipment and/or misappropriate either our proprietary information or the information of our customers or cause interruptions or malfunctions in our operations.

There can be no assurance that the security of any of our data centers will not be breached or the equipment and information of our customers put at risk. Any security breach could have a serious effect on our reputation and could prevent new customers from choosing our services and lead to customers terminating their contracts early and seeking to recover losses suffered, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. We may incur significant additional costs to protect against physical premises security breaches or to alleviate problems caused by such breaches.

We face risks relating to foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations.

Our reporting currency for purposes of our financial statements is the euro. We also, however, earn revenues and incur operating costs in non-euro denominated currencies, such as British pounds, Swiss francs, Danish kroner, Swedish krona and US dollars. We recognize foreign currency gains or losses arising from our operations in the period incurred. As a result, currency fluctuations between the euro and the non-euro currencies in which we do business will cause us to incur foreign currency translation gains and losses. We cannot predict the effects of exchange rate fluctuations upon our future operating results because of the number of currencies involved, the variability of currency exposure and the potential volatility of currency exchange rates. We do not currently engage in foreign exchange hedging transactions to manage the risk of our foreign currency exposure.

The slowdown in global economies and their delayed recovery may have an impact on our business and financial condition in ways that we cannot currently predict.

The European debt crisis and slowdown and delayed recovery in the global financial markets could continue to have an adverse effect on our business and our financial condition. If the market conditions continue to remain weak or uncertain, some of our customers may have difficulty paying us and we may experience increased churn in our customer base. Our sales cycle could also lengthen as customers slow spending, or delay decision-making, on our services, which could adversely affect our revenue growth. Finally, we could also experience pricing pressure as a result of economic conditions if our competitors lower prices and attempt to lure away our customers.

 

19


Table of Contents

Additionally, our ability to access the capital markets may be severely restricted at a time when we would like, or need, to do so, which could have an impact on our ability to pursue additional expansion opportunities and maintain our desired level of revenue growth in the future.

Acquisitions present many risks, and we may not realize the financial or strategic goals that were contemplated at the time of any transaction.

We may make acquisitions in the future, which may include acquisitions of businesses, products, services or technologies that we believe to be complementary. We may pay for future acquisitions by using our existing cash resources (which may limit other potential uses of our cash), incurring additional debt (which may increase our interest expense, leverage and debt service requirements) and/or issuing shares (which may dilute our existing stockholders and have a negative effect on our earnings per share). Acquisitions expose us to several potential risks, including:

 

   

the possible disruption of our ongoing business and diversion of management’s attention by acquisition, transition and integration activities;

 

   

our potential inability to successfully pursue or realize some or all of the anticipated revenue opportunities associated with an acquisition or investment;

 

   

the possibility that we may not be able to successfully integrate acquired businesses, or businesses in which we invest, or achieve anticipated operating efficiencies or cost savings;

 

   

the possibility that announced acquisitions may not be completed, due to failure to satisfy the conditions to closing or for other reasons;

 

   

the dilution of our existing stockholders as a result of our issuing stock in transactions;

 

   

the possibility of customer dissatisfaction if we are unable to achieve levels of quality and stability on par with past practices;

 

   

the possibility that additional capital expenditures may be required or that transaction expenses associated with acquisitions may be higher than anticipated;

 

   

the possibility that required financing to fund the requirements of an acquisition may not be available on acceptable terms or at all;

 

   

the possibility that we may be unable to obtain required approvals from governmental authorities under antitrust and competition laws on a timely basis or at all, which could, among other things, delay or prevent us from completing an acquisition, limit our ability to realize the expected financial or strategic benefits of an acquisition or have other adverse effects on our current business and operations;

 

   

the possibility of loss or reduction in value of acquired businesses;

 

   

the possibility that carriers may find it cost-prohibitive or impractical to bring fiber and networks into a new data center;

 

   

the possibility of litigation or other claims in connection with or as a result of an acquisition, including claims from terminated employees, customers, former stockholders or other third parties;

 

   

the possibility of pre-existing undisclosed liabilities, including but not limited to lease or landlord related liability, environmental or asbestos liability, for which insurance coverage may be insufficient or unavailable; and

 

   

the possibility that we will not have sufficient customer demand to realize expected returns on these investments.

 

20


Table of Contents

The occurrence of any of these risks could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, financial condition or cash flows.

We focus on the development of communities of interest within customer segments and the attraction of magnetic customers. Our failure to attract, grow and retain these communities of interest could harm our business and operating results.

Our ability to maximize revenue growth depends on our ability to develop and grow communities of interest within our target customer segments such as network providers, managed service providers, financial services, enterprises and digital media and distribution. Within each community, there are certain customers, which we consider to be magnetic customers as we believe they make it attractive to other customers to be in our data centers. Our ability to attract magnetic customers to our data centers will depend on a variety of factors, including the presence of multiple carriers, the mix of our offerings, the overall mix of customers, the presence of other magnetic customers, the data center’s operating reliability and security and our ability to effectively market our offerings. We may not be able to attract magnetic customers and thus be unsuccessful in the development of our communities of interest. This may hinder the development, growth and retention of customer communities of interest and adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Consolidation may have a negative impact on our business model.

If customers combine businesses, they may require less colocation space, which could lead to churn in our customer base. Competitors in some of our markets may also consolidate, which can make it more difficult for us to compete. Consolidation of our customers and/or our competitors may present a risk to our business model and have a negative impact on our revenues.

Risks Related to our Industry

The European data center industry has suffered from over-capacity in the past, and a substantial increase in the supply of new data center capacity and/or a general decrease in demand for data center services could have an adverse impact on industry pricing and profit margins.

The European data center industry has previously suffered from overcapacity. For example, certain Internet-based customers have previously contracted to use more space than necessary to meet their needs and in the periods following adverse market conditions, the number of Internet-related business failures increased significantly, resulting in high levels of customer churn due to the termination or non-renewal of contracts.

A substantial increase in the supply of new data center capacity in the European data center market and/or a general decrease in demand, or in the rate of increase in demand, for data center services could have an adverse impact on industry pricing and profit margins. If there is insufficient customer demand for data center services, our business, financial condition and operating results would be adversely affected.

If we do not keep pace with technological changes, evolving industry standards and customer requirements, our competitive position will suffer.

The Internet and telecommunications industries are characterized by rapidly changing technology, evolving industry standards and changing customer needs. Accordingly, our future success will depend, in part, on our ability to meet the challenge of these changes. Among the most important challenges that we may face are the need to: continue to develop our strategic and technical expertise, influence and respond to emerging industry standards and other technological changes, enhance our current services and develop new services that meet changing customer needs.

All of these challenges must be met in a timely and cost-effective manner. Some of our competitors may have greater financial resources, which would allow them to react better or more quickly to changes than we may be able to. We may not effectively meet these challenges as rapidly as our competitors or at all and our failure to do so could harm our business.

 

21


Table of Contents

Terrorist activity throughout the world and military action to counter terrorism could adversely impact our business.

Due to the high volume of important data that passes through data centers, there is a real risk that terrorists seeking to damage financial and technological infrastructure view data centers generally, and those in concentrated areas specifically, as potential targets. These factors may increase our costs due to the need to provide enhanced security, which would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations if we were unable to pass such costs on to our customers. These circumstances may also adversely affect the ability of companies, including us, to raise capital. We may not have adequate property and liability insurance to cover terrorist attacks.

In addition, we depend heavily on the physical infrastructure (particularly as it relates to power) that exists in the markets in which we operate. Any damage to such infrastructure, particularly in the major European markets such as Amsterdam, Frankfurt, London, Madrid and Paris, where we derive a substantial amount of our revenue and which are likely to be more prone to terrorist activities, may materially and adversely affect our business.

Our carrier neutral business model depends on the presence of numerous telecommunications carrier networks in our data centers.

The presence of diverse telecommunications carriers’ fiber networks in our data centers is critical to our ability to retain and attract new customers. We are not a telecommunications carrier and as such we rely on third parties to provide our non-carrier customers with carrier services. We cannot assure you that the carriers operating within our data centers will not cease to do so. For example, as a result of strategic decisions or consolidations, some carriers may decide to downsize or terminate connectivity within our data centers, which could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We may be subject to reputational damage and legal action in connection with the information disseminated by our customers.

We may face potential direct and indirect liability for claims of defamation, negligence, copyright, patent or trademark infringement and other claims, as well as reputational damage, based on the nature and content of the materials disseminated from our data centers, including on the grounds of allegations of the illegality of certain activities carried out by customers through their equipment located in our data centers. For example, lawsuits may be brought against us claiming that content distributed by our customers may be regulated or banned. Our general liability insurance may not cover any such claim or may not be adequate to protect us against all liability that may be imposed. In addition, on a limited number of occasions in the past, businesses, organizations and individuals have sent unsolicited commercial e-mails (“spam”), which may be viewed as offensive by recipients, from servers hosted at our data centers to a number of people, typically to advertise products or services. We have in the past received, and may in the future receive, letters from recipients of information transmitted by our customers objecting to spam. Although our contracts with our customers prohibit them from spamming, there can be no assurance that customers will not engage in this practice, which could subject us to claims for damages, damage our reputation and have a material adverse effect on our business.

 

22


Table of Contents

Risks Related to Regulation

Laws and government regulations governing Internet-related services, related communication services and information technology and electronic commerce, across the European countries in which we operate, continue to evolve and, depending on the evolution of such regulations, may adversely affect our business.

Laws and governmental regulations governing Internet-related services, related communications services and information technology and electronic commerce continue to evolve. This is true across the various European countries in which we operate. In particular, the laws regarding privacy and those regarding gambling and other activities that certain countries deem illegal are continuing to evolve.

Changes in laws or regulations (or the interpretation of such laws or regulations) or national or EU policy affecting our activities and/or those of our customers and competitors, including regulation of prices and interconnection arrangements, regulation of access arrangements to types of infrastructure, regulation of privacy requirements through the protection of personal data and regulation of activity considered illegal through rules affecting data center and managed service providers could materially adversely affect our results by decreasing revenue, increasing costs or impairing our ability to offer services.

The industry in which we operate is subject to environmental and health and safety laws and regulations and may be subject to more stringent efficiency, environmental and health and safety laws and regulations in the future.

We are subject to various environmental and health and safety laws and regulations, including those relating to the generation, storage, handling and disposal of hazardous substances and technological equipment, the maintenance of warehouse facilities and the generation and use of electricity. Certain of these laws and regulations are capable of imposing liability for the entire cost of the investigation and remediation of contaminated sites, without regard to fault or the lawfulness of the disposal activity, on former owners and operators of real property and persons who have disposed of or released hazardous substances at any location. Compliance with these laws and regulations could impose substantial ongoing compliance costs and operating restrictions on us.

Hazardous substances or regulated materials of which we are not aware may be present at data centers leased and operated by us. If any such contaminants are discovered at our data centers, we may be responsible under applicable laws, regulations or leases for any required removal or clean-up or other action at substantial cost.

Our facilities contain tanks and other containers for the storage of diesel fuel and significant quantities of lead acid batteries to provide back-up power. We cannot guarantee that our environmental compliance program will be able to prevent leaks or spills in these or other technical installations.

In addition, as a consumer of substantial amounts of electricity, we may be affected by the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme, or the Scheme. The CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme Order 2010 entered into force on March 22, 2010, introducing a mandatory UK-wide emissions trading scheme from April 1, 2010. The Scheme applies to organizations that have at least one settled half hourly meter and that also consume over 6000 MWh per year of half-hourly metered electricity in the qualification year for the relevant phase (which for the first phase of the Scheme was calendar year 2008). Qualifying organizations have to comply with the Scheme or face criminal and civil penalties. Participants are required to purchase emissions allowances from the UK Government to cover CRC emissions from energy supplies for which they are responsible in each year of the Scheme. Allowances equal to the quantity of CRC emissions for the relevant energy supplies from 2011-2012 compliance period had to be surrendered by 28 September 2012. The cost of the allowances for the initial period of the Scheme is £12 per tonne CO2, although the cost of each allowance will increase in the later years of the Scheme. The UK Government has announced that in the 2014-2015 compliance period, the price of allowances will rise to £16 per tonne of CO2 and from the 2015-2016 compliance period, the price will rise in line with the retail prices index. In Phase 2 of the Scheme,

 

23


Table of Contents

there will be two fixed price allowance sales for each compliance year, with no cap. In the 2012 Autumn Statement, the UK Chancellor announced that the tax element of the scheme will be a high priority for removal when public finances allow. However, it is unclear what this means, but it could result in the termination of allowance sales completely or the reinstatement of the revenue recycling element of the Scheme. Potential impacts of the Scheme on our data centers in the UK include, the costs associated with improving energy efficiency in order to reduce electricity consumption and hence costs of allowances and the administrative and compliance costs of participating in the Scheme.

The Scheme is currently being simplified by the UK Government in an effort to reduce participants’ administrative costs, and measures to be introduced include assessing qualification on the basis of supplies through settled half-hourly meters only, abolishing the Performance League Table from 2013 (although the Environment Agency will still publish participants’ aggregated energy use and emissions data) and disapplying the Scheme’s supply rules to climate change agreement facilities and EU ETS installations. The Government has also said it will review the effectiveness of the Scheme in 2016.

Our data centers may also be adversely affected by any future application of additional regulation relating to energy usage, for example seeking to reduce the power consumption of companies and fees or levies in this regard (including the EU Energy End-Use Efficiency and Energy Services Directive (Directive 2006/32/EC)). It is possible that the resulting legislation will mean that service providers, including us, that consume energy could incur increased energy costs, and/or caps on energy use. The European Union is continuing to implement its Climate and Energy Package legislation with a 20% greenhouse gas emissions reduction target against 1990 for the 2013-2020 period and, following the December 2011 Durban climate summit, is actively involved in the extension of the Kyoto Protocol beyond 2012. The national targets, covering the period 2013-2020, are differentiated according to European Union member states’ relative wealth. They range from a 20% emissions reduction (compared to 2005) by the richest European Union member states to a 20% increase by the least wealthy (although this will still require a limitation effort by all countries). European Union member states must report on their emissions annually under the European Union monitoring mechanism. It is expected that this commitment may give rise to future domestic legislation relating to energy efficiency across the jurisdictions in which we have data centers and this may affect our business.

Non-compliance with, or liabilities under, existing or future environmental or health and safety laws and regulations, including failure to hold requisite permits, or the adoption of more stringent requirements in the future, could result in fines, penalties, third-party claims and other costs that could have a material adverse effect on us.

Risks Related to Our Ordinary Shares

The market price for our ordinary shares may continue to be volatile.

From January 1, 2012 to December 31, 2012, the closing sale price of our common stock on the NYSE ranged from $13.57 to $23.76 per share. The market price for our shares is likely to be highly volatile and subject to wide fluctuations in response to factors including, but not limited to, the following:

 

   

announcements of new products and services by us or our competitors;

 

   

technological breakthroughs in the data center, networking or computing industries;

 

   

news regarding any gain or loss of customers by us;

 

   

news regarding recruitment or loss of key personnel by us or our competitors;

 

   

announcements of competitive developments, acquisitions or strategic alliances in our industry;

 

   

changes in the general condition of the global economy and financial markets;

 

   

general market conditions or other developments affecting us or our industry;

 

24


Table of Contents
   

the operating and stock price performance of other companies, other industries and other events or factors beyond our control;

 

   

cost and availability of power and cooling capacity;

 

   

cost and availability of additional space inventory either through lease or acquisition in our target markets;

 

   

regulatory developments in our target markets affecting us, our customers or our competitors;

 

   

changes in demand for interconnection and colocation products and services in general or at our facilities in particular;

 

   

actual or anticipated fluctuations in our quarterly results of operations;

 

   

changes in financial projections or estimates about our financial or operational performance by securities research analysts;

 

   

changes in the economic performance or market valuations of other data center companies;

 

   

release or expiry of lock-up or other transfer restrictions on our outstanding ordinary shares; and

 

   

sales or perceived sales of additional ordinary shares.

In addition, the securities market has from time to time experienced significant price and volume fluctuations that are not related to the operating performance of particular companies. These market fluctuations may also have a material adverse effect on the market price of our ordinary shares.

A substantial portion of our total outstanding ordinary shares may be sold into the market at any time. Such future sales or issuances, or perceived future sales or issuances, could adversely affect the price of our shares.

If our existing shareholders sell, or are perceived as intending to sell, substantial amounts of our ordinary shares, including those issued upon the exercise of our outstanding share options, the market price of our ordinary shares could be adversely impacted. Such sales, or perceived potential sales, by our existing shareholders might make it more difficult for us to issue new equity or equity-related securities in the future at a time and price we deem appropriate. The ordinary shares offered in our initial public offering were eligible for immediate resale in the public market without restrictions. Shares previously held by our existing shareholders may also be sold in the public market in the future if registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), or if such shares qualify for an exemption from registration, including by reason of Rules 144 or 701 under the Securities Act. Additionally, we intend to register all of our ordinary shares that we may issue under our employee stock ownership plans. Once we register those shares, they can be freely sold in the public market upon issuance, unless pursuant to their terms these stock awards have transfer restrictions attached to them.

You may not be able to exercise pre-emptive rights.

Our board of directors has the power to limit or exclude pre-emptive rights in respect of any issue and/or grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. Such designation will be limited to our authorized share capital from time to time and will be effective for a period of five years. As a result, we may issue additional shares for future acquisitions or other purposes while excluding any pre-emptive rights. If we issue additional shares without pre-emptive rights, your ownership interests in our Company would be diluted and this in turn could have a material adverse effect on the price of our shares.

We may need additional capital and may sell additional ordinary shares or other equity securities or incur indebtedness, which could result in additional dilution to our shareholders or increase our debt service obligations.

We believe that our current cash and anticipated cash flow from operations will be sufficient to meet our anticipated cash needs for the foreseeable future. We may, however, require additional cash resources due to changed business conditions or other future developments, including any investments or acquisitions

 

25


Table of Contents

we may decide to pursue. If these resources are insufficient to satisfy our cash requirements, we may seek to sell additional equity or debt securities or utilize our existing or obtain a new credit facility. The sale of additional equity securities could result in additional dilution to our shareholders. The incurrence of indebtedness would limit our ability to pay dividends or require us to seek consents for the payment of dividends, increase our vulnerability to general adverse economic and industry conditions, limit our ability to pursue our business strategies, require us to dedicate a substantial portion of our cash flow from operations to service our debt, thereby reducing the availability of our cash flow to fund capital expenditure, working capital requirements and other general corporate needs, and limit our flexibility in planning for, or reacting to, changes in our business and our industry. We cannot assure you that financing will be available in amounts or on terms acceptable to us, if at all.

We have never paid, do not currently intend to pay and may not be able to pay any dividends on our ordinary shares.

We have never declared or paid any dividends on our ordinary shares and currently do not plan to declare dividends on our ordinary shares in the foreseeable future. If we were to choose to declare dividends in the future, the payment of cash dividends on our shares is restricted under the terms of the agreements governing our indebtedness. In addition, because we are a holding company, our ability to pay cash dividends on our ordinary shares may be limited by restrictions on our ability to obtain sufficient funds through dividends from subsidiaries, including restrictions under the terms of the agreements governing our and our subsidiaries’ indebtedness. In that regard, our wholly-owned subsidiaries are limited in their ability to pay dividends or otherwise make distributions to us. Under Dutch law, we may only pay dividends out of profits as shown in our adopted statutory annual accounts. We will only be able to declare and pay dividends to the extent our equity exceeds the sum of the paid and called up portion of our ordinary share capital and the reserves that must be maintained in accordance with provisions of Dutch law and our articles of association. Our board of directors will have the discretion to determine to what extent profits shall be retained by way of a reserve. Appropriation and distribution of dividends will be subject to the approval of our general meeting of shareholders. Our board of directors, in determining to what extent profits shall be retained by way of a reserve, will consider our ability to declare and pay dividends in light of our future operations and earnings, capital expenditure requirements, general financial conditions, legal and contractual restrictions and other factors that it may deem relevant.

Your rights and responsibilities as a shareholder will be governed by Dutch law and will differ in some respects from the rights and responsibilities of shareholders under U.S. law, and your shareholder rights under Dutch law may not be as clearly established as shareholder rights are established under the laws of some U.S. jurisdictions.

Our corporate affairs are governed by our articles of association and by the laws governing companies incorporated in The Netherlands. The rights of our shareholders and the responsibilities of members of our board of directors under Dutch law may not be as clearly established as under the laws of some U.S. jurisdictions. In the performance of its duties, our board of directors will be required by Dutch law to consider the interests of our Company, our shareholders, our employees and other stakeholders in all cases with reasonableness and fairness. It is possible that some of these parties will have interests that are different from, or in addition to, your interests as a shareholder. We anticipate that all of our shareholder meetings will take place in The Netherlands.

In addition, the rights of holders of ordinary shares and many of the rights of shareholders as they relate to, for example, the exercise of shareholder rights, are governed by Dutch law and our articles of association and differ from the rights of shareholders under U.S. law. For example, Dutch law does not grant appraisal rights to a company’s shareholders who wish to challenge the consideration to be paid upon a merger or consolidation of the company. See Item 10 “Additional Information—General.”

The provisions of Dutch corporate law and our articles of association have the effect of concentrating control over certain corporate decisions and transactions in the hands of our board of directors. As a result, holders of our shares may have more difficulty in protecting their interests in the face of actions by members of our board of directors than if we were incorporated in the United States. See Item 10 “Additional Information—General.”

 

26


Table of Contents

The interests of our principal shareholders may be inconsistent with your interests.

As of April 1, 2013, private equity investment funds affiliated with Baker Capital indirectly own 30.20 % of our equity. Upon completion of our initial public offering, we entered into a shareholders agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of our board of directors, including the right to nominate the chairman of our board of directors. Please see Item 7: “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions”, “Related Party Transactions—Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital.” As a result, these shareholders have, and will continue to have, directly or indirectly, the power, among other things, to affect our legal and capital structure and our day-to-day operations, as well as the ability to elect and change our management and to approve other changes to our operation. The interests of Baker Capital and its affiliates could conflict with your interests, particularly if we encounter financial difficulties or are unable to pay our debts when due. Affiliates of Baker Capital may also have an interest in pursuing acquisitions, divestitures, financings or other transactions that, in their judgment, could enhance their equity investments, although such transactions might involve risks to you as a holder of ordinary shares. In addition, Baker Capital or its affiliates may, in the future, own businesses that directly compete with ours or that do business with us. The concentration of ownership may further have the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change of control of our Company, could deprive our shareholders of an opportunity to receive a premium for their ordinary shares as part of a sale of our Company and might ultimately affect the market price of our ordinary shares.

We are a foreign private issuer and, as a result, and as permitted by the listing requirements of the New York Stock Exchange, we may rely on certain home country governance practices rather than the corporate governance requirements of the New York Stock Exchange.

Many of the corporate governance rules in the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) Listed Company Manual (the “NYSE Manual”) do not apply to the Company as a “foreign private issuer”; however, Rule 303A.11 requires foreign private issuers to describe significant differences between their corporate governance standards and the corporate governance standards applicable to U.S. companies listed on the NYSE. While the Company’s management believes that its corporate governance practices are similar in many respects to those of U.S. NYSE-listed companies and provide investors with protections that are comparable in many respects to those established by the NYSE Manual, there are certain key differences which are described below.

Under Sections 303A.04 and 303A.05 of the NYSE Manual, which govern nominating/corporate governance committees and compensation committees, respectively, the Company’s Nominating Committee and Compensation Committee do not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of each respective committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

For an overview of our corporate governance principles, see Item 16G “Corporate Governance.” As a result, you may not have the same protections afforded to stockholders of companies that are not foreign private issuers.

You may be unable to enforce judgments obtained in U.S. courts against us.

We are incorporated under the laws of The Netherlands, and all or a substantial portion of our assets are located outside of the United States and certain of our directors and officers and certain other persons named in this annual report are, and will continue to be, non-residents of the United States. As a result, although we have appointed an agent for service of process in the United States, it may be difficult or impossible for United States investors to effect service of process within the United States upon us or our non-U.S. resident directors and officers or to enforce in the United States any judgment against us or them

 

27


Table of Contents

including for civil liabilities under the United States securities laws. Any judgment obtained in any United States federal or state court against us may, therefore, have to be enforced in the courts of The Netherlands, or such other foreign jurisdiction, as applicable. Because there is no treaty or other applicable convention between the United States and The Netherlands with respect to legal judgments, a judgment rendered by any United States federal or state court will not be enforced by the courts of The Netherlands unless the underlying claim is relitigated before a Dutch court. Under current practice, however, a Dutch court will generally grant the same judgment without a review of the merits of the underlying claim (i) if that judgment resulted from legal proceedings compatible with Dutch notions of due process, (ii) if that judgment does not contravene public policy of The Netherlands and (iii) if the jurisdiction of the United States federal or state court has been based on grounds that are internationally acceptable. Investors should not assume, however, that the courts of The Netherlands, or such other foreign jurisdiction, would enforce judgments of United States courts obtained against us predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the United States securities laws or that such courts would enforce, in original actions, liabilities against us predicated solely upon such laws.

We incur increased costs as a result of being a public company.

As a newly listed public company, we incur additional legal, accounting, insurance and other expenses that we have not incurred as a private company. We incur costs associated with our public company reporting requirements. In addition, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and related rules implemented by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) and the NYSE have imposed increased regulation and required enhanced corporate governance practices for public companies. Our efforts to comply with evolving laws, regulations and standards in this regard are likely to result in increased general and administrative expenses and a diversion of management time and attention from revenue generating activities to compliance activities. We also expect these new rules and regulations to make it more expensive for us to obtain director and officer liability insurance, and we may be required to accept reduced policy limits and coverage or incur substantially higher costs to obtain the same or similar coverage.

If our internal controls over financial reporting are found to be ineffective, our financial results or our stock price may be adversely affected.

Our most recent evaluation of our internal controls resulted in our conclusion that, as of December 31, 2012, our internal controls over financial reporting were effective. Our ability to manage our operations and growth, and other systems upgrades designed to support our growth, will require us to develop our controls and reporting systems and implement or adopt new controls and reporting systems. If in the future our internal control over financial reporting is found to be ineffective, or if a material weakness is identified in our controls over financial reporting, our financial results may be adversely affected. Investors may also lose confidence in the reliability of our financial statements which could adversely affect our stock price.

 

28


Table of Contents

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

Overview

We are a leading provider of carrier-neutral colocation data center services in Europe. We support approximately 1,300 customers through 33 data centers in 11 countries enabling them to protect, connect, process and distribute their most valuable information. Within our data centers, we enable our customers to connect to a broad range of telecommunications carriers, Internet service providers and other customers. Our data centers act as content, cloud and connectivity hubs that facilitate the processing, storage, sharing and distribution of data, content, applications and media between carriers and customers, creating an environment that we refer to as a community of interest.

Our core offering of carrier-neutral colocation services includes space, power, cooling and a secure environment in which to house our customers’ computing, network, storage and IT infrastructure. We enable our customers to reduce operational and capital costs while improving application performance and flexibility. We supplement our core colocation offering with a number of additional services, including network monitoring, remote monitoring of customer equipment, systems management, engineering support services, cross connects, data backup and storage.

We are headquartered near Amsterdam, The Netherlands, and we operate in major metropolitan areas, including London, Frankfurt, Paris, Amsterdam and Madrid the main data center markets in Europe. Our data centers are located in close proximity to the intersection of telecommunications fiber routes, and we house more than 450 carriers and Internet service providers and 18 European Internet exchanges. Our data centers allow our customers to lower their telecommunications costs and reduce latency, thereby improving the response time of their applications. This high level of connectivity fosters the development of communities of interest.

Strategy

Target New Customers in High Growth Segments to Further Develop our Communities of Interest

We categorize our customers into segments, and we will continue to target new customers in high growth market segments, including financial services, cloud and managed services providers, digital media and carriers. Winning new customers in these target markets enables us to expand existing, and build new, high value communities of interest within our data centers. For example, customers in the digital media segment benefit from the close proximity to content delivery network providers and Internet exchanges in order to rapidly deliver content to consumers. We expect the high value and reduced cost benefits of our communities of interest to continue to attract new customers, which will lead to decreased customer acquisition costs for us.

Increase Share of Spend from Existing Customers

We focus on increasing revenue from our existing customers in our target market segments. New revenue from our existing customers comprises a substantial portion of our new business, generating the majority of our new bookings. Our sales and marketing teams focus on proactively working with customers to identify expansion opportunities in new or existing markets.

Maintain Connectivity Leadership

We seek to increase the number of carriers in each of our data centers by expanding the presence of our existing carriers into additional data centers and targeting new carriers. We also will continue to develop our relationships with Internet exchanges and work to increase the number of Internet service providers in these exchanges. In countries where there is no significant Internet exchange, we will work with Internet service providers and other parties to create the appropriate Internet exchange. Our carrier sales and business development team will continue to work with our existing carriers and Internet service providers, and target new carriers and Internet service providers, to maximize our share of their data center spend, and to achieve the highest level of connectivity in each of our data centers.

 

29


Table of Contents

Continue to Deliver Best-in-Class Customer Service

We will continue to provide a high level of customer service in order to maximize customer satisfaction and minimize churn. Our European Customer Service Center operates 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, providing continual monitoring and troubleshooting and giving our customers one call access to full, multilingual technical support, thereby reducing our customers’ internal support costs. In addition, we will continue to develop our customer tools, which include an online customer portal to provide our customers with real-time access to information. We will continue to invest in our local service delivery and assurance teams, which provide flexibility and responsiveness to customer needs.

Disciplined Expansion and Conservative Financial Management

We plan to invest in our data center capacity, while maintaining our disciplined investment approach and prudent financial policy. We will continue to determine the size of our expansions based on selling patterns, pipeline and trends in existing demand as well as working with our customers to identify future capacity requirements. We only begin new expansions once we have identified customers and we have the capital to fully fund the build out. Our expansions are done in phases in order to manage the timing and scale of our capital expenditure obligations, reduce risk and improve our return on capital. Finally, we will continue to manage our capital deployment and financial management decisions based on adherence to our target internal rate of return on new expansions and target leverage ratios. For a description of past and current capital expenditures, see Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects.”

Our Services

We offer carrier-neutral colocation and managed services to our customers.

Colocation

Our colocation services provide clients with the space and power to deploy IT infrastructure in our world-class data centers. Through a number of redundant subsystems, including power, fiber and cooling, we are able to provide our customers with highly reliable services. Our colocation services are scalable, allowing our customers to upgrade space, connectivity and services as their requirements evolve. Our data centers employ a wide range of physical security features, including biometric scanners, man traps, smoke detection, fire suppression systems, and secure access. We provide colocation services including:

Space

Each of our data centers houses our customers’ IT infrastructure in a highly connected facility, designed and outfitted to ensure a high level of network reliability. This service provides space and power to our clients to deploy their own IT infrastructure. Customers can choose individual cabinets or a secure cage or an individual room depending on their space and security requirements.

Power

Each of our data centers is equipped to offer our customers high power availability. Since the availability of power is essential to the operation of our data centers, we provide power backup in case of outage as the availability of power is essential to the operation of a data center. The vast majority of our data centers have redundant grid connections and all of our data centers have a power backup installation in case of outage. Generators in combination with uninterrupted power supply, or UPS, system, endeavor to ensure maximum availability. We provide a full range of output voltages and currents and we offer our customers a choice of guaranteed levels of availability between 99.9% and 99.999%.

 

30


Table of Contents

Connectivity

We provide connectivity services that allow our customers to connect their IT infrastructure. These services offer connectivity with more than 450 telecommunications carriers and allow our customers to reduce costs while enhancing the reliability and performance associated with the exchange of Internet and other data traffic. Our connectivity options offer our customers a key strategic advantage by providing direct, high-speed connections to peers, partners, customers and some of the most important sources of IP data, content and distribution in the world.

Cross Connect

We install and manage physical connections running from our customers’ equipment to the equipment of our telecommunications carrier, Internet service providers and Internet exchange customers as well as other customers. Cross connects are physically secured in dedicated areas called Meet-Me rooms. Our staff test and install cables and patches and maintain cable trays and patch panels according to industry best practice.

Availability Monitoring

We assist our customers in evaluating their Internet service providers. We inspect our customers’ Internet connections and notify customers of defects. Our technicians are available to make repairs as requested.

Managed Services

In addition to providing colocation services, we provide a number of additional managed services, including systems monitoring, systems management, engineering support services, data back-up and storage. Some managed services are only performed on an ad hoc basis, as and when requested by the customer, while others are more recurring in nature. These services are provided either by us directly, or in conjunction with third parties.

Customers

We categorize our customers into customer segments including: digital media and distribution, enterprises, financial services, managed services providers and network providers. We have approximately 1,300 customers. The majority of our customers have entered into contracts with us for an initial three to five year term, which are typically renewed perpetually and automatically for successive one year periods.

In the year ended December 31, 2012, 32% of our Recurring Revenue came from our top 20 customers, 21% of our Recurring Revenue came from our top 10 customers and no single customer accounted for more than 5% of our Recurring Revenue.

The following table sets forth some of our representative customers by segment:

 

Digital Media and

Distribution

  

Enterprises

  

Financial Services

  

Cloud Service

Providers

  

Network Providers

Akamai

  

Bacardi

  

ABN Amro Bank N.V.

  

Hewlett-Packard

  

AT&T

Bwin

  

Canon

  

Aviva

  

IBM

  

British Telecom

Crytek

  

Ferovial

  

Interactive Data 7ticks

  

Terremark

  

Bouygues Telecom

Internap

  

Lease Plan

  

LME

     

Interoute
Communications

I-stream Planet

  

Pfizer

  

NYSE Euronext

     

Limelight

     

Trading Technologies

     

Colt Technology
Services

RTL Interactive

     

Sungard

     
     

Fixnetix

     

 

31


Table of Contents

Customer service is provided locally by our in-country teams and centrally via our European Customer Service Center located in London. The European Customer Service Center supports five European languages (Dutch, English, French, German and Spanish) and is run by technical support staff and operates 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, in order to provide rapid and cost-effective technical and business support to all of our clients. In addition to its service desk functions, the European Customer Service Center monitors and manages the performance of our data centers and takes care of network monitoring and other network operations center functions. The European Customer Service Center arranges, as necessary, local engineering support, rapid response (out of hours emergency assistance), “backup and restore” and other managed services. There is also a customer relationship management system in place to electronically log each issue that the European Customer Service Center is requested to address to ensure efficient and timely support.

Customer Contracts

Our customers typically sign contracts for the provision of colocation space together with basic service level agreements that provide for support services and other managed services. Unless customers notify us of their intention to terminate, which is typically 90 days in advance of the end of the contract period, contracts (a majority of which have an initial term of three to five years) typically renew perpetually and automatically for successive one year periods. However, where beneficial to us we will, prior to the expiry of a customer contract, seek to re-negotiate and re-sign with a customer (generally for a minimum one-year period). Our contracts generally allow us the option to increase prices in accordance with local price indices in each jurisdiction and we are able to adjust the amount charged for power at any time and as frequently as necessary during the life of the contract to account for any increases in power costs we are charged by our suppliers.

Contracts for colocation services are priced on the basis of a monthly recurring fee reflecting charges for space, power used in the common parts of the data center, power “plugs” and metered power usage, with related infrastructure and implementation costs included in an initial set-up fee. Clients have two options with respect to power usage: either (i) to pay for power usage in “plugs” in advance (typically included in the total cabinet price), which are contractually defined amounts of power per month, for which the customer must pay in full, regardless of how much power is actually used; or (ii) to pay for their actual power usage in arrears on a metered basis. The first option (power plugs) is usually sold in shared areas of our data centers where customers pay per cabinet. The second option (metered power usage) is usually sold to customers taking dedicated space such as a cage, suite or private room where they are charged on a per square meter basis.

As with colocation services, our managed services are typically contracted on the basis of an annual contract (or longer where appropriate) and the fee generally consists of monthly recurring charges and usage based charges as appropriate, and may also include an initial set-up fee. If managed services are ad hoc in nature, they are invoiced on completion of the service.

Each new customer contract we enter into provides that in the event of a power outage or other equivalent service level agreement breach (e.g. for repeatedly crossing a temperature or humidity benchmark), the customer will receive a service credit in the form of a reduction in its next service fee payment, the credit being on a sliding scale to reflect the seriousness of the breach. Our customer contracts typically exclude liability for consequential or indirect loss suffered as a result of a service level agreement breach and for force majeure. Historically, our penalty payments under our service level agreements have been minimal.

Customer Accounts

Fees are typically invoiced quarterly in advance, with the exception of metered power usage which is invoiced monthly in arrears. On new contracts, we generally require deposits, which we are able to use to cover any non-payment of invoices. If accounts are not paid on time, we ultimately seek recovery through the court system.

 

32


Table of Contents

Sales and Marketing

Our sales and marketing teams focus on proactively identifying and converting opportunities for both existing customers and prospects within our target segments, to expand customers’ space within our data center portfolio.

Sales

We sell our products and services through local direct sales forces and a centralized Major Accounts Team and by attending tradeshows, networking events and industry seminars. Our Major Accounts Team focuses on maximizing revenues across our European footprint from our largest customers and on identifying and developing new major accounts. We utilize a number of indirect channel partners in the United States to secure both referrals and orders from companies based out of the United States.

Marketing

Our marketing organization is responsible for identifying target customer segments, development of the value proposition that will enable us to succeed in our chosen segments, building and communicating a distinct brand, driving qualified leads into the sales pipeline and ensuring strategic alignment with key partners. Our marketing team supports our strategic priorities through the following primary objectives:

Customer Segmentation

Our marketing organization is responsible for the identification of high-growth customer segments and associated companies therein that we wish to target in order to build the community of interest and develop value proposition to enable success in our chosen markets. Our marketing organization is also responsible for business development of key magnetic and strategic accounts in each segment working with sales in order to build our communities of interest. Magnetic companies when present in our data centers, attract other interested members to join the community. The magnetic effect can be a consequence of the application, data or capability that they place in our data centers. A company in one of our segments is considered “strategic” if its presence adds value to the community of interest by increasing the magnetism of the community. This can be achieved by virtue of its brand and the associated added value to Interxion and the community.

Brand Management and Positioning

This includes brand identity unification, positioning at the corporate and country levels, the development of methodology, marketing assets and brand awareness programs for all of our business units.

Lead Generation

Utilizing online marketing, targeted advertising, direct marketing, event marketing and public relations programs and strategies to design and execute successful lead-generation campaigns leveraging telemarketing and direct sales to grow our pipeline and deliver our revenue goals.

Employees

As of December 31, 2012 we had a total of 399 employees (full time equivalents, excluding contractors and interim staff) of which 216 employees worked in operations and support, 87 employees worked in sales and marketing and 96 employees served general and administrative roles. Of our employees 298 were based in countries where we have operations and 101 employees worked from our headquarters near Amsterdam and corporate offices in London as of December 31, 2012. We believe that relations with our employees are good. Except for collective rights granted by local law, none of our employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements.

 

33


Table of Contents

Leases

Except for two of our Paris data centers (PAR3 and PAR5), acquired in December 2011, the Schiphol-Rijk data center premises (AMS6), acquired in February 2012, and freehold land in Paris (PAR7) reported as a financial lease, we do not own any other data centers and instead lease our data center space. We generally seek to secure property leases for terms of 20 to 25 years. Where possible, we try to mitigate the long-term financial commitment by contracting for initial lease terms of 10 to 15 years with tenant-only rights to extend the lease with multiple 5-year increments, or alternatively through tenant-only rights to terminate the lease in year 10 or year 15. Our leases generally have Consumer Price Index based annual rent increases over the full term of the lease.

Data Center Operations

We have 33 carrier-neutral data centers in 13 metropolitan areas in 11 countries, representing approximately 82,300 square meters of maximum equippable space (as of December 31, 2012). Maximum equippable space is the maximum amount of space in our data centers which is designed to be used and sold as Equipped Space.

All of our data centers are located in Europe and all of our revenues are generated in Europe. For more information on the geographic breakdown of our revenues, see Note 5 of our 2012 consolidated financial statements, included elsewhere herein.

We select sites for our data centers based primarily on expected customer demand, availability of power and access to telecommunications fiber routes. Most of our data centers are stand-alone structures, close to power sub-stations and telecommunication networks in light industrial areas outside of city centers, rather than residential areas where more prohibitive environmental regulations exist. Data center design and development is a highly complex process. Data center construction requires extensive planning and must navigate regulatory procedures which can vary by jurisdiction. We have developed extensive technical experience in building data centers in Europe and we are well-positioned to bring new data centers to market rapidly to meet customer demand.

The following table presents the key characteristics of our data centers.

 

    Country    

  

            Location             

  

    Ready for service Quarter    

   Maximum
Equippable Space
as of
    December 31,    
2012
 
               Square Meters  

Austria

   Vienna    Third Quarter, 2000      4,700   

Belgium

   Brussels    Third Quarter, 2000      4,800   

Denmark

   Copenhagen    Third Quarter, 2000      3,500   

France

   Paris—1    First Quarter, 2000      1,400   

France

   Paris—2    Third Quarter, 2001      3,000   

France

   Paris—3    Third Quarter, 2007      2,000   

France

   Paris—4    Third Quarter, 2007      1,300   

France

   Paris—5    Fourth Quarter, 2009      4,100   

 

34


Table of Contents

    Country    

  

            Location             

  

    Ready for service Quarter    

   Maximum
Equippable Space
as of
    December 31,    
2012
 

France

   Paris—6    Third Quarter, 2009      1,400   

France

   Paris—7    Second Quarter, 2012      4,700   

Germany

   Dusseldorf    Second Quarter, 2000      2,800   

Germany

   Frankfurt—1    First Quarter, 1999      500   

Germany

   Frankfurt—2    Fourth Quarter, 1999      1,100   

Germany

   Frankfurt—3    First Quarter, 2000      2,100   

Germany

   Frankfurt—4    First Quarter, 2001      1,400   

Germany

   Frankfurt—5    Third Quarter, 2008      1,700   

Germany

   Frankfurt—6    Second Quarter, 2010*      2,200   

Germany

   Frankfurt—7    First Quarter, 2012      1,500   

Ireland

   Dublin—1    Second Quarter, 2001      1,100   

Ireland

   Dublin—2    First Quarter, 2010      2,400   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—1    First Quarter, 1998      600   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—2    First Quarter, 1999      700   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—3    Fourth Quarter, 1999      3,100   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—4**    Fourth Quarter, 2000      **   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—5    Fourth Quarter, 2008***      4,300   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—6    Third Quarter, 2012      4,400   

The Netherlands

   Hilversum    Third Quarter, 2001      800   

Spain

   Madrid—1    Third Quarter, 2000      4,000   

Spain

   Madrid—2    Fourth Quarter, 2012      1,700   

Sweden

   Stockholm    Third Quarter, 2000      1,900   

Switzerland

   Zurich    Fourth Quarter, 2000      6,400   

UK

   London—1    Third Quarter, 2000      5,200   

UK

   London—2    Third Quarter, 2012      1,500   
        

 

 

 

Total

           82,300   
        

 

 

 

Note:

* FRA6 maximum equippable space increased by 600 square meters as result of a new expansion to FRA6.
** The maximum equippable space of Amsterdam—4 is included in the maximum equippable space of Amsterdam—1.
*** AMS5 maximum equippable space decreased by 200 square meters as result of specific design decisions made at the completion of the full AMS5 data center.

 

35


Table of Contents

Seasonality

The Company’s operations are not significantly exposed to seasonality.

Competition

We compete with all providers of data center services including in-house and outsourced data centers. Our chief competitors among each of the types of competition are listed below.

Carrier-Neutral Colocation Data Centers

Carrier-neutral colocation data centers in Europe include Equinix, Telecity and Telehouse. These companies are our chief competitors.

IT Outsourcers and Managed Services Provider Data Centers

IT outsourcers and managed services providers in Europe include HP, IBM, Logica, Rackspace and Sungard.

Wholesale Data Centers

Competitor wholesale data center providers include Digital Realty Trust and Global Switch.

Carrier-Operated Data Centers

Carriers that operate their own data centers in Europe include AT&T, BT, Cable & Wireless, Colt Technology Services and Verizon.

Please see Item 3 “Key Information—Risk Factors—We face significant competition and we may not be able to compete successfully against current and future competitors.”

Litigation

We have not been party to any legal proceedings, governmental or arbitration proceedings during the 12 months preceding the date of this annual report which may have, or have had in the recent past, a significant effect on our financial position.

Regulation

Although we are not subject to any financial regulations (such as outsourcing requirements, MiFID or Basel II), our financial services customers commonly are. In their contracts with us, these financial services customers impose access, audit and inspection rights to those parts of our data centers that contain their equipment so that they can satisfy their regulatory requirements.

In addition, as a consumer of substantial amounts of electricity, we may be affected by the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme, or the Scheme. The CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme Order 2010 entered into force on March 22, 2010, introducing a mandatory UK-wide emissions trading scheme from April 1, 2010. The Scheme applies to organizations that have at least one settled half hourly meter and that also consume over 6000 MWh per year of half-hourly metered electricity in the qualification year for the relevant phase (which for the first phase of the Scheme was calendar year 2008). Qualifying organizations have to comply with the Scheme or face criminal and civil penalties. Participants are required to purchase emissions

 

36


Table of Contents

allowances from the UK Government to cover CRC emissions from energy supplies for which they are responsible in each year of the Scheme. Allowances equal to the quantity of CRC emissions for the relevant energy supplies from 2011-2012 compliance period had to be surrendered by 28 September 2012. The cost of the allowances for the initial period of the Scheme is £12 per tonne CO2, although the cost of each allowance will increase in the later years of the Scheme. The UK Government has announced that in the 2014-2015 compliance period, the price of allowances will rise to £16 per tonne of CO2 and from the 2015-2016 compliance period, the price will rise in line with the retail prices index. In Phase 2 of the Scheme, there will be two fixed price allowance sales for each compliance year, with no cap. In the 2012 Autumn Statement, the UK Chancellor announced that the tax element of the scheme will be a high priority for removal when public finances allow. However, it is unclear what this means, but it could result in the termination of allowance sales completely or the reinstatement of the revenue recycling element of the Scheme. Potential impacts of the Scheme on our data centers in the UK include, the costs associated with improving energy efficiency in order to reduce electricity consumption and hence costs of allowances and the administrative and compliance costs of participating in the Scheme.

The Scheme is currently being simplified by the UK Government in an effort to reduce participants’ administrative costs, and measures to be introduced include assessing qualification on the basis of supplies through settled half-hourly meters only, abolishing the Performance League Table from 2013 (although the Environment Agency will still publish participants’ aggregated energy use and emissions data) and disapplying the Scheme’s supply rules to climate change agreement facilities and EU ETS installations. The Government has also said it will review the effectiveness of the Scheme in 2016.

Our data centers may also be adversely affected by any future application of additional regulation relating to energy usage, for example seeking to reduce the power consumption of companies and fees or levies in this regard (including the EU Energy End-Use Efficiency and Energy Services Directive (Directive 2006/32/EC)). It is possible that the resulting legislation will mean that service providers that consume energy, such as us, may incur increased energy costs, and/or caps on energy use. The European Union is continuing to implement its Climate and Energy Package legislation with a 20% greenhouse gas emissions reduction target against 1990 for the 2013-2020 period and, following the December 2011 Durban climate summit, is actively involved in the extension of the Kyoto Protocol beyond 2012. The national targets, covering the period 2013-2020, are differentiated according to European Union member states’ relative wealth. They range from a 20% emissions reduction (compared to 2005) by the richest European Union member states to a 20% increase by the least wealthy (although this will still require a limitation effort by all countries). European Union member states must report on their emissions annually under the European Union monitoring mechanism. It is expected that this commitment may give rise to future domestic legislation relating to energy efficiency across the jurisdictions in which we have data centers and this may affect our business.

As an operator of data centers which act as content and connectivity hubs that facilitate the storage, sharing and distribution of data, content and media for customers, we have in place an Acceptable Use Policy which applies to all of our customers using Internet connectivity services provided by us and which requires our customers to respect all legislation pertaining to the use of Internet services, including email.

We are subject to telecommunications regulation in the various European jurisdictions in which we presently operate, most notably the EU Regulatory Framework. Under these regulations, we are not required to obtain licenses for the provision of our services. However, we may be required to notify the national telecommunications regulator in certain European jurisdictions about these services. We have made the necessary notifications for such jurisdictions.

By operating data centers, we will process personal data under the EU Data Protection Directive (95/46/EC). This directive is implemented through adoption in local legislation of the EU member states. We are subject to this legislation in most European jurisdictions as processors and controllers in the meaning of this Directive. This may impose obligations on us, such as an obligation to take reasonable steps to protect that information.

 

37


Table of Contents

Insurance

We have in place insurance coverage which we consider to be reasonable and against the type of risks usually insured by companies carrying on the same or similar types of business as ours in the markets in which we operate. Our insurance broadly falls under the following four categories: professional indemnity, general third party liability, directors and officers liability and property damage insurance and business interruption insurance.

Our History and Organizational Structure

European Telecom Exchange BV was incorporated on April 6, 1998, which (after being renamed InterXion Holding B.V. on June 12, 1998) was converted into InterXion Holding N.V. on January 11, 2000. For further information on the history and development of the Company, see Item 10 “Additional Information—General.” From inception onwards we have grown our colocation business organically. We have developed our current footprint (both in terms of countries and cities) between 1999 and 2001 and now operate in 11 countries and 13 cities. Following the industry downturn beginning in 2001 as a result of a sharp decline in demand for Internet-based businesses, we restructured to refocus on a broader and more stable customer base. We have since focused on shifting our customer base from primarily emerging Internet companies and carriers to a wide variety of established businesses seeking to house their IT infrastructure.

Our subsidiaries perform various tasks, such as servicing our clients, operating our data centers, customers support, and providing management, sales and marketing support to the Group.

The following table sets forth the name, country of incorporation and (direct and indirect) ownership interest of our most significant subsidiaries based on revenues and total assets:

 

38


Table of Contents
Entity   

Country of

incorporation

  

Ownership

%

    Activity

InterXion HeadQuarters B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Management

Interxion Europe Ltd

   United Kingdom      100   Management

InterXion Operational B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Management/Holding

InterXion Nederland B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Datacenters B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Data center sales & marketing

InterXion Real Estate Holding B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Real estate management/Holding

InterXion Real Estate I B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Real estate

InterXion Real Estate IV B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Real estate

InterXion Österreich GmbH

   Austria      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Belgium N.V.

   Belgium      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Danmark ApS

   Denmark      100   Provision of co-location services

Interxion France SAS

   France      100   Provision of co-location services

Interxion Real Estate II SARL

   France      100   Real estate

Interxion Real Estate III SARL

   France      100   Real estate

InterXion Deutschland GmbH

   Germany      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Ireland Ltd

   Ireland      100   Provision of co-location services

Interxion España SA

   Spain      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Sverige AB

   Sweden      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion (Schweiz) AG

   Switzerland      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Carrier Hotel Ltd.

   United Kingdom      100   Provision of co-location services

 

39


Table of Contents

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

Not applicable.

 

40


Table of Contents

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The following information should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto and with the financial information presented in Item 18 “Financial Statements” included elsewhere in this annual report. The following discussion contains forward-looking statements that reflect our plans, estimates and beliefs. Such statements are based upon current expectations that involve risks and uncertainties. Any statements contained herein that are not statements of historical fact may be deemed to be forward-looking statements. For example, the words “believes,” “anticipates,” “plans,” “expects,” “intends” and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. Our actual results could differ materially from those discussed in these forward-looking statements. Factors that might cause such a discrepancy include, but are not limited to, those discussed in “—Liquidity and Capital Resources” below and Item 3 “Key Information—Risk Factors” above. All forward-looking statements in this annual report are based on information available to us as of the date of this annual report and we assume no obligation to update any such forward-looking statements.

Overview

We are a leading carrier-neutral colocation data center services provider in Europe. Our core offering is carrier-neutral colocation services, which we sell to approximately 1,300 customers. Within our data centers, we enable our customers to connect to a broad range of telecommunications carriers, Internet service providers and other customers. Our data centers act as content, cloud and connectivity hubs that facilitate the processing, storage, sharing and distribution of data, content, applications and media among carriers and customers, creating an environment that we refer to as a community of interest.

Our core offering is carrier-neutral colocation services, which includes space, uninterrupted power and a secure environment in which to house our customers’ computing, network, storage and IT infrastructure. Our carrier-neutral colocation services enable our customers to reduce operational and capital expenses while improving application performance and flexibility. We supplement our core colocation offering with a number of additional services, including network monitoring, remote monitoring of customer equipment, systems management, engineering support services, cross connects, data backup and storage.

We are headquartered near Amsterdam, The Netherlands, and deliver our services through 33 data centers in 11 countries strategically located in major metropolitan areas, including London, Frankfurt, Paris, Amsterdam and Madrid, which are the main data center markets in Europe. Because our data centers are located in close proximity to the intersection of telecommunications fiber routes and power sources, we are able to provide our customers with high levels of connectivity and the requisite power to meet their needs.

Our data centers house connections to more than 450 carriers and Internet service providers and 18 European Internet exchanges, which allows our customers to lower their telecommunications costs and, by reducing latency, improve the response time of their applications. This connectivity to carriers and Internet service providers, and to other customers, fosters the development of value-added communities of interest, which are important to customers in each of our segments: network providers, cloud services providers, enterprises, financial services and digital media. Development of our communities of interest generates network effects for our customers that enrich the value and attractiveness of the community to both existing and potential customers.

Growth in Internet traffic, cloud computing and the use of customer-facing hosted applications are driving significant demand for high quality carrier-neutral colocation data center services. This demand results from the need for either more space or more power, or both. These needs, in turn, are driven by, among other factors, decreased cost of Internet access, increased broadband penetration, increased usage of high-bandwidth content, increased number of wireless access points and growing availability of Internet and network based applications. If the global economy’s recovery stalls or is reversed, global IP traffic may grow at a lesser rate, which could lead to a slowdown in the increase in demand for our services.

Our ability to meet the demand for high quality carrier-neutral colocation data center services depends on our ability to add capacity by expanding existing data centers or by locating and securing suitable sites for additional data centers that meet our specifications, such as proximity to numerous network service providers, access to a significant supply of electrical power and the ability to sustain heavy floor loading.

 

41


Table of Contents

Our market is highly competitive. Most companies operate their own data centers and in many cases continue to invest in data center capacity, although there is a trend towards outsourcing. We compete against other carrier-neutral colocation data center service providers, such as Equinix, Telecity and Telehouse. We also compete with other types of data centers, including carrier-operated colocation, wholesale and IT outsourcers and managed services provider data centers. The cost, operational risk and inconvenience involved in relocating a customer’s networking and computing equipment to another data center are significant and have the effect of protecting a competitor’s data center from significant levels of customer churn.

Key Aspects of Our Financial Model

We offer carrier-neutral colocation services to our customers. Our revenues are mostly recurring in nature and in the last several years, Recurring Revenue has consistently represented over 90% of our total revenue. Our contracted Recurring Revenue model together with low levels of Average Monthly Churn provide significant predictability of future revenue.

Revenue

We enter into contracts with our customers for initial terms of generally three to five years, with annual price escalators and with automatic one-year renewals after the end of the initial term. Our customer contracts provide for a fixed monthly recurring fee for our colocation, managed services and, in the case of cabinets, fixed amounts of power pre-purchased at a fixed price. These fees are billed monthly, quarterly or bi-annually in advance, together with fees for other services such as the provision of metered power (based on a price per kilowatt hour actually consumed), billed monthly in arrears, or fees for services such as remote hands and eyes support, billed on an as-incurred basis.

The following table presents our future committed revenues expected to be generated from our fixed-term customer contracts as of December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010.

 

     2012      2011      2010  
    

(€’000)

 

Within 1 year

     204,164         139,475         154,634   

Between 1 to 5 years

     240,951         201,620         149,900   

After 5 years

     105,069         103,934         18,606   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     550,184         445,029         323,140   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Revenues are recognized when it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to the Group and that these benefits, together with their related costs, can be measured reliably. Revenues are measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable taking into account any discounts or volume rebates.

The Group reviews transactions for separately identifiable components and if necessary applies individual recognition treatment, in which revenues are allocated to separately identifiable components based on their relative fair values.

The Group earns colocation revenue as a result of providing data center services to customers at its data centers. Colocation revenues and lease income are recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the term of the customer contract. Incentives granted are recognized as an integral part of the total income, over the term of the customer contract. Customers are usually invoiced quarterly in advance and income is recognized on a straight-line basis over the quarter. Initial setup fees payable at the beginning of customer contracts are deferred at inception and recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the initial term of the customer contract. Power revenues are recognized based on customers’ usage and are generally matched with the corresponding costs.

 

42


Table of Contents

Other services revenue, including managed services, connectivity and customer installation services, including equipment sales, are recognized when the services are rendered. Certain installation services and equipment sales, which by their nature are non-recurring, are presented as non-recurring revenues and are recognized upon delivery of service.

Deferred revenues relating to invoicing in advance and initial setup fees are carried on the statement of financial position as part of trade payables and other liabilities. Deferred revenues due to be recognized after more than one year are held in non-current liabilities.

Recurring Revenue comprises revenue that is incurred monthly from colocation and associated power charges, office space, amortized set-up fees and certain recurring managed services (but excluding any ad hoc managed services) provided by us directly or through third parties. Rents received for the sublease of unused sites are excluded.

Costs

Our cost base consists primarily of personnel, power and property costs.

We employ the majority of our personnel in operations and support roles that operate our data centers 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. As of December 31, 2012 we employed 399 full-time employees: 216 in operations and support; 87 in sales and marketing; and 96 served general and administrative roles. A data center typically requires a fixed number of personnel to run, irrespective of customer utilization. Increases in operations and support personnel occur when we bring new data centers into service. Our approach is, where possible, to locate new data centers close to our existing data centers. In addition to other benefits of proximity, in some cases it also allows us to leverage existing personnel within a data center campus.

In 2010, 2011 and 2012, we invested resources in sales and marketing personnel to engage with our existing and potential customers on an industry basis. This has enabled us to establish closer relationships with our customers thereby allowing us to understand and anticipate their needs and to forecast demand and helping us plan the scope and timing of our expansion activities.

Our customers’ equipment consumes significant amounts of power and generates heat. In recent years the amount of power consumed by an individual piece of equipment, or power density, has increased as processing capacity has increased. In maintaining the correct environmental conditions for the equipment to operate most effectively, our cooling and air conditioning infrastructure also consume significant amounts of power. Our power costs are variable and directly dependent on the amount of power consumed by our customers’ equipment. Our power costs also increase as the Utilization Rate of a data center increases. Increases in power costs due to increased usage by our customers are generally matched by corresponding increases in power revenues.

The unit price we pay for our power also has an impact on our power costs. We generally enter into contracts with local utility companies to purchase power at fixed prices for periods of one or two years. Within substantially all of our customer contracts, we have the right to adjust at any time the price we charge for our power services to allow us to recover increases in the unit price we pay.

Except for two of our Paris data centers (PAR3 and PAR5), acquired in December 2011, the Schiphol-Rijk data center premises (AMS6), acquired in February 2012, and freehold land in Paris (PAR7) reported as a financial lease, we do not own any other data centers and instead lease our data center space. We generally seek to secure property leases for terms of 20 to 25 years. Where possible, we try to mitigate the long-term financial commitment by contracting for initial lease terms of 10 to 15 years with tenant-only rights to extend the lease with multiple 5-year increments, or alternatively through tenant-only rights to terminate the lease in year 10 or year 15. Our leases generally have fixed annual rent increases over the full term of the lease.

Larger increases in our property costs occur when we bring new data centers into service. Bringing new data centers into service also has the effect of temporarily reducing our overall Utilization Rate while the utilization of the new data center increases as we sell to customers.

 

43


Table of Contents

In addition, we enter into annual maintenance contracts with our major plant and equipment suppliers. This cost increases as new maintenance contracts are entered into in support of new data center operations.

Operating Leverage

Due to the relatively fixed nature of our costs, we generally experience margin expansion as our Utilization Rate at existing data centers increases. Our margins and the rate of margin expansion will vary based upon the scope and scale of our capacity expansions, which affects our overall Utilization Rate.

EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin

We present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €60.0 million revolving credit facility and the €260.0 million 9.5% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. However, other companies may present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin differently, than we do. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS.

EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from sub-leases on unused data center sites. Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue.

Onerous lease contracts are those in which we expect losses to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the lease contract. Provisions for these leases are based upon the present value of the future contracted payout under these leases, and movements in the provision for onerous lease contracts are reflected on our income statement. We sublease portions of these unused sites to third parties and treat the income from these subleases as other income.

The provision for onerous lease contracts principally relates to two unused data center sites in Germany, one in Munich terminating in March 2016 and one in Dusseldorf terminating in August 2016.

“IPO transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.

Net Finance Expense

Towards the end of 2006, we started an expansion program of our data centers based on customer demand. This expansion program, closely matched to both customer demand and available capital resources, has continued since that time. We do not commit to a phase of an expansion or construction of a data center unless we have cash and committed capital available to complete the phase. Since 2006, we have raised debt capital to fund our expansion program, and this has contributed to increases in our finance expense. During the period of construction of a data center, we capitalize the borrowing costs as part of the construction costs of the data center. We refinanced the Company’s debt in February 2010 when we issued €200 million of 9.5% senior secured notes, which was primarily used to repay existing debt, and a further tap offering of €60 million in November 2010. For the full year 2012, the major components of net finance expense consisted of interest expense of €17.2 million and interest income of €0.9 million. For the full year 2011, the major components of net finance expense consisted of interest expense of €23.9 million and interest income of €2.3 million. The decrease in net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 was due primarily to the increased capitalization of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space. We capitalized €9.2 million of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space in the year ended December 31, 2012 and €2.6 million in the year ended December 31, 2011. For the year 2010, the major components of net finance expense consisted of interest expense of €18.8 million and a €10.2 million one-time write off of costs associated with the refinancing in February 2010 together with an unwinding of interest on provisions that had been discounted to their present value at initial recognition.

 

44


Table of Contents

We fund the expansion programs within operating entities principally through intra-group loans. Since 2008, exchange differences arising, if any, on net investments including receivables from or payable to a foreign operation, are recognized directly in the foreign currency translation reserve within equity in accordance with IAS 21. Prior to 2008, these exchange differences were recognized as net finance expense or income.

We discuss our capital expenditures and our capital expansion program below in “—Liquidity and Capital Resources.”

Income Tax Expense

Since inception we have generated significant tax loss carry forwards in all of our jurisdictions. In 2006, we became taxable income positive and began offsetting our tax loss carry forwards against taxable profits. As at December 31, 2012 we have recognized most of our tax loss carry forwards. We will continue to recognize the remaining deferred tax loss carry forwards progressively as we become profitable in the respective jurisdictions. We expect to be able to continue to use our tax loss carry forwards to minimize cash taxes going forward.

Segment Reporting

We report our financials in two segments, which we have determined based on our management and internal reporting structure: the first being France, Germany, The Netherlands and UK and the second being the Rest of Europe, which comprises our operations in Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Ireland, Spain, Sweden and Switzerland. Segment results, assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. Unallocated items are presented as “corporate and other” and comprise mainly general and administrative expenses, assets and liabilities associated with our headquarters operations, provisions for onerous contracts (relating to the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the relevant leases, as further explained below) and revenue and expenses related to those onerous contracts, loans and borrowings and related expenses and income tax assets and liabilities. Segment capital expenditure is the total cost directly attributable to a segment incurred during the period to acquire property, plant and equipment.

 

45


Table of Contents

Results of Operations

The following table presents our operating results for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010:

 

     Year ended
December 31,
    Year ended December 31,  
     2012 (1)     2012     2011     2010  
     (U.S. $’000,
except per
share amounts)
    (€’000, except per share amounts)  

Revenue

     365,412        277,121        244,310        208,379   

Cost of sales

     (149,110     (113,082     (101,766     (91,154
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     216,302        164,039        142,544        117,225   

Other Income

     611        463        487        425   

Sales and marketing costs

     (26,504     (20,100     (17,680     (15,072

General and administrative costs

        

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (58,009     (43,993     (35,552     (31,108

Share-based payments

     (7,237     (5,488     (2,736     (1,684

(Increase)/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts

     (1,105     (838     (18     (150

IPO transaction costs

     —          —          (1,725     —     

Other general and administrative costs

     (38,139     (28,924     (27,227     (22,950
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

General and administrative costs

     (104,490     (79,243     (67,258     (55,892
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     85,919        65,159        58,093        46,686   

Net finance expense

     (23,400     (17,746     (22,784     (29,444
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     62,519        47,413        35,309        17,242   

Income tax (expense) / income

     (20,810     (15,782     (9,737     (2,560
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     41,709        31,631        25,572        14,682   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share

     0.62        0.47        0.40        0.33   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA (2)

     151,659        115,015        97,637        79,203   

 

46


Table of Contents

The following table presents our operating results as a percentage of revenues for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010:

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2012     2011     2010  

Revenue

     100     100     100

Cost of sales

     (41     (42     (44
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     59        58        56   

Other income

     0        0        0   

Sales and marketing costs

     (7     (7     (7

General & administrative costs

      

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (16     (15     (15

Share-based payments

     (2     (1     (1

Increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts

     0        0        0   

IPO transaction costs

     0        (1     0   

Other general and administrative costs

     (10     (11     (11
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

General and administrative costs

     (29     (28     (27
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     24        24        22   

Net finance expense

     (6     (9     (14
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     17        14        8   

Income tax (expense) / income

     (6     (4     (1
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     11     10     7
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA margin (2)

     42     40     38

 

Notes:

(1) The operating results for the year ended December 31, 2012 have been translated for convenience only based on the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York as of December 31, 2012 and for euro into U.S. dollars of €1.00 = U.S. 1.3186. See Item 3 “Key Information—Exchange Rates” for additional information.
(2) EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from sub-leases on unused data center sites. Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. We present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €60 million revolving credit facility and €260 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. However, other companies may present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin differently than we do. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS. See “—EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA” for a more detailed description.

 

47


Table of Contents

The following table presents a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit according to our income statement, the most directly comparable IFRS performance measure, for the periods indicated:

 

     Year ended
December 31,
    Year ended December 31,  
     2012 (1)*     2012     2011     2010  
     (U.S. $’000)     (€’000)  

Other financial data

        

Operating profit

     85,919        65,159        58,093        46,686   

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     58,009        43,993        35,552        31,108   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA

     143,928        109,152        93,645        77,794   

Share-based payments

     7,237        5,488        2,736        1,684   

Increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts (a)

     1,105        838        18        150   

IPO transaction costs (b)

     —          —          1,725        —     

Income from sub-leases on unused data center sites

     (611     (463     (487     (425
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA (2) *

     151,659        115,015        97,637        79,203   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:

* References are to the footnotes above.
(a) “Increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts” does not reflect the deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.
(b) “IPO transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.

The following table sets forth some of our key performance indicators as of the dates indicated:

 

     As of December 31,  
     2012      2011      2010  

Equipped Space (1) (square meters)

     74,000         62,800         61,000   

Utilization Rate (2)

     76         75         72   

 

Notes:

(1) Equipped Space is the amount of data center space that, on the date indicated, is equipped and either sold or could be sold, without making any additional investments to common infrastructure. Equipped Space at a particular data center may decrease if either (a) the power requirements of customers at such data center change so that all or a portion of the remaining space can no longer be sold as the space does not have enough power and/or common infrastructure to support it without further investment or (b) if the design and layout of a data center changes to meet among others, fire regulations or customer requirements, and necessitates the introduction of common space which cannot be sold to individual customers, such as corridors.
(2) Utilization Rate is, on the relevant date, Revenue Generating Space as a percentage of Equipped Space; some Equipped Space is not fully utilized due to customers’ specific requirements regarding the layout of their equipment. In practice, therefore, Utilization Rate may not reach 100%.

 

48


Table of Contents

Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011

Revenue

Our revenue for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 was as follows:

 

     Year ended December 31,      Change  
     2012      %      2011      %           %  
     (€’000, except percentages)                

Revenue

           

Recurring revenue

     259,249         94         228,328         93         30,921         14   

Non-recurring revenue

     17,872         6         15,982         7         1,890         12   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     277,121         100         244,310         100         32,811         13   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Revenue increased to €277.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €244.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 13%. Recurring revenue increased by 14% and non-recurring revenue increased by 12% from the year ended December 31, 2011 to the year ended December 31, 2012. The period over period growth in recurring revenue was primarily the result of an increase of approximately 9,000 square meters in Revenue Generating Space as a result of sales to both existing and new customers in all of our regions.

Cost of Sales

Cost of sales increased to €113.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €101.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 11%. Cost of sales was 41% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 42% for the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in cost of sales was due to increased costs associated with our overall revenue growth and data center expansion projects, including (i) an increase of €5.8 million in power costs, (ii) an increase of €2.8 million in higher installation and equipment costs and (iii) an increase of €2.5 million in compensation costs. Equipped Space increased by approximately 11,300 square meters during the year ended December 31, 2012 as a result of expansions to existing data centers in Amsterdam, Stockholm and Zurich and to the construction of new data centers in Amsterdam, Frankfurt, London, Paris and Madrid. We expect cost of sales as a percentage of revenue to decrease as we increase utilization at our existing facilities. This decrease may be offset by the impact of lower utilization in new data centers we open as part of our data center expansion projects.

Other Income

Other income represents income that we do not consider part of our core business. It includes income from the subleases on unused data center sites.

Sales and Marketing Costs

Our sales and marketing costs increased to €20.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €17.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 14%. Sales and marketing costs were 7% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011.

The increase in sales and marketing costs was primarily a result of an increase of €2.4 million in compensation and related costs due to increases in employee headcount and marketing expenses associated with our continued strategy to invest in our industry focused customer development and acquisition approach.

General and Administrative Costs

General and administrative costs consist of depreciation, amortization and impairments, share-based payments, increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts and other general and administrative costs.

 

49


Table of Contents

Depreciation, amortization and impairments increased to €44.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €35.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 24%. Depreciation, amortization and impairments was 16% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 15% for the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was a result of new data centers and data center expansions.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we add back share-based payments. For the year ended December 31, 2012 we recorded share-based payments of €5.5 million, an increase of 101% from the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to a new crisis wage tax payable by employers imposed by the Dutch Government. The wage tax included in share-based payments over options exercised in the year ended December 31, 2012 amounted to € 1.5 million.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we also add back increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts. Following our annual review of the provision for onerous lease contracts, the Company reassessed and increased its provision by €0.8 million.

Other general and administrative costs increased to €28.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €27.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 6%. Other general and administrative costs were 10% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 11% for the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in the other general and administrative costs was due to an increase of €1.7 million in compensation costs resulting from headcount growth.

Net Finance Expense

Net finance expense decreased to €17.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €22.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, a decrease of 22%. Net finance expense was 6% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 9% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011. The decrease in net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 was due primarily to the increased capitalization of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space.

We capitalized €9.2 million of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space in the year ended December 31, 2012 and €2.6 million in the year ended December 31, 2011.

Income Taxes

Income tax expense was €15.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to €9.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. Income tax expense was 6% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 4% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in income tax expenses was primarily due to an increase in profit before tax and a lower benefit as a result of the recognition of previously unrecognized tax losses, €0.7 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 and €2.7 million benefit realized in the year ended December 31, 2011.

We recorded current tax expenses of €6.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 and €5.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. We recorded deferred tax expense of €9.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 and €4.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, arising from the net impact of the utilization of deferred tax assets on tax loss carry-forwards as well as the initial recognition of deferred tax assets on tax loss carry-forwards.

 

50


Table of Contents

Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010

Revenue

Our revenue for the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 was as follows:

 

     Year ended December 31,      Change  
     2011      %      2010      %           %  
     (€’000, except percentages)                

Revenue

                 

Recurring revenue

     228,328         93         192,973         93         35,355         18   

Non-recurring revenue

     15,982         7         15,406         7         576         4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     244,310         100         208,379         100         35,931         17   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Revenue increased to €244.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €208.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 17%. Recurring revenue increased by 18% and non-recurring revenue increased by 4% from the year ended December 31, 2010 to the year ended December 31, 2011. The period over period growth in recurring revenue was primarily the result of an increase of approximately 3,400 square meters in Revenue Generating Space as a result of sales to both existing and new customers in all of our regions.

Cost of Sales

Cost of sales increased to €101.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €91.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 12%. Cost of sales was 42% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011 and 44% for the year ended December 31, 2010. The increase in cost of sales was due to increased costs associated with our overall revenue growth and data center expansion projects, including (i) an increase of €5.5 million in power costs, (ii) an increase of €1.3 million in higher data center rent costs and (iii) an increase of €0.9 million in compensation costs. Equipped Space increased by approximately 1,800 square meters during the year ended December 31, 2011 as a result of expansions to existing data centers in Dublin, London and Vienna. We expect cost of sales as a percentage of revenue to decrease as we increase utilization at our existing facilities. This decrease may be offset by the impact of lower utilization in new data centers we open as part of our data center expansion projects.

Other Income

Other income represents income that we do not consider part of our core business. It includes income from the subleases on unused data center sites.

Sales and Marketing Costs

Our sales and marketing costs increased to €17.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €15.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 17%. Sales and marketing costs were 7% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010.

The increase in sales and marketing costs was primarily a result of an increase of €2.3 million in compensation and related costs due to increases in employee headcount and marketing expenses associated with our continued strategy to invest in our industry focused customer development and acquisition approach.

 

51


Table of Contents

General and Administrative Costs

General and administrative costs consist of depreciation, amortization and impairments, share-based payments, increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and other general and administrative costs.

Depreciation, amortization and impairments increased to €35.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €31.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 14%. Depreciation, amortization and impairments was 15% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010. The increase was due to new data centers and data center expansions. The increase was partially offset by a reversal of impairment amounting to €0.8 million related to our Swedish data center.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we add back share-based payments. For the year ended December 31, 2011 we recorded share-based payments of €2.7 million, an increase of 62% from the year ended December 31, 2010.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we also add back the increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we also add back IPO transaction costs of €1.7 million incurred in the year ended December 31, 2011.

Other general and administrative costs increased to €27.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €23.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 19%. Other general and administrative costs were 11% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2010. The increase in the other general and administrative costs resulted from an increase of €1.8 million in compensation costs associated with a growth in headcount and an increase of €1.3 million in expenses for professional services primarily due to higher public company cost such as the implementation of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

Net Finance Expense

Net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2011 primarily consists of a €23.7 million net interest expense. Net finance expense decreased to €22.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €29.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, a decrease of 23%. Net finance expense was 9% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011 and 14% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2010. The decrease in net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2011 was due primarily to the one-off charges amounting to €10.2 million associated with the debt refinancing in the first quarter of 2010, which was partially offset by increased interest expense in 2011 due to the greater outstanding principal amount of the Senior Secured Notes as result of the €60.0 million bond tap in November 2010.

We capitalized €2.6 million of finance expense to construction in progress during the year ended December 31, 2011 and €2.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2010.

Income Taxes

Income tax expense was €9.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared with €2.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2010. Income tax expense was 4% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011 and 1% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2010.

We recorded current tax expenses of €5.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 and €1.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2010. We recorded deferred tax expense of €4.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 and €0.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, arising from the net impact of the utilization of deferred tax assets in connection with tax loss carry-forwards as well as the initial recognition of deferred tax assets on loss carry-forwards.

 

52


Table of Contents

Liquidity and Capital Resources

As of December 31, 2012, our total indebtedness consisted of (i) €260.0 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017, (ii) other debt and finance lease obligations totaling €22.0 million and (iii) mortgages totaling €10.0 million. The borrowing requirements of the company are not subject to significant seasonality. Under our Revolving Credit Facility, interest is based on a floating rate index. The interest expense on the remainder of our outstanding indebtedness is based on a fixed rate, except for the mortgage on the AMS 6 leasehold property. The mortgage is subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin of 275 basis points.

Historically, we have made significant investments in our property, plant and equipment and intangible assets in order to expand our data center footprint and total Equipped Space as we have grown our business. In the year ended December 31, 2012 we invested €178.3 million in property, plant and equipment (€172.0 million) and intangible assets (€6.3 million), of which €164.7 million, including acquisition of AMS 6 data center (€7.5 million), was attributed to expansion capital expenditures and the remainder was attributed to maintenance and other capital expenditures. In the year ended December 31, 2011 we invested €162.0 million in property, plant and equipment (€154.6 million) and intangible assets (€7.4 million), of which €145.7 million, including acquisition of PAR3 and PAR 5 data centers (€19.1 million), was attributed to expansion capital expenditures and the remainder to maintenance and other capital expenditures. In the year ended December 31, 2010, we invested €100.4 million in property, plant and equipment (€98.2 million) and intangibles (€2.2 million). Intangible assets include investments in power grid rights and software development.

Although in any one year the amount of maintenance and replacement capital expenditures may vary, we expect that long-term such expenses will be between 4% and 6% of total revenue.

As of December 31, 2012, we had €68.7 million of cash and cash equivalents of which €5.0 million was restricted cash, mostly denominated in euro. Restricted cash is held as collateral to support the issuance of bank guarantees on behalf of a number of subsidiary companies. As of December 31, 2011, we had €142.7 million of cash and cash equivalents of which €4.8 million was restricted cash, mostly denominated in euro. As of December 31, 2010, we had €99.1 million of cash and cash equivalents of which €4.2 million was restricted cash, mostly denominated in euro. Our primary source of cash is from our financing activities and customer collections.

A limited amount of the Company’s total cash balance may be subject to certain restrictions in select countries that cannot be repatriated without a tax implication. The amount of cash that cannot be repatriated without a tax implication is negligible to the total liquidity of our business.

As of December 31, 2012 our €60.0 million Revolving Credit Facility remained undrawn.

Sources and Uses of Cash

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Cash generated from operations

     111,701        90,048        85,308   

Net cash flows from operating activities

     89,082        64,043        74,379   

Net cash flows used in investing activities

     (179,105     (161,011     (100,164

Net cash flows from financing activities

     15,883        140,330        92,748   

 

53


Table of Contents

Net cash flows from operating activities

The increase in net cash flows from operating activities in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily due to the improved operating performance and expansion of the Company. The decrease in net cash flows from operating activities in the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily due to higher interest and income tax payments and the decrease in net working capital movements partly offset by the improved operating performance of the Company.

Net cash flows from investing activities

The increases in net cash used in investing activities in the years ended December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 were primarily due to capital expenditures in the expansion of existing data centers and the construction of new data centers. The decrease in net cash used in investing activities in the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily a result of the timing of capital expenditures in the expansion of existing data centers and the construction of new data centers.

Net cash flows from financing activities

Net cash flows from financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2012 was principally the result of €10.0 million in gross proceeds drawn under our new mortgage financing on our AMS6 data center property, and of €8.0 million in gross proceeds from the exercise of options. Net cash flows from financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily the result of €143.0 million in gross proceeds from the issuance of new shares in connection with the IPO partly offset by associated costs and fees. Net cash flows from financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily the result of €254.3 million in gross proceeds from the issuance of the Senior Secured Notes (and after deducting deferred financing fees related to the Revolving Credit Facility), which was partly offset by repayment of our previously outstanding credit facility and associated costs and fees.

We anticipate that cash flows from operating activities and from the utilization of credit available will be sufficient to meet our operating requirements on a short-term (twelve months) and long-term basis, including repayment of the current portion as of December 31, 2012 of our debt as it becomes due, and to complete our publicly announced expansion projects.

Optional Redemption of the Senior Secured Notes

Optional Redemption prior to February 12, 2013 upon Equity Offering

At any time prior to February 12, 2013, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we would have been able on any one or more occasions to redeem up to 35% of the aggregate principal amount of Notes at a redemption price of 109.5% of their principal amount, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, with the net proceeds from one or more Equity Offerings other than an Initial Public Offering within 6 months of the issue date. We may only do this, however, if:

 

  a) at least 65% of the aggregate principal amount of Notes that were initially issued would remain outstanding immediately after the proposed redemption; and

 

  b) the redemption occurs within 90 days after the closing of such Equity Offering.

Optional Redemption prior to February 12, 2014

At any time prior to February 12, 2014, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may also redeem all or part of the Notes at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof plus the Applicable Redemption Premium and accrued and unpaid interest to the redemption date.

 

54


Table of Contents

Optional Redemption on or after February 12, 2014

At any time on or after February 12, 2014 and prior to maturity, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may redeem all or part of the Notes. These redemptions will be in amounts of € 50,000 or integral multiples of € 1,000 in excess thereof at the following redemption prices (expressed as percentages of their principal amount at maturity), plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, if redeemed during the 12-month period commencing on February 12 of the years set forth below.

 

Year

   Redemption Price  

2014

     104.750

2015

     102.375

2016 and thereafter

     100.000

Any optional redemption or notice thereof may, at our discretion, be subject to one or more conditions precedent.

Redemption Upon Changes in Withholding Taxes

We may, at our option, redeem the Notes, in whole but not in part, at any time upon giving not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice to the Holders, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof, together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, to the redemption date and all Additional Amounts, if any, then due and which will become due on the date of redemption as a result of the redemption or otherwise, if we determine in good faith that we or any guarantor is or, on the next date on which any amount would be payable in respect of the Notes, would be obliged to pay Additional Amounts which are more than a de minimis amount in respect of the Notes pursuant to the terms and conditions thereof, which we or any guarantor cannot avoid by the use of reasonable measures available to it (including making payment through a paying agent located in another jurisdiction) as a result of:

 

  a) any change in, or amendment to, the laws or treaties (or any regulations or rulings promulgated thereunder) of any relevant taxing jurisdiction affecting taxation which becomes effective on or after the date of the Indenture or, if the relevant taxing jurisdiction has changed since the date of the Indenture, on or after the date on which the then current relevant taxing jurisdiction became the relevant taxing jurisdiction under the Indenture (or, in the case of a successor person, on or after the date of assumption by the successor person of our obligations under the Indenture); or

 

  b) any change in the official application, administration, or interpretation of the laws, treaties, regulations or rulings of any relevant taxing jurisdiction (including a holding, judgment or order by a court of competent jurisdiction) on or after the date of the Indenture or, if the relevant taxing jurisdiction has changed since the date of the Indenture, on or after the date on which the then current relevant taxing jurisdiction became the relevant taxing jurisdiction under the Indenture (or, in the case of a successor person, on or after the date of assumption by the successor person of our obligations under the Indenture) (each of the foregoing clauses (a) and (b), a “Change in Tax Law”).

The Notes also contain standard change of control provisions which require the Company to make an offer to each holder of Notes to purchase such holder’s Notes in cash equal to 101% of the principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the date of purchase, upon the occurrence of a change of control (as defined in the indenture for the Notes).

Definitions:

“Additional Amounts” means any jurisdiction in which the Issuer or guarantor is organized, engaged in business, resident for tax purposes or generally subject to tax on a net income basis or from or through which payment on the Notes is made or any political subdivision or authority thereof or therein having the power to tax.

“Applicable Redemption Premium” means, with respect to any Note on any redemption date, the greater of:

 

  a) 1.0% of the principal amount of the Note; and

 

  b) the excess of:

 

  (i)

the present value at such redemption date of: (x) the redemption price of such Note at February 12, 2014 (such redemption price being set forth in the table appearing on the face

 

55


Table of Contents
  of the Notes; plus (y) all required interest payments that would otherwise be due to be paid on such Note during the period between the redemption date and February 12, 2014 (excluding accrued but unpaid interest), computed using a discount rate equal to the bund rate at such redemption date plus 50 basis points; over

 

  (ii) the outstanding principal amount of the Note.

For the avoidance of doubt, calculation of the Applicable Redemptions Premium shall not be a duty or obligation of the trustee or any paying agent.

“Equity Offering” means an underwritten offer and sale of capital stock (which is qualified capital stock) of the Issuer, or any holding company of the Issuer; provided that the net proceeds of such underwritten public offer and sale are contributed to the equity capital of the Issuer.

“Holder” means the person in whose name a Note is recorded on the registrar’s books.

“Indenture” means the indenture dated as of February 12, 2010 among InterXion Holding N.V., as Issuer, InterXion Nederland B.V., InterXion HeadQuarters B.V., InterXion Carrier Hotel (UK) Ltd and InterXion Deutschland GmbH, as initial guarantors, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, as trustee, principal paying agent and transfer agent, The Bank of New York Mellon (Luxembourg) S.A., as registrar and Luxembourg paying agent and Barclays Bank PLC, as security trustee, as may be amended or supplemented from time to time.

“Initial Public Offering” means an Equity Offering of the Issuer or any holding company of the Issuer or any successor of the Issuer or any holding company of the Issuer (the “IPO Entity”) following which there is a public market and, as a result of which, the capital stock of the IPO Entity in such offering is listed on an internationally recognized exchange or traded on an internationally recognized market.

“Issuer” means InterXion Holding N.V.

“Notes” means the €200,000,000 9.50% senior secured notes due 2017 and any additional Notes issued under the Indenture.

Restrictive Covenants Under Certain Financing Agreements

Revolving Credit Facility

Failure to comply with the financial covenants in our €60 million revolving credit facility would result in an event of default, which may cause all amounts outstanding under the facility to become immediately due and payable. Acceleration of such outstanding amounts under the facility may lead to an event of default under the indenture governing our €260 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes. Failure to satisfy the financial covenants in the indenture would result in our inability to incur additional debt under certain circumstances.

The Revolving Facility Agreement contains various covenants that restrict, among other things and subject to certain exceptions, the ability of the Company and its subsidiaries to:

 

   

create certain liens;

 

   

incur debt;

 

   

enter into transactions other than on arm’s-length basis;

 

   

pay dividends or make certain distributions or payments;

 

   

engage in any business activity not authorized by the Revolving Credit Facility Agreement;

 

   

sell certain kinds of assets;

 

   

impair any security interest on the assets serving as collateral for the Revolving Credit Facility Agreement;

 

   

enter into any sale and leaseback transaction;

 

   

make certain investments or other types of restricted payments;

 

   

change the nature of their business;

 

   

designate unrestricted subsidiaries; and

 

   

effect mergers, consolidations or sale of assets.

 

56


Table of Contents

The Revolving Facility Agreement contains two financial maintenance covenants, an interest coverage covenant and a leverage covenant. The interest coverage covenant requires the Company to maintain a minimum ratio of Adjusted EBITDA (as defined in the Revolving Facility Agreement) to finance charges. The leverage covenant requires the Company not to exceed a ratio of consolidated total debt to pro forma EBITDA (as defined in the Revolving Facility Agreement). In addition, the Company must ensure that the guarantors represent a certain percentage of Adjusted EBITDA of the Company as a whole and a certain percentage of the consolidated net assets of the Company as a whole.

The breach of any of these covenants by the Company or the failure by the Company to maintain its leverage or interest coverage ratios could result in a default under the Revolving Facility Agreement. As of December 31, 2012, the Company was in compliance with all covenants in the Revolving Facility Agreement. In addition, the Company does not anticipate any such breach or failure and believes that its ability to borrow funds under the Revolving Facility Agreement will not be adversely affected by the covenants in the next 12 months.

Senior Secured Notes Indenture

The Indenture contains covenants for the benefit of the holders of the Notes that restrict, among other things and subject to certain exceptions, the ability of the Company and its subsidiaries to:

 

   

create certain liens;

 

   

incur debt;

 

   

enter into certain transactions with, or for the benefit of, an affiliate;

 

   

pay dividends or make certain distributions or payments;

 

   

engage in any business activity not authorized by the Indenture;

 

   

sell certain kinds of assets;

 

   

impair any security interest on the assets serving as collateral for the Notes;

 

   

enter into any sale and leaseback transaction;

 

   

make certain investments or other types of restricted payments;

 

   

designate unrestricted subsidiaries; and

 

   

effect mergers, consolidations or sale of assets.

The breach of any of these covenants by the Company could result in a default under the Indenture. As of December 31, 2012, the Company was in compliance with all covenants in the Indenture.

The Company remained in full compliance with its debt covenants. The Company’s Leverage ratio stood at 2.54 compared to a required ratio of less than 4.00. The Senior Notes also have a consolidated fixed charge covenant that requires the Company to exceed 2.00. For 2012, the Company’s consolidated fixed charge ratio was 4.36.

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA

EBITDA for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010 was €109.2 million, €93.6 million, and €77.8 million, respectively, representing 39%, 38% and 37% of revenue, respectively. Adjusted EBITDA for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010 was €115.0 million, €97.6 million and €79.2 million respectively, representing 42%, 40% and 38% of revenue, respectively.

EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from sub-leases on unused data center sites. Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. We present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €60 million revolving credit facility and €260 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. However, other companies may present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin

 

57


Table of Contents

differently than we do. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS.

The following table presents a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit according to our income statement, for the periods indicated:

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Operating profit

     65,159        58,093        46,686   

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     43,993        35,552        31,108   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA

     109,152        93,645        77,794   

Share-based payments

     5,488        2,736        1,684   

Increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts (1)

     838        18        150   

IPO transaction costs (2)

     —          1,725        —     

Income from sub-leases on unused data center sites (3)

     (463     (487     (425
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     115,015        97,637        79,203   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) “Increase in provision for onerous lease contracts” does not reflect the deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.
(2) “IPO transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.
(3) “Income from sub-leases on unused data center sites” is reported within “Other income.”

Contractual Obligations and Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

We lease a majority of our data centers and certain equipment under non-cancellable lease agreements. The following represents our debt maturities, financings, leases and other contractual commitments as of December 31, 2012:

 

     Total      Less than 1
year
     1 – 3 years      3 – 5 years      More than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Long-term debt obligations (1)

     384,395         25,734         51,475         307,186         —     

Capital (finance) lease obligations (2)

     32,316         1,659         3,473         3,742         23,442   

Operating lease obligations in relation to onerous lease contracts

     11,557         3,352         6,704         1,501         —     

Operating lease obligations (3)

     359,251         25,403         55,664         54,549         223,635   

Other contractual purchase commitments

     33,200         21,600         11,600         —           —     

Capital purchase commitments

     17,900         17,900         —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     838,619         95,648         128,916         366,978         247,077   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Long-term debt obligations include the Senior Secured Notes, the mortgage, loans from suppliers and/or landlords including the related interest.

 

58


Table of Contents
(2) Financial lease include future interest payments.

 

(3) Operating lease obligations include the lease of property and equipment. Of the total operating leases, as at December 31, 2012, an amount of €76.2 million is cancellable until January 1, 2016.

 

59


Table of Contents

In connection with 16 of our data center and office leases, we entered into 18 irrevocable bank guarantees totaling €6.7 million with ABN AMRO Bank, Royal Bank of Scotland, La Caixa and Sparkasse. These bank guarantees were provided in lieu of cash deposits and automatically renew in successive one-year periods until the final lease expiration date. The bank guarantees are cash collateralized and the collateral is reflected as restricted cash on our statement of financial position. These contingent commitments are not reflected in the table above.

Primarily as a result of our various data center expansion projects, as of December 31, 2012, we were contractually committed for €17.9 million of unaccrued capital expenditures, primarily for data center equipment not yet delivered and labor not yet provided, in connection with the work necessary to complete construction and open these data centers prior to making them available to customers for installation. This amount, which is expected to be paid in 2013, is reflected in the table above as “Capital purchase commitments.”

We have other non-capital purchase commitments in place as of December 31, 2012, such as commitments to purchase power in select locations, through the year 2013, and other open purchase orders, which contractually bind us for goods or services to be delivered or provided during the remainder of 2013 and beyond. Such other purchase commitments as of December 31, 2012, which totaled €33.2 million, are also reflected in the table above as “Other contractual purchase commitments.”

In addition, although we are not contractually obligated to do so, we expect to incur additional capital expenditures consistent with our disciplined expansion and conservative financial management in our various data center expansion projects during the remainder of 2013 in order to complete the work needed to open these data centers. These non-contractual capital expenditures are not reflected in the table above.

Critical Accounting Estimates

Basis of Measurement

We present our financial statements in thousands of euro. They are prepared under the historical cost convention except for certain financial instruments. The financial statements are presented on the going-concern basis. Our functional currency is the euro.

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently by us and our wholly-owned subsidiaries and to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements.

Use of Estimates and Judgments

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ from these estimates. Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimates are revised and in any future periods affected.

In particular, information about significant areas of estimation uncertainty and critical judgments in applying accounting policies that have the most significant effect on amounts recognized in the financial statements are discussed below.

Property, Plant and Equipment Depreciation

Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are also reviewed for impairment where there has been a triggering event by assessing the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on our best estimates of future prices, output and costs and is therefore subjective.

Intangible Fixed Assets Amortization

Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of intangible fixed assets are also reviewed for impairment where there has been a triggering event by assessing

 

60


Table of Contents

the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on our best estimates of future prices, output and costs and is therefore subjective.

Lease Accounting

At inception or modification of an arrangement, the Group determines whether such an arrangement is or contains a lease. Classification of a lease contract (operating versus a finance lease) is based on the extent to which risks and rewards incidental to ownership of a leased asset lie with the lessor or the lessee. The classification of lease contracts includes the use of judgments and estimates.

Costs of Site Restoration

Liabilities in respect of obligations to restore premises to their original condition are estimated at the commencement of the lease and reviewed yearly based on rents, remaining terms, contracted extension possibilities and possibilities of lease terminations. A provision for site restoration is recognized when costs for restoring leasehold premises to their original condition at the end of the lease term is required to be made and the likelihood of this liability is estimated to be probable. The discounted cost of the liability is included in the related assets and is depreciated over the remaining estimated term of the lease. If the likelihood of this liability is estimated to be possible, rather than probable, it is disclosed as a contingent liability.

Provision for Onerous Lease Contracts

Provision is made for the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the leases. Where unused sites have been sublet or partly sublet, management has taken account of the contracted rental income to be received over the minimum sublease term in arriving at the amount of future losses. Currently, the provision for onerous lease contracts principally relates to two unused data center sites in Germany, one in Munich terminating in March 2016 and one in Dusseldorf terminating in August 2016.

Deferred Taxation

Provision is made for deferred taxation at the rates of tax prevailing at the period end dates unless future rates have been substantively enacted. Deferred tax assets are recognized where it is probable that they will be recovered based on estimates of future taxable profits for each tax jurisdiction. The actual profitability may be different depending upon local financial performance in each tax jurisdiction.

Share-based Payments

Equity-settled share-based payments are issued to certain employees under the terms of the long term incentive plans. The charges related to equity-settled share-based payments, options to purchase ordinary shares, are measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value at the grant date is determined using the Black Scholes model and is expensed over the vesting period. The value of the expense is dependent upon certain assumptions including the expected future volatility of the Company’s share price at the date of the grant.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

The following new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations set out below were issued but were not effective for the financial year ending December 31, 2012 and were not applied in preparing the financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011. Those which may be relevant to the group are set out below.

IFRS 9 “Financial Instruments”

IFRS 10 “Consolidated Financial Statements”

IFRS 11 “Joint arrangements”

IFRS 12 “Disclosures of interests in Other entities”

IFRS 13 “Fair value measurement”

 

61


Table of Contents

Revision to IFRIC 14, IAS 19, “The Limit on a Defined Benefit Assets, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction”

The Group has not opted for earlier adoption. Following an internal review, it is not anticipated that the adoption of these new but not yet effective standards and interpretations will have a material financial impact on the financial statements in the period of initial application and subsequent reporting, except for IFRS 9 “Financial Instruments” which becomes mandatory for the Group’s 2014 consolidated financial statements and could change the classification and measurement of financial assets.

 

62


Table of Contents

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

Introduction

We have a one-tier board structure (the “Board”) comprised of directors with the title “Executive Directors” and directors with the title “Non-Executive Directors” (together with the Executive Directors, the “Directors”). The majority of our Directors are independent as required by the NYSE Manual.

Senior Management and Board of Directors

The following table lists the names, positions and ages of the members of our Senior Management and our Directors:

 

Name

   Age     

Position (2)

   Term Expiration  Date (1)  

David Ruberg

     67       President, Chief Executive Officer, Vice-Chairman and Executive Director      2013   

M.V. “Josh” Joshi

     45       Chief Financial Officer   

Kevin Dean

     50       Chief Marketing Officer   

Peter Cladingbowl

     48       Senior Vice President, Engineering and Operations Support   

Jaap Camman

     46       Senior Vice President, Legal   

Jan Pieter Anten

     40       Vice President, Human Resources   

John C. Baker

     63       Chairman and Non-Executive Director      2013   

Robert M. Manning

     53       Non-Executive Director      2015   

David Lister

     54       Non-Executive Director      2014   

Cees van Luijk

     63       Non-Executive Director      2015   

Michel Massart

     62       Non-Executive Director      2014   

Jean F.H.P. Mandeville

     53       Non-Executive Director      2013   

 

Notes:

(1) The term of office expires at the annual general meeting of our shareholders held in the year indicated.
(2) A majority of our Directors are independent as required by the NYSE Manual. Of our Non-Executive Directors, Mr. Baker and Mr. Manning are considered to be non-independent as they are both general partners of Baker Capital affiliates. Our other Non-Executive Directors are all independent.

The business address of all members of our Senior Management and of our Directors is at our registered offices located at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands.

The principal functions and experience of each of the members of our Senior Management and our Directors are set out below:

David Ruberg, President, Chief Executive Officer, Vice-Chairman and Executive Director

David Ruberg joined us as President and Chief Executive Officer in November 2007 and became Vice-Chairman of the board of directors when it became a one-tier board in 2011. David served as Chairman of the Supervisory Board from 2002 to 2007 and on the Management Board from 2007 until the conversion into a one-tier board. David was affiliated with Baker Capital, a private equity firm from January 2002 until

 

63


Table of Contents

October 2007. From April 1993 until October 2001 he was Chairman, President and CEO of Intermedia Communications, a NASDAQ-listed broadband communications services provider, as well as Chairman of its majority-owned subsidiary, Digex, Inc., a NASDAQ-listed managed web hosting company. He began his career as a scientist at AT&T Bell Labs, contributing to the development of operating systems and computer languages. David serves on the board of QSC AG. He holds a Bachelor’s Degree from Middlebury College and a Masters in Computer and Communication Sciences from the University of Michigan.

M.V. “Josh” Joshi, Chief Financial Officer

Josh Joshi joined us as Chief Financial Officer in August 2007. From June 2006 to December 2006 he was CFO of Leisure and Gaming plc, an online gaming and gambling business, and from April 2003 to May 2006 he was CFO of TeleCity plc, a pan European carrier-neutral data center business, both publicly traded companies on the London Stock Exchange. He was one of the founders and CFO of private-equity-backed Storm Telecommunications Limited, a U.S. and pan European data and network service provider. In his early career, Josh spent 8 years in professional practice, predominantly with Arthur Andersen. Josh holds a Bachelor’s Degree in Civil Engineering from Imperial College, London and is a Chartered Accountant.

Kevin Dean, Chief Marketing Officer

Kevin Dean was appointed Senior Vice President Marketing and Chief Marketing Officer in December 2009. From 2003 to 2009 he served as Marketing Director for COLT Telecommunications, a FTSE 200 listed European voice, data and hosting company. From 1994 to 2003 he worked at Cable and Wireless, a FTSE 200 listed global telecommunications company, holding a number of positions including General Manager sector marketing and business development, Director Marketing and Vice President Marketing Analysis, Planning and Strategy. Mr. Dean graduated from Manchester Metropolitan University with a Degree in Applied Physics, and subsequently earned an MBA from the Open Business School and is a Chartered Marketer.

Peter Cladingbowl, Senior Vice President, Engineering and Operations Support

Peter Cladingbowl joined us as Senior Vice President, Engineering and Operations Support in August of 2010. Prior to joining us, Peter was the Vice President Operations EMEA at Global Crossing. Previous roles at Global Crossing, where he spent a total of 12 years, included CIO EMEA and Director of Business Operations. Peter also has substantial operational and general management experience in manufacturing and started his career as a geophysical engineer in the off-shore oil industry. He holds a BSc (Mechanical Engineering) from the University of Cape Town, South Africa.

Jaap Camman, Senior Vice President, Legal

Jaap Camman is responsible for all legal and corporate affairs across the Group. He joined us in November 1999 as Manager Legal and has been our Executive Vice President Legal since July 2002. Before joining us, he worked for the Dutch Government from February 1994 until October 1999. His latest position was Deputy Head of the Insurance Division within The Netherlands Ministry of Finance. Jaap holds a Law Degree from Utrecht University.

Jan-Pieter Anten, Vice President, Human Resources

Jan-Pieter Anten joined us as Vice President Human Resources in October 2011. Prior to joining us, Jan-Pieter worked for Hay Group, a global management consulting firm, as Director International Strategic Clients Europe, where he led major accounts within the European market. Prior to that, he held the position of Vice President Human Resources at Synthon, an international organization with worldwide affiliates. Before Synthon he worked for Hay Group as a Senior Consultant. Jan-Pieter holds a degree from the University of Utrecht.

John C. Baker, Chairman and Non-Executive Director

Mr. Baker serves as Chairman of the board of directors. Prior to our conversion into a one-tier board of directors in January 2011, Mr. Baker served as Chairman of our Supervisory Board, which he joined in 2007. Mr. Baker founded Baker Capital in 1995. Mr. Baker is a member of the board of Wine.com. Mr. Baker is a graduate of Harvard College and Harvard Business School.

 

64


Table of Contents

Robert M. Manning, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Manning serves on our board of directors. Prior to our conversion into a one-tier board of directors in January 2011, Mr. Manning served on our Supervisory Board, which he joined in 2002. Mr. Manning is a general partner with Baker Capital. Prior to joining Baker Capital, Mr. Manning was CFO of Intermedia Communications, Inc., an integrated communications service provider, from 1996 to 2001, and a director of its majority-owned subsidiary Digex, Inc., a provider of complex, managed, web hosting services, from 1998 to 2001. Prior to Intermedia, Mr. Manning was a founding executive of DMX, Inc., the first satellite- and cable-delivered digital radio network, from 1990 to 1996. Prior to DMX, Mr. Manning worked as an investment banker to the cable television and communications industries. Mr. Manning serves on the boards of Wine.com (Chairman) and Core Value Software (Chairman). He is a graduate of Williams College.

David Lister, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Lister serves on our board of directors, to which he was appointed in June 2011. Mr. Lister joined National Grid as Global Chief Information Officer in March 2009. He is also a Non-Executive Director of the UK Government’s Department of Work and Pensions. Before joining National Grid, David held CIO positions at a number of leading international companies including Royal Bank of Scotland, Reuters, Boots, Glaxo, Wellcome, and Guinness plc. Prior to these assignments, he held a series of increasingly senior positions in Information Technology across a range of industries including Chemicals, Construction, and Electronics as well as time in Management Consultancy with Coopers & Lybrand. He was a Non-Executive Director of IXEurope, a European IT Services company, prior to its acquisition. He is a member of several IT consultative boards including the Board of eSkills, the Skills Sector Council for Business and Information Technology in the UK. Before entering industry, David studied Architecture at the University of Edinburgh.

Cees van Luijk, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Van Luijk serves on our board of directors. Prior to our conversion into a one-tier board of directors in January 2011, Mr. Van Luijk served on our Supervisory Board, which he joined in 2002. Since 2003 he has been Chairman and co-managing partner of Capital-C Ventures, a Benelux-focused technology venture capital firm. Mr. Van Luijk was formerly the CEO of Getronics between 1999 and 2001 and prior to that a member of the Global Leadership Team of PricewaterhouseCoopers. Mr. Van Luijk serves on the boards of PontMeyer NV, Intersafe Groeneveld, Holland Colours NV, Parkking Holding BV and Lirema BV. Mr. Van Luijk is a Certified Public Accountant in The Netherlands and holds a Master’s Degree in Business Economics from the Erasmus University Rotterdam.

Michel Massart, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Massart serves on our board of directors, to which he was appointed in January 2012. He is a former managing partner of PricewaterhouseCoopers (PWC) in Belgium, where he held various positions in the field of audit, specializing in Technology and FMCG companies and the Public Sector. From 1988 to 1996, he also assumed HR responsibilities for PWC Belgium. In 1997, he set up the Corporate Finance Department of PWC Belgium specializing in M&A, valuations and corporate restructuring. From 2003 to 2011, he was a director and chairman of the audit committee of Millicom International Cellular S.A., a mobile telephone operator in emerging countries listed on the NASDAQ and Stockholm stock exchanges. He is a former member of the Board of the Belgian Institute of Statutory Auditors. He is currently a professor at Solvay Brussels School of Economics and Management in Brussels, Belgium where he lectures on accounting, risk management and corporate governance.

Jean F.H.P. Mandeville, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Mandeville serves on our board of directors, to which he was appointed in January 2011. From October 2008 to December 2010, Mr. Mandeville served as Chief Financial Officer and board member of MACH S.à.r.l. He served as an Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Global Crossing Holdings Ltd/Global Crossing Ltd., from February 2005 to September 2008. Mr. Mandeville joined Global

 

65


Table of Contents

Crossing in February 2005, where he was responsible for all of its financial operations. He served as Chief Financial Officer of Singapore Technologies Telemedia Pte. Ltd./ST Telemedia from July 2002 to January 2005. In 1992, he joined British Telecom and served in various capacities covering all sectors of the telecommunications market (including wireline, wireless and multi-media) in Europe, Asia and the Americas. From 1992 to June 2002, Mr. Mandeville served in various capacities at British Telecom PLC, including President of Asia Pacific from July 2000 to June 2002, Director of International Development Asia Pacific from June 1999 to July 2000 and General Manager, Special Projects from January 1998 to July 1999. Mr. Mandeville was a Senior Consultant with Coopers & Lybrand, Belgium from 1989 to 1992. He graduated from the University Saint-Ignatius Antwerp with a Masters in Applied Economics in 1982 and a Special degree in Sea Law in 1985.

Board Powers and Function

Our Board is responsible for the overall conduct of our business and has the powers, authorities and duties vested in it by and pursuant to the relevant laws of The Netherlands and our articles of association. In all its dealings, our Board shall be guided by the interests of our Group as a whole, including but not limited to our shareholders. Our Board has the final responsibility for the management, direction and performance of us and our Group. Our Executive Director will be responsible for the day-to-day management of the Company. Our Non-Executive Directors will supervise the Executive Director and our general affairs and provide general advice to the Executive Director.

Our CEO is the general manager of our business, subject to the control of our Board, and is entrusted with all of our Board’s powers, authorities and discretions (including the power to sub-delegate) delegated by the full Board from time to time by a resolution of our Board. Matters expressly delegated to our CEO are validly resolved upon by our CEO and no further resolutions, approvals or other involvement of our Board is required. Our Board may also delegate authorities to its committees. Upon any such delegation our Board supervises the execution of its responsibilities by our CEO and/or our Board committees. It remains ultimately responsible for the fulfillment of its duties by them.

Our articles of association provide that in the event we have a conflict of interest with one or more Directors, we may still be represented by the Board or an Executive Director. In the event of a conflict of interest, however, our general meeting of shareholders has the power to designate one or more other persons to represent us. Directors who have a conflict of interest are not prohibited from participating in Board meetings or the decision making process.

Board Meetings and Decisions

All resolutions of our Board are adopted by an absolute majority of votes cast in a meeting at which at least the majority of the Directors are present or represented. A member of the Board may authorize another member of the Board to represent him/her at the Board meeting and vote on his/her behalf. Each Director is entitled to one vote (provided that, for the avoidance of doubt, a member representing one or more absent members of the Board by written power of attorney will be entitled to cast the vote of each such absent member). If there is a tie, the Chairman has the casting vote.

Our Board meets as often as it deems necessary or appropriate or upon the request of any member of our Board. Our Board has adopted rules, which contain additional requirements for our decision-making process, the convening of meetings and, through separate resolution by our Board, details on the assignment of duties and a division of responsibilities between Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors. Our Board has appointed one of the Directors as Chairman and one of more Directors as Vice-Chairman of the Board. Our Board is further assisted by a corporate secretary. The corporate secretary may be a member of our Board or our Senior Management and is appointed by our Board.

 

66


Table of Contents

Composition of Board

The majority of our Directors are independent as required by the NYSE Manual.

Our Board consists of a minimum of one Executive Director and a minimum of three Non-Executive Directors, provided that our Board is comprised of a maximum of 7 (seven) members. The number of Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors is determined by our general meeting of shareholders, provided that the majority of our Board must consist of Non-Executive Directors. Only natural persons can be Non-Executive Directors. The Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors as such are appointed by our general meeting of shareholders, provided that our Board is classified, with respect to the term for which each member of our Board will severally be appointed and serve as member of our Board, into three classes, as nearly equal in number as reasonably possible.

The class I Directors serve for a term expiring at the annual general meeting of shareholders in 2014, the class II Directors serve for a term expiring at the annual general meeting of shareholders in 2015, and the class III Directors serve for a term expiring at the annual general meeting of shareholders in 2013. At each annual general meeting of shareholders, Directors appointed to succeed those Directors whose terms expire are appointed to serve for a term of office to expire at the third succeeding annual general meeting of shareholders after their appointment. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Directors appointed to each class continue to serve their term in office until their successors are duly appointed and qualified or until their earlier resignation, death or removal. If a vacancy occurs, any Director so appointed to fill that vacancy serves its term in office for the remainder of the full term of the class of Directors in which the vacancy occurred.

Our Board has nomination rights with respect to the appointment of a Director. Any nomination by our Board may consist of one or more candidates per vacant seat. If a nomination consists of a list of two or more candidates, it is binding and the appointment to the vacant seat concerned will be from the persons placed on the binding list of candidates and will be effected through election. Notwithstanding the foregoing, our general meeting of shareholders may, at all times, by a resolution passed with a two-thirds majority of the votes cast representing more than half of our issued and outstanding capital, resolve that such list of candidates will not be binding. See Item 7 “Major Shareholder and Related Party Transactions—Related Party Transactions—Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital” for nomination rights granted to Baker Capital.

Directors may be suspended or removed at any time by our general meeting of shareholders. A resolution to suspend or remove a Director must be adopted by at least a two-thirds majority of the votes cast, provided such majority represents more than half of our issued and outstanding share capital. Currently, Dutch law does not allow Directors to be suspended by our Board; however, Dutch law is expected to be amended to facilitate the suspension of executive directors by a board of directors and following such amendment a Director may also be suspended by our Board for no longer than three months in the aggregate. If, at the end of that period, no decision has been taken on termination of the suspension, the suspension shall end.

Directors’ Insurance and Indemnification

In order to attract and retain qualified and talented persons to serve as members of our Board or our Senior Management, we currently do and expect to continue to provide such persons with protection through a directors’ and officers’ insurance policy. Under this policy, any of our past, present or future Directors and members of our Senior Management will be insured against any claim made against any one of them for any wrongful act in their respective capacities.

Under our articles of association, we are required to indemnify each current and former member of our Board who was or is involved, in that capacity, as a party to any actions or proceedings, against all conceivable financial loss or harm suffered in connection with those actions or proceedings, unless it is ultimately determined by a court having jurisdiction that the damage was caused by intent ( opzet ), willful recklessness ( bewuste roekeloosheid ) or serious culpability ( ernstige verwijtbaarheid ) on the part of such member.

 

67


Table of Contents

Insofar as indemnification of liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to members of our Board, officers or persons controlling us pursuant to the foregoing provisions, we have been informed that, in the opinion of the SEC, such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is therefore unenforceable.

Board Committees

Our Board has established an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating committee. The audit committee is in compliance with the NYSE listed company board committee independence requirements. The compensation committee and the nominating committee do not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual. Rule 303A permits foreign private issuers like us to follow home country practice with regard to, amongst others, the independence requirement for the compensation committee and for the nominating committee. Our Board may also establish such other committees as it deems appropriate, in accordance with applicable law and regulations and our articles of association and any applicable Board rules.

Many of the corporate governance rules in the NYSE Manual do not apply to the Company as a “foreign private issuer”; however, Rule 303A.11 requires foreign private issuers to describe significant differences between their corporate governance standards and the corporate governance standards applicable to U.S. companies listed on the NYSE. While the Company’s management believes that its corporate governance practices are similar in many respects to those of U.S. NYSE-listed companies and provide investors with protections that are comparable in many respects to those established by the NYSE Manual, there are certain key differences which are described below.

Audit Committee

Our audit committee consists of three independent Directors, Cees van Luijk, Michel Massart and Jean Mandeville, with Cees van Luijk serving as the chairperson of the audit committee. The audit committee is independent as defined under and required by Rule 10A-3 under the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (“Rule 10A-3”) and the NYSE. Our board of directors has determined that Cees van Luijk qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert,” as that term is defined in Item 16A of Form 20-F. The audit committee has the responsibility, subject to Board and shareholder approval, for the appointment, compensation, retention and oversight of the work of our independent registered public accounting firm, KPMG Accountants N.V. In addition, approval of the audit committee is required prior to our entering into any related-party transaction. It is also responsible for “whistle-blowing” procedures, certain other compliance matters and the evaluation of the Company’s policies with respect to risk assessment and risk management.

Compensation Committee

Our compensation committee consists of two independent Directors, Cees van Luijk and David Lister, and one non-independent Director, John C. Baker, who also serves as the chairperson of the compensation committee. Among other things, the compensation committee reviews, and makes recommendations to the Board regarding, the compensation and benefits of our CEO and our Board. The compensation committee also administers the issuance of stock options and other awards under our equity incentive plan and evaluates and reviews policies relating to the compensation and benefits of our employees and consultants.

Under Section 303A.05 of the NYSE Manual, which governs compensation committees, the Company’s Compensation Committee does not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

Nominating Committee

Our nominating committee consists of two independent Directors, Cees van Luijk and Jean Mandeville, and one non-independent Director, John C. Baker, who serves as the chairman of the nominating committee. The nominating committee is responsible for, among other things, developing and recommending to our Board our corporate governance guidelines, identifying individuals qualified to become Directors, overseeing the evaluation of the performance of the Board, selecting the Director nominees for the next annual meeting of shareholders, and selecting director candidates to fill any vacancies on the Board.

 

68


Table of Contents

Under Section 303A.04 of the NYSE Manual, which governs nominating/corporate governance committees, the Company’s Nominating Committee does not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

Compensation

The aggregate annual compensation of our Senior Management and Non-Executive Directors for the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately €5.8 million. For amounts set aside for post-employment benefits, see Note 23 of our 2012 consolidated financial statements, included elsewhere herein.

The aggregate compensation of our Non-Executive, Executive Directors, and other Senior Management members for the year ended December 31, 2012 is set forth below.

 

     Annual
compensation
     Bonus      Share-
based
payment
charges
     Termination /
post-
employment
benefits
     Total  
                          (€’000)         

D.C. Ruberg

     540         430         887         —           1,857   

J.C. Baker

     50         —           —           —           50   

R.M. Manning

     40         —           —           —           40   

C.G. van Luijk

     70         —           —           —           70   

D. Lister

     45         —           14         —           59   

M. Massart

     55         —           57         —           112   

J.F.H.P. Mandeville

     55         —           14         —           69   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Subtotal

     855         430         972         —           2,257   

Senior Management (excluding D.C. Ruberg)

     1,202         338         332         60         1,932   

Crisis wage tax

     1,565         —           —           —           1,565   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     3,622         768         1,304         60         5,754   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

In 2012, the Dutch Government imposed a crisis wage tax payable by employers over the total compensation over €150,000 annually, including the benefit from options exercised. The crisis wage tax payable over key management compensation including the benefit from options exercised is presented as “Crisis wage tax” in the table above.

None of the non-executive directors is entitled to any contractually agreed benefit upon termination. Upon termination, the Executive Director is entitled to a contractually agreed benefit compensation equal to 12 months base salary.

Employee Share Ownership Plans

Our InterXion Holding N.V. 2011 International Stock Option and Incentive Master Award Plan (the “2011 Plan”) provides for the grant of options to employees. The purpose of the Plan is to attract, retain and motivate employees responsible for the success and growth of our Company by providing them with appropriate incentives and rewards and enabling them to participate in the growth of our Company.

On January 26, 2011, our general meeting of shareholders authorized our Board to establish this new option plan following the offering, to be called the InterXion Holding N.V. 2011 International Stock Option Plan and Incentive Master Award Plan (the “2011 Plan”), under and in accordance with which our Board

 

69


Table of Contents

may grant options for ordinary shares to certain eligible persons following completion of the offering. The 2008 Plan was discontinued following our initial public offering, but outstanding options will remain governed by the terms of the 2008 Plan until such options have been exercised in full.

Corporate Governance

The Dutch Corporate Governance Code, as revised, became effective on January 1, 2009, and applies to all Dutch companies listed on a government-recognized stock exchange, whether in the Netherlands or elsewhere. The Dutch Corporate Governance Code is based on a “comply or explain” principle, under which all companies filing annual reports in the Netherlands must disclose whether or not they are in compliance with the various rules of the Dutch Corporate Governance Code and explain the reasons for any instance of noncompliance.

With exception to Sections 303A.04 and 303A.05 of the NYSE Manual, which govern nominating/corporate governance committees and compensation committees, respectively, we intend to comply with the NYSE Manual. We also intend to comply with the Dutch Corporate Governance Code, but where the NYSE Manual conflicts with the Dutch Corporate Governance Code we intend to comply with the NYSE Manual. For further information with respect to the composition of our Board committees, see the discussed above under “—Board Committees.”

Stock Options

As of April 1, 2013 our directors and senior managers were granted the options set forth below. The options with option exercise prices denominated in € are options granted under the “2008 Plan”, while the options with option exercise prices denominated in $ are options granted in 2011 under the “2011 Plan”.

The ordinary shares beneficially owned by our directors and senior managers are disclosed in Item 7 “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions”.

 

Name

       Options granted    
outstanding
         Options granted    
outstanding,  but
unvested
     Option
    Exercise    
Price(s)
     Option
             Expiration            
Date
 

D. Ruberg

     600,000         200,000       $ 14.74         November 5, 2019   

J. Baker

     5,000         5,000       $ 18.01         June 27, 2017   

R. Manning

     5,000         5,000       $ 18.01         June 27, 2017   

D. Lister

     15,000         10,000       $ 14.74         June 29, 2016   

C. van Luijk

     5,000         5,000       $ 18.01         June 27, 2017   

M. Massart

     15,000         10,000       $ 13.92         January 20, 2017   

J.F.H.P. Mandeville

     15,000         5,000       $ 13.00         June 29, 2016   

J.P. Anten

     45,000         41,250       $ 11.50         October 10, 2019   
     20,000         20,000       $ 10.00         January 11, 2021   

J. Camman

     50,000         50,000       $ 10.00         October 31, 2020   

P. Cladingbowl

     60,000         22,500       6.50         August 1, 2015   

K. Dean

     100,000         18,750       5.00         December 12, 2014   
     40,000         10,000       5.00         February 10, 2015   

J. Joshi

     60,000         —         4.45         November 1, 2013   
     98,000         —         5.00         February 5, 2014   
     100,000         100,000       $ 10.00         October 31, 2020   

Employees

For a discussion of the number of employees, see Item 4 “Information on the Company—Employees.”

 

70


Table of Contents

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Major Shareholders

The following table sets forth information with respect to Directors, Senior Management and major shareholders, meaning shareholders that are beneficial owners or 5% or more of our ordinary shares as of April 1, 2013.

Beneficial ownership is determined in accordance with rules of the SEC and generally includes any shares over which a person exercises sole or shared voting and/or investment power. Ordinary shares subject to options and warrants currently exercisable or exercisable within 60 days are deemed outstanding and have therefore been included in the number of shares beneficially owned and the calculation of the percentage ownership of the person holding the options but are not deemed outstanding for computing the percentage ownership of any other person. Except as otherwise indicated, we believe the beneficial owners of the ordinary shares listed below, based on information furnished by them, have sole voting and investment power with respect to the number of shares listed opposite their names. Except as otherwise set forth below, the address of each beneficial owner is c/o InterXion Holding N.V., Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands.

 

     Shares
Beneficially Owned
 

Name of Beneficial Owner

   Number      Percent
(%)
 

5% Shareholders

     

Baker Capital (1)(2)

     20,657,892         30.20   

Lamont Finance N.V. (1)(2)

     20,641,613         30.17   

Baker Communications Fund II, L.P. (1) (2) (4)

     16,279         *   

ING Groep N.V. (3)

     4,412,704         6.45   

Directors and Senior Management

     

David Ruberg (5)

     1,250,000         1.83   

John C. Baker (2)

     60,618         *   

Robert M. Manning (4)

     10,144         *   

David Lister (4)

     5,000         *   

Cees van Luijk (4)

     155,486         *   

Michel Massart (4)

     5,000         *   

Jean F.H.P. Mandeville (4)

     10,000         *   

Josh Joshi (6)

     158,000         *   

Kevin Dean (7)

     113,750         *   

Peter Cladingbowl (8)

     41,250         *   

Jaap Camman (9)

     0         *   

Jan Pieter Anten (10)

     7,500         *   

 

Notes:

(1) The address of Baker Communications Fund II, L.P. is 575 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 10022.
(2) The board of managers of the general partners of each of BCF II and Baker Communications Fund II, L.P. consists of John C. Baker, Robert M. Manning and Henry G. Baker and each manager may be deemed to share voting and dispositive control over the shares held by those entities. Each of Mr. Baker and Mr. Manning serves as one of our directors. Each of Mr. Baker and Mr. Manning disclaims beneficial ownership of shares held by Baker Capital except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein.

 

71


Table of Contents
(3) ING Groep N.V. filed a schedule 13G on December 31, 2012, in which was reported that 4,412,704 ordinary shares were held by direct and indirect subsidiaries of ING Groep N.V. in their role as discretionary manager of client portfolios. Of these, 2,870,186 of these shares were held by indirect subsidiaries of ING Groep N.V. in their role as a discretionary manager of client portfolios. Parcom-IT II B.V., an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of ING Groep N.V., may be deemed the beneficial owner of 16,632 of the ordinary shares. ING Groep N.V. disclaims beneficial ownership of these 2,870,186 ordinary shares held by its direct and indirect subsidiaries, as ING Groep N.V. does not hold or exercise voting rights or dispositive powers for such securities.
(4) David Ruberg, Jean Mandeville, David Lister, Michel Massart, Mr. Cees van Luijk, John Baker and Rob Manning own our shares or share options. Messrs. Baker and Manning are associated with (i) Baker Capital, through Lamont Finance N.V., which owned 30.17% of our shares as of April 1, 2013; and (ii) Baker Communications Fund II, L.P., which owned less than one percent of our shares as of April 1, 2013. Mr. van Luijk is indirect minority shareholder of Parc-IT II B.V., which owns 0.02% of our shares as of April 1, 2013, and which is ultimately owned by ING Groep N.V.
(5) David Ruberg is our President, Chief Executive Officer, Vice-Chairman and Executive Director. David Ruberg’s shares beneficially owned consist of our ordinary shares and options for our ordinary shares.
(6) Josh Joshi is our Chief Financial Officer. Josh Joshi’s total shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.
(7) Kevin Dean is our Chief Marketing Officer. Kevin Dean’s total shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.
(8) Peter Cladingbowl is our Senior Vice President of Engineering and Operations Support. Peter Cladingbowl’s shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.
(9) Jaap Camman is our Senior Vice President of Legal and Corporate Secretary. Jaap Camman’ s shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.
(10) Jan Pieter Anten is our Vice President of Human Resources. Jan Pieter Anten’s shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.

We effected a registered public offering of our ordinary shares and our ordinary shares began trading on the NYSE on January 28, 2011. Accordingly, certain of our principal shareholders acquired their ordinary shares either at or subsequent to this time. Our major shareholders have the same voting rights as our other shareholders, but Baker Capital currently has the right to nominate a majority of the members of our Board, as described below in “Related Party Transactions – Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital.” As of April 1, 2013, we had nine shareholders of record. Three of the shareholders of record were located in the United States and held in the aggregate 68,320,862 ordinary shares representing approximately 99.9% of our outstanding ordinary shares. However, the United States shareholders of record include Cede & Co., which, as nominee for The Depository Trust Company, is the record holder of 47,662,970 ordinary shares. Accordingly, we believe that the shares held by Cede & Co. include ordinary shares beneficially owned by both holders in the United States and non-United States beneficial owners. As a result, these numbers may not accurately represent the number of beneficial owners in the United States.

Related Party Transactions

Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital

On February 2, 2011, we entered into a Shareholders Agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of our Board. As such, upon consummation of the initial public offering, Baker Capital will be entitled to designate four nominees for the seven-member board. At such time that a majority of our Board is required to be independent in accordance with the listing requirements of the NYSE, Baker Capital will remain entitled to designate for nomination four of the seven members of the Board, provided, that at least two of the Baker Capital nominees shall satisfy the criteria for independent directors as set forth in the corporate governance rules of the NYSE.

 

72


Table of Contents

For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 25% but more than 15% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination three of the seven members of our Board, at least one of whom shall satisfy the criteria for independent directors as set forth in the applicable listing standards. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 15% but more than 10% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination two of the seven members of our Board, none of whom shall be required to be independent. At such time that the ownership of Baker Capital or its affiliates is less than or equal to 10% but more than 5% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination one of the seven members of our Board, who shall not be required to be independent.

Furthermore, for so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right, but not the obligation, to nominate the Chairman of our Board.

In addition, as long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing more than 15% of our outstanding ordinary shares, at least one of Baker Capital’s director nominees shall be appointed to each of our standing committees, provided that, when required by the transition provisions for companies listing in conjunction an initial public offering, such Baker Capital nominees shall meet any independence or other requirements of the applicable listing standards.

In the event of a change in the number of members of our Board, Baker Capital will have the right to designate a proportional amount of the members of the nominees for our Board to most closely approximate the rights described above.

Registration Rights Agreement

We have entered into a registration rights agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital (the “Baker Shareholders”), pursuant to which 30,801,491 ordinary shares are entitled to the registration rights described below. Of these shares 10,143,599 have been distributed by Baker Capital to its limited partners on March 15, 2012.

Demand registration rights.  We are required to effect up to four registrations at the request of one or more of the Baker Shareholders holding ordinary shares representing in the aggregate a majority of ordinary shares held by the Baker Shareholders (the “Majority Baker Shareholders”). We are not required to effect a registration within 90 days after the effective date of a registration statement. We may not effect a registration for our own account (other than a registration effected solely with respect to an employee benefit plan or pursuant to a registration on Form F-4 or S-4) within 90 days after any such registration without the consent of the Majority Baker Shareholders.

In the event that the managing underwriter advises us that the number of ordinary shares requested to be included in such registration exceeds the number that can be sold in such offering without adversely affecting the underwriter’s ability to effect an orderly distribution of such ordinary shares, we will include in the registration statement the number of ordinary shares that, in the opinion of the managing underwriter, can be sold. The allocation of such ordinary shares to be included in such registration statement will be done on a pro rata basis.

Registration on Form F-3.  If we are eligible under applicable securities laws to file a registration statement on Form F-3, we will file a registration statement on Form F-3 at the request of the Majority Baker Shareholders. These shareholders may request such a registration no more than once every six months. There is no limit to the number of such registrations that these shareholders may request. In connection with the foregoing registrations: (1) we are not required to effect a registration pursuant to a request by shareholders holding registrable securities if, within the 12-month period preceding the date of such request, we have already effected one registration on Form F-3, (2) each registration on Form F-3 must be for anticipated proceeds of at least U.S. $500,000, and (3) we may not effect a registration for our own account (other than a registration effected solely with respect to an employee benefit plan) within 90 days after any such registration without the consent of the Majority Baker Shareholders.

 

73


Table of Contents

Piggyback registration rights.  Baker Shareholders also have the right to request the inclusion of their registrable shares in any registration statements filed by us in the future for the purposes of a public offering, subject to specified exceptions. In the event that the managing underwriter advises that the number of our securities included in such a request exceeds the number that can be sold in such offering without adversely affecting such underwriters’ ability to effect an orderly distribution of our securities, the shares will be included in the registration statement in the following order of preference: first, the shares that we wish to include for our own account and second, ordinary shares held by the Baker Shareholders on a pro rata basis.

Termination.  All registration rights granted to holders of registrable shares terminate when all ordinary shares resulting from the conversion of the Preferred Shares have been effectively registered under the Securities Act, or, with respect to any holder, can be sold freely during a three-month period without registration under the Securities Act.

Expenses.  We will be required to pay all expenses relating to up to two demand registration and up to two registrations on Form F-3. We will be required to pay all expenses relating to piggyback registrations.

 

74


Table of Contents

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Reference is made to Item 18 for a list of all financial statements filed as part of this annual report. For information on legal proceedings, please refer to Item 4 “Information on the Company,” above.

Dividends and Dividend Policy

We have never declared or paid cash dividends on our ordinary shares. We currently intend to retain any future earnings to fund the development and growth of our business and we do not currently anticipate paying dividends on our ordinary shares. Our board of directors will have the discretion to determine to what extent profits shall be retained by way of a reserve. The remaining profits will be at the disposal of our general meeting of shareholders for distribution of a dividend or to be added to the reserves or for such other purposes as our general meeting of shareholders decides, upon a proposal of our board of directors. Our board of directors, in determining whether to recommend to our shareholders the payment of dividends, will consider our ability to declare and pay dividends in light of our future operations and earnings, capital expenditure requirements, general financial conditions, legal and contractual restrictions and other factors that it may deem relevant. In addition, our outstanding €260 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017 and our credit agreements limit our ability to pay dividends and we may in the future become subject to debt instruments or other agreements that further limit our ability to pay dividends. To the extent we pay dividends in euro, the amount of U.S. dollars realized by shareholders will vary depending on the rate of exchange between U.S. dollars and euro. Shareholders will bear any costs related to the conversion of euro into U.S. dollars.

We are a holding company incorporated in The Netherlands. Under Dutch law, we may only pay dividends out of our profits or our share premium account subject to our ability to service our debts as they fall due in the ordinary course of our business and subject to Dutch law and our articles of association. See Item 10 “Additional Information—General.” We rely on dividends paid to us by our wholly-owned subsidiaries in the United Kingdom, France, Germany, Austria, The Netherlands, Ireland, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Belgium and Denmark to fund the payment of dividends, if any, to our shareholders.

 

75


Table of Contents

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

Markets

Our ordinary shares began trading on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “INXN” on January 28, 2011.

New York Stock Exchange Trading History

The following table shows, for the periods indicated, the high and low sales prices per ordinary share as reported on the New York Stock Exchange.

 

Yearly highs and lows    High      Low  
     ($ per ordinary shares)  

2012

     23.76         13.57   

 

Quarterly highs and lows    High      Low  
     ($ per ordinary shares)  

2013

     

First quarter

     26.28         22.56   

2012

     

First quarter

     18.10         13.57   

Second quarter

     20.28         15.82   

Third quarter

     22.72         17.49   

Fourth quarter

     23.76         20.26   

2011

     

First quarter

     15.88         12.11   

Second quarter

     15.62         12.93   

Third quarter

     15.39         10.71   

Fourth quarter

     14.24         11.12   

 

Monthly highs and lows    High      Low  
     ($ per ordinary shares)  

2013

     

January

     24.97         22.72   

February

     24.73         22.56   

March

     26.28         24.07   

April (through April 23, 2013)

     24.50         22.73   

2012

     

October

     23.08         21.06   

November

     22.49         20.26   

December

     23.76         21.35   

 

76


Table of Contents

On April 19, 2013, the closing price of InterXion’s ordinary shares listed on The New York Stock Exchange was $1.3066.

 

77


Table of Contents

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Material contracts

Senior Multicurrency Revolving Facility Agreement dated as of February 1, 2010, as amended May 9, 2012, among InterXion Holding N.V. and the financial institutions party thereto, as Lenders and Barclays Bank PLC, as agent and security trustee.

On February 1, 2010, we entered into the Revolving Facilities Agreement as amended from time to time, by and among, inter alios , InterXion Holding N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, Citigroup Global Markets Limited, ABN AMRO Bank N.V. (as successor to Fortis Bank (Nederland) N.V.), Merrill Lynch International, Credit Suisse AG, London Branch and Jefferies Finance LLC (the “Revolving Facility Agreement”), which, among other things, provides for an amount available for drawing under the Revolving Credit Facility of up to €60.0 million (the “Revolving Credit Facility”). On May 9, 2012, we entered into an Amendment Agreement with Barclays Bank PLC as Agent and Security Agent (the “Amendment Agreement”)., Pursuant to the Amendment Agreement, the Total Commitment under the Revolving Facility Agreement was increased from EUR 50,000,000 to EUR 60,000,000, and the termination date was extended from 1 February 2013 to 12 May 2016. In addition, the Amendment Agreement increased the scope of the purpose of the Revolving Facility Agreement to include acquisitions and investments and introduced a utilization fee at certain outstanding principal levels. Further, the interest cover and leverage ratio were amended, and the cash flow ratio was deleted.

The Revolving Credit Facility bears interest at a rate per annum equal to EURIBOR (or, for loans denominated in Sterling, U.S. $ or CHF, LIBOR) plus certain mandatory costs and a margin of 3.75% per annum, subject to a margin ratchet based on the ratio of consolidated Total Debt at each quarter end to the pro forma EBITDA for the 12 months ending on that quarter end (as such terms are defined in the Facility Agreement).

Borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facility are secured by various share pledges, inter-company loan receivables owed to the Company or any of the guarantors under the Revolving Credit Facility and the bank accounts of the Company and the guarantors under the Revolving Credit Facility.

The Revolving Facility Agreement contains customary affirmative, negative and financial covenants, subject to certain agreed exception as well as customary events of default, including a cross default with respect to an event of default under the Indenture (as defined below) governing the Notes (as defined below).

General

Incorporation and Registered Office

We were incorporated on April 6, 1998 as a private company with limited liability ( besloten vennootschap met beperkte aansprakelijkheid ) under the laws of The Netherlands. On January 11, 2000, we were converted from a B.V. to a limited liability company ( naamloze vennootschap ) under the laws of The Netherlands.

Our corporate seat is in Amsterdam, The Netherlands. We are registered with the Trade Register of the Chamber of Commerce in Amsterdam under number 33301892. Our executive offices are located at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands. Our telephone number is +31 20 880 7600.

 

78


Table of Contents

Articles of Association and Dutch Law

Set forth below is a summary of relevant information concerning our share capital and of material provisions of our articles of association (the “Articles”) and applicable Dutch law. This summary does not constitute legal advice regarding those matters and should not be regarded as such.

Corporate Purpose

Pursuant to Article 3 of our Articles, our corporate purpose is:

 

  (a) to incorporate, to participate in any way whatsoever in, to manage, to supervise businesses and companies;

 

  (b) to finance businesses and companies;

 

  (c) to borrow, to lend and to raise funds, including through the issue of bonds, debt instruments or other securities or evidence of indebtedness as well as to enter into agreements in connection with aforementioned activities;

 

  (d) to render advice and services to businesses and companies with which the Company forms a group and to third parties;

 

  (e) to grant guarantees, to bind the Company and to pledge its assets for obligations of businesses and companies with which it forms a group and on behalf of third parties; and

 

  (f) to perform any and all activities of an industrial, financial or commercial nature,

and to do all that is connected therewith or may be conducive thereto, all to be interpreted in the broadest sense.

Issue of Ordinary Shares

Our Articles provide that we may issue ordinary shares, or grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares, pursuant to a resolution of our general meeting of shareholders upon a proposal of our Board. Our Articles provide that our general meeting of shareholders may, upon a proposal of our Board, designate another corporate body, which can only be our Board, as the competent body to issue ordinary shares, or grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. Pursuant to our Articles and Dutch law, the period of designation may not exceed five years, but may be renewed by a resolution of our general meeting of shareholders for periods of up to five years. If not otherwise stated in the resolution approving the designation, such designation is irrevocable. The resolution designating our Board must specify the number of shares which may be issued and, if applicable, any conditions to the issuance.

Our Board is designated as the corporate body competent to issue ordinary shares and to grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. This authority is limited to a maximum equal to our authorized share capital from time to time. Our Board’s authority to issue ordinary shares and grant rights to acquire ordinary shares is for a period of five years expiring on January 28, 2016. Our general meeting of shareholders may extend this period at any time, subject to the limitations set out above.

Ordinary shares may not be issued at less than their nominal value and must be fully paid up upon issue.

No resolution of our general meeting of shareholders or our Board is required for an issue of ordinary shares pursuant to the exercise of a previously granted right to subscribe for ordinary shares.

Pre-emptive Rights

Dutch law and our Articles generally give our shareholders pre-emptive rights to subscribe on a pro rata basis for any issue of new ordinary shares or grant of rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. Exceptions to these pre-emptive rights include: (i) the issue of ordinary shares and the grant of rights to subscribe for

 

79


Table of Contents

ordinary shares to our employees, (ii) the issue of ordinary shares and the grant of rights to subscribe for ordinary shares in return for non-cash consideration and (iii) the issue of ordinary shares to persons exercising a previously-granted right to subscribe for ordinary shares.

A shareholder has the legal right to exercise pre-emption rights for at least two weeks after the date of the announcement of the issue or grant. However, our general meeting of shareholders, or our Board if so designated by our general meeting of shareholders, may restrict or exclude pre-emptive rights. A resolution by our general meeting of shareholders to designate another corporate body, which can only be our Board, as the competent authority to exclude or restrict pre-emptive rights requires a proposal by our Board and approval by a majority of at least two-thirds of the valid votes cast at our general meeting of shareholders if less than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. A simple majority is sufficient if more than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. A resolution by our general meeting of shareholders to designate our Board as the competent authority to exclude or restrict pre-emptive rights must be for a fixed period not exceeding five years and is only possible if our Board is simultaneously designated as the corporate body authorized to issue ordinary shares. If not otherwise stated in the resolution approving designation, such designation is irrevocable. If our general meeting of shareholders has not designated our Board, our general meeting of shareholders itself is the corporate body authorized to restrict or exclude pre-emptive rights upon a proposal by our Board.

Our Board is designated as the corporate body authorized to limit or exclude pre-emptive rights, subject to the limited authority it has to issue ordinary shares and grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares as set out under “—Issue of Ordinary Shares” above, for a period of ending on January 28, 2016.

Reduction of Share Capital

Our general meeting of shareholders may, subject to Dutch law and our Articles and only upon a proposal of our Board, resolve to reduce our issued share capital by cancellation of ordinary shares or reduction of the nominal value of ordinary shares by amendment of our Articles. A resolution of our general meeting of shareholders to reduce the issued share capital must designate the ordinary shares to which the resolution applies and must make provisions for the implementation of such resolution. A resolution to cancel ordinary shares may only be adopted in relation to ordinary shares or depositary receipts for such shares we hold ourselves. A partial repayment or exemption from the obligation to pay up ordinary shares must be made pro rata, unless all of our shareholders agree otherwise. A resolution at our general meeting of shareholders to reduce our issued share capital requires a majority of at least two-thirds of the votes validly cast at a meeting at which less than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. A simple majority is sufficient if more than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented.

Acquisition of Ordinary Shares

We may acquire our own fully paid up ordinary shares at any time for no consideration, or, subject to certain provisions of Dutch law and our Articles, if (i) our shareholders’ equity minus the payment required to make the acquisition, does not fall below the sum of called-up and paid-up share capital and any statutory reserves we must maintain by Dutch law or our Articles, and (ii) we and our subsidiaries would thereafter not hold ordinary shares or rights of pledge over ordinary shares with an aggregate nominal value exceeding 50% of our issued and outstanding share capital.

Dutch law generally and more specifically, the Dutch Civil Code, imposes minimum capital and other reserve requirements on legal entities as a way of protecting shareholders and creditors and maintaining the capital of a company. Such minimum capital and reserve requirements include, among other things, complying with certain minimum capital requirements when declaring and paying dividends and repurchasing shares in its own capital, maintaining reserves on the granting of legitimate financial assistance loans by a public limited company and maintaining reserves on the re-evaluation of assets.

 

80


Table of Contents

An acquisition of ordinary shares for a consideration must be authorized by our general meeting of shareholders. Such authorization may be granted for a maximum period of 18 months and must specify the number of ordinary shares that may be acquired, the manner in which ordinary shares may be acquired and the price limits within which ordinary shares may be acquired. Authorization is not required for the acquisition of ordinary shares in order to transfer them to our employees. The actual acquisition may only be effected by a resolution of our Board.

Our shareholders authorized our Board to acquire ordinary shares up to a maximum of ten percent of the ordinary shares outstanding, whether through the stock exchange or by other means, at prices between an amount equal to the nominal value of the ordinary shares and an amount equal to 110% of the market prices of the ordinary shares on the New York Stock Exchange (the market price being the average of the closing price on each of the 30 consecutive days of trading preceding the three trading days prior to the date of acquisition) for a period ending on July 26, 2012.

Any ordinary shares held by us in our own capital may not be voted on or counted for quorum purposes.

Exchange Controls and Other Provisions Relating to Non-Dutch Shareholders

There are no Dutch exchange control restrictions on investments in, or payments on, the ordinary shares. There are no special restrictions in our Articles or Dutch law that limit the right of shareholders who are not citizens or residents of The Netherlands to hold or vote the ordinary shares.

Dividends and Distributions

We may only make distributions to our shareholders in so far as our equity exceeds the sum of our paid-in and called-up share capital plus the reserves we are required to maintain by Dutch law or our proposed Articles. Under our Articles, our Board may determine that a portion of the profits of the current financial year shall be added to our reserves. The remaining profits are at the disposal of our general meeting of shareholders.

We may only make distributions of dividends to our shareholders after the adoption of our statutory annual accounts from which it appears that such distributions are legally permitted. However, our Board may resolve to pay interim dividends on account of the profits of the current financial year if the equity requirement set out above is met, as evidenced by an interim statement of assets and liabilities relating to the condition of such assets and liabilities on a date no earlier than the first day of the third month preceding the month in which the resolution to distribute interim dividends is made public. Our general meeting of shareholders may resolve, upon a proposal to that effect by our Board, to pay distributions at the expense of any of our reserves.

Additionally, if we choose to declare dividends, the payment of cash dividends on our shares is restricted under the terms of the agreements governing our indebtedness.

Dividends and other distributions may be made in cash or, but only at all times with the approval of the Board, in ordinary shares. Dividends and other distributions are due and payable as from the date determined by the corporate body resolving on the distribution. Claims to dividends and other declared distributions lapse after five years from the date that such dividends or distributions became payable and any such amounts not collected within this period revert to us and are allocated to our general reserves.

General Meetings of Shareholders and Voting Rights

Our annual general meeting of shareholders must be held within six months after the end of each of our financial years. It must be held in The Netherlands in Amsterdam, Haarlemmermeer (Schiphol Airport) or Hoofddorp. Our financial year coincides with the calendar year. An extraordinary general meeting of shareholders may be convened whenever our Board or CEO deems such necessary. Shareholders

 

81


Table of Contents

representing at least 10% of our issued and outstanding share capital may, pursuant to Dutch law and our Articles, request that a general meeting of shareholders be convened, specifying the items for discussion. If our Board has not convened a general meeting of shareholders within four weeks of such request such that such meeting can be held within six weeks following such request, the shareholders requesting such meeting are authorized to call such meeting themselves with due observance of the relevant provisions of our Articles.

The notice convening any general meeting of shareholders must include an agenda indicating the items for discussion, or it must state that the shareholders and any holders of depositary receipts for ordinary shares may review such agenda at our main offices in The Netherlands. We will have the notice published by electronic means of communication which is directly and permanently accessible until the meeting and in such other manner as may be required to comply with any applicable rules of the New York Stock Exchange. The explanatory notes to the agenda must contain all facts and circumstances that are relevant for the proposals on the agenda. Such explanatory notes and the agenda will be placed on our website.

Shareholders holding at least 1% of our issued and outstanding share capital or ordinary shares representing a value of at least €50 million may submit agenda proposals for any general meeting of shareholders. Provided we receive such proposals no later than 60 days before the date of the general meeting of shareholders, and provided that such proposal does not, according to our Board, conflict with our vital interests, we will have the proposals included in the notice.

Each of the ordinary shares confers the right to cast one vote. Each shareholder entitled to participate in a general meeting of shareholders, either in person or through a written proxy, is entitled to attend and address the meeting and, to the extent that the voting rights accrue to him, to exercise his voting rights in accordance with our Articles. The voting rights attached to any ordinary shares, or ordinary shares for which depositary receipts have been issued, are suspended as long as they are held in treasury.

Our Board may allow shareholders to, in person or through a person holding a written proxy, participate in a general meeting of shareholders, including to take the floor and, to the extent applicable, to exercise voting rights, through an electronic means of communication. Our Board selects the means of electronic communication and may subject its use to conditions.

To the extent that our Articles or Dutch law do not require a qualified majority, all resolutions of our general meeting of shareholders shall be adopted by a simple majority of the votes cast.

The following resolutions of our general meeting of shareholders may only be adopted upon a proposal by our Board:

 

  (a) to effect a statutory merger ( juridische fusie ) or demerger ( juridische splitsing );

 

  (b) to issue ordinary shares or to restrict or exclude pre-emption rights on ordinary shares to the extent the authority to issue has not been delegated to our Board;

 

  (c) to designate our Board as the corporate body authorized to issue ordinary shares or rights to subscribe for ordinary shares and to restrict or to exclude the pre-emption rights on ordinary shares or rights to subscribe for ordinary shares;

 

  (d) to reduce our issued share capital;

 

  (e) to make a whole or partial distribution of reserves;

 

  (f) to amend our articles of association or change our corporate form; and

 

  (g) to dissolve us.

Amendment of our Articles of Association

Our general meeting of shareholders may resolve to amend our Articles upon a proposal made by our Board.

 

82


Table of Contents

Dissolution and Liquidation

Under our Articles, we may be dissolved by a resolution of our general meeting of shareholders upon a proposal of our Board.

In the event of dissolution, our business will be liquidated in accordance with Dutch law and our Articles and the liquidation shall be effected by our Board. During liquidation, the provisions of our Articles will remain in force to the extent possible. Any assets remaining upon completion of the dissolution will be distributed to the holders of ordinary shares in proportion to the aggregate nominal amount of their ordinary shares.

Disclosure of Information

Dutch law contains specific rules intended to prevent insider trading, tipping and market manipulation. We are subject to these rules and accordingly, we have adopted a code of securities dealings in relation to our securities.

Squeeze Out

If a shareholder, alone or together with group companies, (the “Controlling Entity”) holds a total of at least 95% of a company’s issued share capital by nominal value for its own account, Dutch law permits the Controlling Entity to acquire the remaining shares in the controlled entity (the “Controlled Entity”) by initiating proceedings against the holders of the remaining shares. The price to be paid for such shares will be determined by the Enterprise Chamber of the Amsterdam Court of Appeal (the “Enterprise Chamber”). A Controlling Entity that holds less than 95% of the shares in the Controlled Entity, but that in practice controls the Controlled Entity’s general meeting of shareholders, could attempt to obtain full ownership of the business of the Controlled Entity through a legal merger of the Controlled Entity with another company controlled by the Controlling Entity, by subscribing to additional shares in the Controlled Entity (for example, in exchange for a contribution of part of its own business), through another form of reorganization aimed at raising its interest to 95% or through other means.

In addition to the general squeeze-out procedure mentioned above, following a public offer a holder of at least 95% of the outstanding shares and voting rights has the right to require the minority shareholders to sell their shares to it. To the extent there are two or more types of shares the request can only be made with regard to the type of shares of which the shareholder holds at least 95% in aggregate representing at least 95% of the voting rights attached to those shares. Any request to require the minority shareholders to sell their shares must be filed with the Enterprise Chamber within three months after the end of the acceptance period of the public offer. Conversely, in such a case, each minority shareholder has the right to require the holder of at least 95% of the outstanding shares and voting rights to purchase its shares. The minority shareholders must file such claim with the Enterprise Chamber within three months after the end of the acceptance period of the public offer.

Reporting of Insider Transactions

Pursuant to the Dutch Financial Supervision Act, the Directors and any other person who has managerial responsibilities or who has the authority to make decisions affecting our future developments and business prospects or who has regular access to inside information relating, directly or indirectly, to us (each an “Insider”), must notify The Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets (“AFM”) of all transactions conducted for his own account relating to ordinary shares or securities the value of which is determined by the value of ordinary shares. The Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets must be notified within five days following the transaction date. Notification may be postponed until the date the value of the transactions amounts to €5,000 or more per calendar year.

In addition, persons designated by the Decree on Market Abuse pursuant to the Dutch Financial Supervision Act ( Besluit Marktmisbruik Wft ) (the “Market Abuse Decree”) who are closely associated with an Insider must notify The Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets of any transactions conducted

 

83


Table of Contents

for their own account relating to ordinary shares or securities the value of which is determined by the value of the ordinary shares. The Market Abuse Decree designates the following categories of persons: (i) the spouse or any partner considered by national law as equivalent to the spouse, (ii) dependent children, (iii) other relatives who have shared the same household for at least one year prior to the relevant transaction date, and (iv) any legal person, trust or partnership whose managerial responsibilities are discharged by, which is controlled by, which has been incorporated for the benefit of, or whose economic interests are the same as, a person referred to in the previous paragraph or under (i), (ii) or (iii) above.

The AFM keeps a public register of all notifications made pursuant to the Dutch Financial Supervision Act.

Pursuant to the rules against insider trading we have, among other things, further adopted rules governing the holding of, reporting and carrying out of transactions in our securities by the Directors or our employees. Further, we have drawn up a list of those persons working for us who could have access to inside information on a regular or incidental basis and have informed the persons concerned of the rules against insider trading and market manipulation including the sanctions which can be imposed in the event of a violation of those rules.

Non-compliance with the notification obligations under the market abuse obligations laid down in the Dutch Financial Supervision Act may lead to criminal fines, administrative fines, imprisonment or other sanctions.

Comparison of Dutch Corporate Law and U.S. Corporate Law

The following comparison between Dutch corporation law, which applies to us, and Delaware corporation law, the law under which many corporations in the United States are incorporated, discusses additional matters not otherwise described in this annual report.

Duties of directors

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law the board of directors is collectively responsible for the policy and day-to-day management of the Company. The non-executive directors will be assigned the task of supervising the executive directors and providing them with advice. Each director has a duty to the Company to properly perform the duties assigned to him. Furthermore, each board member has a duty to act in the corporate interest of the Company. Under Dutch law, the corporate interest extends to the interests of all corporate stakeholders, such as shareholders, creditors, employees, customers and suppliers. The duty to act in the corporate interest of the Company also applies in the event of a proposed sale or break-up of the Company, whereby the circumstances generally dictate how such duty is to be applied. Any board resolution regarding a significant change in the identity or character of the Company or its business requires shareholders’ approval.

Delaware

The board of directors of a Delaware corporation bears the ultimate responsibility for managing the business and affairs of a corporation. In discharging this function, directors of a Delaware corporation owe fiduciary duties of care and loyalty to the corporation and to its shareholders. Delaware courts have decided that the directors of a Delaware corporation are required to exercise an informed business judgment in the performance of their duties. An informed business judgment means that the directors have informed themselves of all material information reasonably available to them. Delaware courts have also imposed a heightened standard of conduct upon directors of a Delaware corporation who take any action designed to defeat a threatened change in control of the corporation. In addition, under Delaware law, when the board of directors of a Delaware corporation approves the sale or break-up of a corporation, the board of directors may, in certain circumstances, have a duty to obtain the highest value reasonably available to the shareholders.

 

84


Table of Contents

Director terms

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law a director of a listed company is generally appointed for a maximum term of four years. There is no limit to the number of terms a director may serve.

Delaware

The Delaware General Corporation Law generally provides for a one-year term for directors, but permits directorships to be divided into up to three staggered classes with up to three-year terms, with the terms for each class expiring in different years, if permitted by the certificate of incorporation, an initial bylaw or a bylaw adopted by the shareholders, with exceptions if the board is classified or if the company has cumulative voting.

Director vacancies

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law, new members of the board of directors of a company such as ours are appointed by the general meeting. Our Articles provide that our Board has nomination rights with respect to the appointment of a new member of our Board. If a nomination consists of a list of two or more candidates, it is binding and the appointment to the vacant seat concerned shall be from the persons placed on the binding list of candidates and shall be effected through election. Notwithstanding the foregoing, our general meeting of shareholders may, at all times, by a resolution passed with a two-thirds majority of the votes cast representing more than half of our issued and outstanding capital, resolve that such list of candidates shall not be binding.

Delaware

The Delaware General Corporation Law provides that vacancies and newly created directorships may be filled by a majority of the directors then in office (even though less than a quorum) unless (a) otherwise provided in the certificate of incorporation or by-laws of the corporation or (b) the certificate of incorporation directs that a particular class of stock is to elect such director, in which case any other directors elected by such class, or a sole remaining director elected by such class, will fill such vacancy.

Shareholder proposals

The Netherlands

Pursuant to our Articles, extraordinary shareholders’ meetings will be held as often as our Board or our CEO deems such necessary. Additionally, shareholders and/or persons with depository receipt holder rights representing in the aggregate at least one-tenth of the issued capital of the Company may request the Board to convene a general meeting, specifically stating the business to be discussed. If our Board has not given proper notice of a general meeting within four weeks following receipt of such request such that the meeting can be held within six weeks after receipt of the request, the applicants shall be authorized to convene a meeting themselves. Pursuant to Dutch law, one or more shareholders representing at least 10% of the issued share capital may request the Dutch Courts to order that a general meeting be held.

The agenda for a meeting of shareholders must contain such items as our Board or the person or persons convening the meeting decide, including the time and place of the shareholders’ meeting and the procedure for participating in the shareholders’ meeting by way of a written power of attorney. The agenda shall also include such other items as one or more shareholders, representing at least such part of the issued share capital as required by the laws of the Netherlands (currently, 1% of the issued share capital or shares representing a value of €50 million) may request by providing a substantiated written request or a proposal for a resolution to our Board at least 60 days before the date of the meeting.

 

85


Table of Contents

Delaware

Delaware law does not specifically grant shareholders the right to bring business before an annual or special meeting.

Shareholder suits

The Netherlands

In the event a third party is liable to a Dutch company, only the company itself can bring a civil action against that party. The individual shareholders do not have the right to bring an action on behalf of the company. Only in the event that the cause for the liability of a third party to the company also constitutes a tortious act directly against a shareholder does that shareholder have an individual right of action against such third party in its own name. The Dutch Civil Code provides for the possibility to initiate such actions collectively. A foundation or an association whose objective is to protect the rights of a group of persons having similar interests can institute a collective action. The collective action itself cannot result in an order for payment of monetary damages but may only result in a declaratory judgment ( verklaring voor recht ). In order to obtain compensation for damages, the foundation or association and the defendant may reach—often on the basis of such declaratory judgment—a settlement. A Dutch court may declare the settlement agreement binding upon all the injured parties with an opt-out choice for an individual injured party. An individual injured party may also itself institute a civil claim for damages.

Delaware

Under the Delaware General Corporation Law, a shareholder may bring a derivative action on behalf of the corporation to enforce the rights of the corporation. An individual also may commence a class action suit on behalf of himself and other similarly situated shareholders where the requirements for maintaining a class action under Delaware law have been met. A person may institute and maintain such a suit only if that person was a shareholder at the time of the transaction which is the subject of the suit. In addition, under Delaware case law, the plaintiff normally must be a shareholder not only at the time of the transaction that is the subject of the suit, but also throughout the duration of the derivative suit. Delaware law also requires that the derivative plaintiff make a demand on the directors of the corporation to assert the corporate claim and such demand has been refused before the suit may be prosecuted by the derivative plaintiff in court, unless such a demand would be futile.

Anti-takeover provisions

The Netherlands

Neither Dutch law nor our Articles specifically prevent business combinations with interested shareholders. Under Dutch law various protective measures are as such possible and admissible, within the boundaries set by Dutch case law and Dutch law.

Delaware

In addition to other aspects of Delaware law governing fiduciary duties of directors during a potential takeover, the Delaware General Corporation Law also contains a business combination statute that protects Delaware companies from hostile takeovers and from actions following the takeover by prohibiting some transactions once an acquirer has gained a significant holding in the corporation.

Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law prohibits “business combinations,” including mergers, sales and leases of assets, issuances of securities and similar transactions by a corporation or a subsidiary with an interested shareholder that beneficially owns 15% or more of a corporation’s voting stock, within three years after the person becomes an interested shareholder, unless:

 

   

the transaction that will cause the person to become an interested shareholder is approved by the board of directors of the target prior to the transactions;

 

86


Table of Contents
   

after the completion of the transaction in which the person becomes an interested shareholder, the interested shareholder holds at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation not including shares owned by persons who are directors and also officers of interested shareholders and shares owned by specified employee benefit plans; or

 

   

after the person becomes an interested shareholder, the business combination is approved by the board of directors of the corporation and holders of at least 66.67% of the outstanding voting stock, excluding shares held by the interested shareholder.

A Delaware corporation may elect not to be governed by Section 203 by a provision contained in the original certificate of incorporation of the corporation or an amendment to the original certificate of incorporation or to the bylaws of the Company, which amendment must be approved by a majority of the shares entitled to vote and may not be further amended by the board of directors of the corporation. Such an amendment is not effective until twelve months following its adoption.

Removal of directors

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law, the general meeting has the authority to suspend or remove members of the board of directors at any time. Under our Articles, a member of our Board may be suspended or removed by our general meeting of shareholders at any time by a resolution passed with a two-thirds majority of the votes cast representing more than half of the issued and outstanding capital. If permitted under the laws of the Netherlands, a member of our Board may also be suspended by our Board itself. Any suspension may not last longer than three months in the aggregate. If, at the end of that period, no decision has been taken on termination of the suspension, the suspension shall end. Currently, Dutch law does not allow directors to be suspended by the board of directors; however, Dutch law is expected to be amended to facilitate the suspension of directors by the board of directors.

Delaware

Under the Delaware General Corporation Law, any director or the entire board of directors may be removed, with or without cause, by the holders of a majority of the shares then entitled to vote at an election of directors, except (a) unless the certificate of incorporation provides otherwise, in the case of a corporation whose board is classified, shareholders may effect such removal only for cause, or (b) in the case of a corporation having cumulative voting, if less than the entire board is to be removed, no director may be removed without cause if the votes cast against his removal would be sufficient to elect him if then cumulatively voted at an election of the entire board of directors, or, if there are classes of directors, at an election of the class of directors of which he is a part.

Taxation

Certain U.S. Federal Income Tax Considerations

This section describes certain material United States federal income tax consequences of owning our ordinary shares. It applies to a US Holder (as defined below) that holds our ordinary shares as capital assets for tax purposes. This section does not apply to a US Holder that is a member of a special class of holders subject to special rules, such as:

 

   

a financial institution,

 

   

a dealer in securities,

 

   

a trader in securities that elects to use a mark-to-market method of accounting for its securities holdings,

 

   

a real estate investment trust;

 

87


Table of Contents
   

a regulated investment company;

 

   

U.S. expatriates;

 

   

persons who acquired shares pursuant to the exercise of any employee share option or otherwise as compensation;

 

   

a tax-exempt organization,

 

   

an insurance company,

 

   

a person liable for alternative minimum tax,

 

   

a person that actually or constructively owns 10% or more of our voting stock,

 

   

a person that owns shares through a partnership or other pass-through entity,

 

   

a person that holds shares as part of a straddle or a hedging or conversion transaction, or

 

   

a person whose functional currency is not the US dollar.

This section is based on the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations, published rulings and court decisions, all as currently in effect. These laws are subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis.

This section does not describe any tax consequences arising out of the tax laws of any state, local or non-U.S. jurisdiction, any estate or gift tax consequences or the recently effective Medicare tax on certain “net investment income.” If a partnership, including any entity or arrangement that is treated as a partnership for United States federal income tax purposes, is a beneficial owner of our ordinary shares, the treatment of a partner in the partnership will generally depend on the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. Partners in such partnerships should consult with their tax advisors.

For purposes of this discussion, a US Holder is a beneficial owner of our ordinary shares that is for United States federal income tax purposes:

 

   

a citizen or resident of the United States,

 

   

a US domestic corporation (or other entity taxable as a US domestic corporation for United States federal income tax purposes),

 

   

an estate the income of which is subject to United States federal income tax regardless of its source, or

 

   

a trust, if a United States court can exercise primary supervision over the trust’s administration and one or more United States persons are authorized to control all substantial decisions of the trust, or if the trust has a valid election in effect to be treated as a United States person.

US Holders should consult their own tax advisor regarding the United States federal, state and local and other tax consequences of owning and disposing of our ordinary shares in their particular circumstances.

Taxation of Dividends

Under the United States federal income tax laws, and subject to the passive foreign investment company, or PFIC, rules discussed below, US Holders will include in gross income the gross amount of any dividend paid by us out of our current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for United States federal income tax purposes). The dividend is ordinary income that the US Holder must include in income when the dividend is actually or constructively received. The dividend will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to United States corporations in respect of dividends received from other United States corporations. The amount of a dividend distribution paid in euros includible in the income of a US Holder will be the US dollar value of the euro payment made, determined at the spot

 

88


Table of Contents

euro/US dollar rate on the date the dividend distribution is includible in the income of the US Holder, regardless of whether the payment is in fact converted into US dollars. Generally, any gain or loss resulting from currency exchange fluctuations during the period from the date the dividend payment is includible in income to the date such payment is converted into US dollars will be treated as ordinary income or loss. Such gain or loss generally will be income or loss from sources within the United States for foreign tax credit limitation purposes. Distributions in excess of current and accumulated earnings and profits, as determined for United States federal income tax purposes, will be treated as a non-taxable return of capital to the extent of the US Holder’s basis in the shares and thereafter as capital gain. We currently do not, and we do not intend to, calculate our earnings and profits under United States federal income tax principles. Therefore, a US Holder should expect that a distribution will generally be reported as a dividend even if that distribution would otherwise be treated as a non-taxable return of capital or as capital gain under the rules described above.

With respect to non-corporate taxpayers, dividends may be taxed at the lower applicable capital gains rate provided that (1) either (a) our ordinary shares are readily tradable on an established securities market in the United States or (b) we are eligible for the benefits of the “Convention between the United States of America and the Kingdom of the Netherlands for the avoidance of double taxation and the prevention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on income,” (2) we are not a PFIC (as discussed below) for either our taxable year in which the dividend was paid or the preceding taxable year, and (3) certain holding period requirements are met. Common stock is considered for purposes of clause (1) above to be readily tradable on an established securities market if it is listed on the NYSE. US Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the availability of the lower rate for dividends paid with respect to our ordinary shares.

For foreign tax credit limitation purposes, the dividend will generally constitute foreign source income and will generally be “passive category income” but could, in the case of certain US Holders, constitute “general category income.” If the dividends are taxed as qualified dividend income (as discussed above), the amount of the dividend taken into account for purposes of calculating the foreign tax credit limitation will in general be limited to the gross amount of the dividend, multiplied by the reduced tax rate applicable to qualified dividend income and divided by the highest tax rate normally applicable to dividends.

If Dutch withholding taxes apply to any dividends paid to you with respect to our ordinary shares, the amount of the dividend would include withheld Dutch taxes and, subject to certain conditions and limitations, such Dutch withholding taxes may be eligible for credit against your U.S. federal income tax liability. The rules relating to the determination of the foreign tax credit are complex, and you should consult your tax advisors regarding the availability of a foreign tax credit in your particular circumstances, including the effects of any applicable income tax treaties.

Taxation of Capital Gains

Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, upon the sale or other disposition of our ordinary shares, a US Holder will generally recognize capital gain or loss for United States federal income tax purposes equal to the difference between the US Holder’s amount realized and the US Holder’s tax basis in such shares. If a US Holder receives consideration for shares paid in a currency other than US dollars, the US Holder’s amount realized will be the US dollar value of the payment received. In general, the US dollar value of such a payment will be determined on the date of sale or disposition. On the settlement date, a US Holder may recognize US source foreign currency gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) equal to the difference (if any) between the US dollar value of the amount received based on the exchange rates in effect on the date of sale or other disposition and the settlement date. However, if our ordinary shares are treated as traded on an established securities market and the US Holder is a cash basis taxpayer or an accrual basis taxpayer who has made a special election, the US dollar value of the amount realized in a foreign currency is determined by translating the amount received at the spot rate of exchange on the settlement date, and no exchange gain or loss would be recognized at that time. Capital gain of a non-corporate US Holder is generally taxed at a reduced rate where the property is held more than one year. The gain or loss will generally be income or loss from sources within the United States for foreign tax credit limitation purposes.

 

89


Table of Contents

PFIC Rules

We believe that our ordinary shares should not be treated as stock of a PFIC for United States federal income tax purposes for the taxable year that ended on December 31, 2012. However, the application of the PFIC rules is subject to uncertainty in several respects, and we cannot assure you that the United States Internal Revenue Service will not take a contrary position. In addition, PFIC status is a factual determination which cannot be made until the close of the taxable year. Accordingly, there is no guarantee that we will not be a PFIC for any future taxable year. Furthermore, because the total value of our assets for purposes of the asset test generally will be calculated using the market price of our ordinary shares, our PFIC status will depend in large part on the market price of our ordinary shares. Accordingly, fluctuations in the market price of our ordinary shares could render us a PFIC for any year. A non-U.S. corporation is considered a PFIC for any taxable year if either:

 

   

at least 75% of its gross income is passive income, or

 

   

at least 50% of the value of its assets (based on an average of the quarterly values of the assets during a taxable year) is attributable to assets that produce or are held for the production of passive income (the “asset test”).

In the PFIC determination, we will be treated as owning our proportionate share of the assets and earning our proportionate share of the income of any other corporation in which we own, directly or indirectly, 25% or more (by value) of the stock.

If we were to be treated as a PFIC for any year during a US Holder’s holding period, unless the US Holder elects to be taxed annually on a mark-to-market basis with respect to the shares (which election may be made only if our ordinary shares are “marketable stock” within the meaning of Section 1296 of the Code), the US Holder will be subject to special tax rules with respect to any “excess distribution” received and any gain realized from a sale or other disposition (including a pledge) of that holder’s shares. Distributions a US Holder receives in a taxable year that are greater than 125% of the average annual distributions received during the shorter of the three preceding taxable years or the holder’s holding period for the shares will be treated as excess distributions. Under these special tax rules:

 

   

the excess distribution or gain will be allocated ratably over the US Holder’s holding period for the shares;

 

   

the amount allocated to the current taxable year, and any taxable year prior to the first taxable year in which we are treated as a PFIC, will be treated as ordinary income; and

 

   

the amount allocated to each other year will be subject to tax at the highest tax rate in effect for that year and the interest charge generally applicable to underpayments of tax will be imposed on the resulting tax attributable to each such year.

The tax liability for amounts allocated to years prior to the year of disposition or “excess distribution” cannot be offset by any net operating losses for such years, and gains (but not losses) realized on the sale of the shares cannot be treated as capital, even if the shares are held as capital assets. If we were to be treated as a PFIC for any year during which a US Holder holds the shares, we generally would continue to be treated as a PFIC with respect to that US Holder for all succeeding years during which it owns our ordinary shares. If we were to cease to be treated as a PFIC, however, a US Holder may avoid some of the adverse effects of the PFIC regime by making a deemed sale election with respect to our ordinary shares.

If a US Holder holds shares in any year in which we are a PFIC, that US Holder will generally be required by the Code to file an information report with the Internal Revenue Service containing such information as the Internal Revenue Service may require.

 

90


Table of Contents

Information Reporting and Backup Withholding

Dividend payments with respect to our shares and proceeds from the sale, exchange or redemption of our ordinary shares may be subject to information reporting to the United States Internal Revenue Service and possible United States backup withholding. Backup withholding will not apply, however, to a US Holder that furnishes a correct taxpayer identification number and makes any other required certification or that is otherwise exempt from backup withholding. US Holders that are required to establish their exempt status generally must provide such certification on United States Internal Revenue Service Form W-9. US Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the application of the U.S. information reporting and backup withholding rules.

Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Amounts withheld as backup withholding may be credited against your United States federal income tax liability, and you may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules by filing the appropriate claim for refund with the United States Internal Revenue Service and furnishing any required information in a timely manner.

Information with respect to Foreign Financial Assets

U.S. individuals that own “specified foreign financial assets” with an aggregate value in excess of certain threshold amounts are generally required to file an information report with respect to such assets with their tax returns. “Specified foreign financial assets” include any financial accounts maintained by foreign financial institutions, as well as any of the following, but only if they are not held in accounts maintained by financial institutions: (i) stocks and securities issued by non-U.S. persons, (ii) financial instruments and contracts held for investment that have non-U.S. issuers or counterparties, and (iii)interests in foreign entities. Our shares may be subject to these rules. US Holders that are individuals should consult their tax advisers regarding the application of this requirement to their ownership of our shares.

Certain Dutch Tax Considerations

Introduction

This section describes the material Dutch tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of our ordinary shares as of the date hereof and is intended as general information only. The following summary does not purport to be a comprehensive description of all Dutch tax considerations that could be relevant for holders of the ordinary shares. This summary is intended as general information only. Each prospective holder should consult a professional tax adviser with respect to the tax consequences of an investment in the ordinary shares. This summary is based on Dutch tax legislation and published case law in force as of the date of this annual report. It does not take into account any developments or amendments thereof after that date, whether or not such developments or amendments have retroactive effect.

For the purpose of this section, “The Netherlands” shall mean the part of the Kingdom of the Netherlands in Europe.

Scope

Regardless of whether or not a holder of ordinary shares is, or is treated as being, a resident of The Netherlands, this summary does not address the Dutch tax consequences for such a holder:

 

  (a) having a substantial interest ( aanmerkelijk belang ) in our Company (such a substantial interest is generally present if an equity stake, profit stake of at least 5%, or a right to acquire such an equity/profit stake, is held, in each case by reference to our Company’s total issued share capital, or the issued capital of a certain class of shares);

 

  (b) who is a private individual and may be taxed for the purposes of Dutch income tax ( inkomstenbelasting ) as an entrepreneur ( ondernemer ) having an enterprise ( onderneming ) to which the ordinary shares are attributable, as one who earns income from miscellaneous activities ( resultaat uit overige werkzaamheden ), which include the performance of activities with respect to the ordinary shares that exceed regular, active portfolio management (normaal, actief vermogensbeheer ), or who may otherwise be taxed as one earning taxable income from work and home ( werk en woning ) with respect to benefits derived from the ordinary shares;

 

91


Table of Contents
  (c) which is a corporate entity, and for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax ( vennootschapsbelasting ) and Dutch dividend tax ( dividendbelasting ), has, or is deemed to have, a participation ( deelneming ) in our Company (such a participation is generally present in the case of an interest of at least 5% of our Company’s nominal paid-in capital); or

 

  (d) which is a corporate entity and an exempt investment institution ( vrijgestelde beleggingsinstelling ) or investment institution ( beleggingsinstelling ) for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax, a pension fund, or otherwise not a taxpayer or exempt for tax purposes.

Dividend tax

Withholding requirement

We are required to withhold 15% Dutch dividend tax in respect of proceeds from the ordinary shares, which include, but is not limited to:

 

  (a) proceeds in cash or in kind, including deemed and constructive proceeds;

 

  (b) liquidation proceeds, proceeds on redemption of the ordinary shares and, as a rule, the consideration for the repurchase of ordinary shares by our Company in excess of its average paid-in capital ( gestort kapitaal ) as recognized for Dutch dividend tax purposes, unless a particular statutory exemption applies;

 

  (c) the par value of the ordinary shares issued to a holder, or an increase in the par value of the ordinary shares, except when the (increase in the) par value of the ordinary shares is funded out of our paid-in capital as recognized for Dutch dividend tax purposes; and

 

  (d) partial repayments of paid-in capital, if and to the extent there are qualifying profits ( zuivere winst ), unless the general meeting of holders of shares has resolved in advance to make such repayment and provided that the nominal value of the ordinary shares concerned has been reduced by an equal amount by way of an amendment of the articles of association and the capital concerned is recognized as paid-in capital for Dutch dividend tax purposes.

Resident holders

If a holder of ordinary shares is, or is treated as being, a resident of The Netherlands, Dutch dividend tax which is withheld with respect to proceeds from the ordinary shares will generally be creditable for Dutch corporate income tax or Dutch income tax purposes if the holder is the beneficial owner ( uiteindelijk gerechtigde ) of the proceeds concerned. A resident corporate holder of ordinary shares may under certain conditions be entitled to an exemption from Dutch dividend withholding tax.

Non-resident holders

If a private individual holder of ordinary shares is, or is treated as being, a resident of a country other than The Netherlands, such holder is generally not entitled to claim full or partial relief at source, or a refund in whole or in part, of Dutch dividend tax with respect to proceeds from the ordinary shares. A non-resident corporate holder of ordinary shares may under certain conditions be entitled to an exemption from, reduction or refund of Dutch dividend withholding tax under the provisions of a treaty for the avoidance of double taxation between the Netherlands and its country of residence.

 

92


Table of Contents

Income tax

Resident holders

A holder who is a private individual and a resident, or treated as being, a resident of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch income tax and who does not have a substantial interest in our Company nor otherwise is taxed in relation to the ordinary shares as one earning taxable income from work and home, must record the ordinary shares as assets that are held in box 3. Taxable income with regard to the ordinary shares is then determined on the basis of a deemed return on income from savings and investments ( sparen en beleggen ), rather than on the basis of income actually received or gains actually realized. This deemed return is fixed at a rate of 4% of the holder’s yield basis ( rendementsgrondslag ) on January 1 of each year, insofar as the yield basis concerned exceeds a certain threshold. Such yield basis is determined as the fair market value of certain qualifying assets held by the holder of the ordinary shares, less the fair market value of certain qualifying liabilities. The fair market value of the ordinary shares will be included as an asset in the holder’s yield basis. The deemed return of 4% on the holder’s yield basis, being the fair market value of the ordinary shares, is taxed at a rate of 30% (insofar as the yield basis concerned exceeds a certain threshold).

Non-resident holders

A holder who is a private individual and neither a resident, nor treated as being a resident of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch income tax, will not be subject to such tax in respect of benefits derived from the ordinary shares.

Corporate income tax

Resident holders or holders having a Dutch permanent establishment

A holder which is a corporate entity and for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax a resident (or treated as being a resident) of The Netherlands, or a non-resident having (or treated as having) a permanent establishment in The Netherlands, is generally taxed in respect of benefits derived from the ordinary shares at rates of up to 25%.

Non-resident holders

A holder which is a corporate entity and for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax neither a resident, nor treated as being a resident, of The Netherlands, having no permanent establishment in The Netherlands (and is not treated as having such a permanent establishment), will generally not be subject to such tax in respect of benefits derived from the ordinary shares.

Gift and inheritance tax

Resident holders

Dutch gift tax or inheritance tax ( schenk- of erfbelasting ) will arise in respect of an acquisition (or deemed acquisition) of the ordinary shares by way of a gift by, or on the death of, a holder of ordinary shares who is a resident, or treated as being a resident, of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch gift and inheritance tax. A holder is so treated as being a resident of The Netherlands, if one having Dutch nationality has been a resident of The Netherlands during the ten years preceding the relevant gift or death. A holder is further so treated as being a resident of The Netherlands, if one has been a resident of The Netherlands at any time during the twelve months preceding the time of the relevant gift.

Non-resident holders

No Dutch gift tax or inheritance tax will arise in respect of an acquisition (or deemed acquisition) of the ordinary shares by way of a gift by, or on the death of, a holder of ordinary shares who is neither a resident, nor treated as being a resident, of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch gift and inheritance tax.

 

93


Table of Contents

Other taxes

No Dutch turnover tax ( omzetbelasting ) will arise in respect of any payment in consideration for the issue of the ordinary shares, with respect to a distribution of proceeds from the ordinary shares or with respect to a transfer of ordinary shares. Furthermore, no Dutch registration tax, capital tax, transfer tax or stamp duty (nor any other similar tax or duty) will be payable in connection with the issue or acquisition of the ordinary shares.

 

94


Table of Contents

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Interest Rate Risk

Under our Revolving Credit Facility, interest is based on a floating rate index. The interest expense on the remainder of our outstanding indebtedness is based on a fixed rate, except for the mortgage on the AMS 6 leasehold property. The mortgage is subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin of 275 basis points. We have determined that the impact of a near-term 10% appreciation or depreciation of EURIBOR would not have a significant effect on our financial position, results of operations, or cash flows.

Foreign Exchange Rate Risk

Our reporting currency for purposes of our financial statements is the euro. However, we also incur revenue and operating costs in non-euro denominated currencies, such as British pounds, Swiss francs, Danish kroner and Swedish krona. We recognize foreign currency gains or losses arising from our operations in the period incurred. As a result, currency fluctuations between the euro and the non-euro currencies in which we do business will cause us to incur foreign currency translation gains and losses. We cannot predict the effects of exchange rate fluctuations upon our future operating results because of the number of currencies involved, the variability of currency exposure and the potential volatility of currency exchange rates. We have determined that the impact of a near-term 10% appreciation or depreciation of non-euro denominated currencies relative to the euro would not have a significant effect on our financial position, results of operations, or cash flows.

We do not maintain any derivative instruments to mitigate the exposure to translation and transaction risk. Our foreign exchange transaction gains and losses are included in our results of operations and were not material for all periods presented. We do not currently engage in foreign exchange hedging transactions to manage the risk of our foreign currency exposure.

Commodity Price Risk

We are a significant user of electricity and have exposure to increases in electricity prices. In recent years, we have seen significant increases in electricity prices. We use independent consultants to monitor price changes in electricity and negotiate fixed-price term agreements with the power supply companies where possible.

Approximately 60% of our customers by revenue pay for electricity on a metered basis while the remainder of our customers pay for power “plugs.” While we are contractually able to recover power cost increases from our customers, some portion of the increased costs may not be recovered. In addition, some portion of the increased costs may be recovered in a delayed fashion based on commercial reasons at the discretion of local management.

 

95


Table of Contents

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

Not applicable.

 

96


Table of Contents

PART II

ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

Not applicable.

 

97


Table of Contents

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS

AND USE OF PROCEEDS

Not applicable.

 

98


Table of Contents

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

Conclusion Regarding the Effectiveness of Disclosure Controls and Procedures

Under the supervision and with the participation of the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and Chief Financial Officer (CFO), the effectiveness of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934) have been evaluated as of December 31, 2012. Based upon the evaluation, the CEO and CFO, concluded that as of December 31, 2012, the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective and designed to provide reasonable assurance that the information required to be disclosed by us in the reports that we file or submit under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms and to ensure that information required to be disclosed in the reports that we file or submit under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is accumulated and communicated to our management, including the CEO and CFO, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.

Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934) and for the assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. Internal control over financial reporting includes maintaining records, that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect our transactions; providing reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary for preparation of our financial statements; providing reasonable assurance that receipts and expenditures of Company assets are made in accordance with management authorization; and providing reasonable assurance that unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of Company assets that could have material effect on our financial statements would be prevented or detected on a timely basis. The Company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of the consolidated financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting is not intended to provide absolute assurance that a misstatement of our financial statements would be prevented or detected.

In connection with the preparation of the Company’s annual consolidated financial statements, management has undertaken an assessment of the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (the COSO Framework).

Based on this assessment, management concluded that the Company’s internal control over financial reporting was effective as of December 31, 2012.

Our consolidated financial statements have been audited by KPMG Accountants N.V., an independent registered public accounting firm, which has issued an attestation report on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting included elsewhere in this annual report on Form 20-F.

 

99


Table of Contents

Changes in Controls and Procedures

Enhancements have been made during the period. There were no changes that occurred during the period covered by this report that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

100


Table of Contents

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

The Board of Directors has determined that Cees van Luijk is the audit committee financial expert as defined by the SEC and meets the applicable independence requirements of the SEC and the NYSE.

 

101


Table of Contents

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

Our board of directors has adopted a code of ethics on January 21, 2013, which applies to our principal executive officer, principal financial officer, principal accounting officers, controllers and employees. The code is posted on our website at www.interxion.com.

 

102


Table of Contents

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

KPMG Accountants N.V. has served as the Company’s principal accountant for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010. Set forth below are the fees for audit and other services rendered by KPMG Accountants N.V. or other KPMG network for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011.

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Audit fees

     758         578   

Audit-related fees

     277         251   

Tax fees

     —           6   

All other fees

     —           0   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     1,035         835   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Audit fees include fees billed for audit services rendered for the Company’s annual consolidated financial statements filed with regulatory organizations.

Tax fees include fees billed for tax compliance.

All other fees consist of fees for all other services not included in any of the other categories noted above.

All of the above fees were pre-approved by the Audit Committee.

Audit Committee’s Policies and Procedures

In accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission rules regarding auditor independence, the Audit Committee has established Policies and Procedures for Audit and Non-Audit Services Provided by an Independent Auditor. The rules apply to the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries engaging any accounting firms for audit services and the auditor who audits the accounts filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the external auditor, for permissible non-audit services.

When engaging the external auditor for permissible non-audit services (audit-related services, tax services, and all other services), pre-approval is obtained prior to the commencement of the services.

 

103


Table of Contents

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

Not applicable.

 

104


Table of Contents

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

None.

 

105


Table of Contents

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

Not applicable.

 

106


Table of Contents

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Many of the corporate governance rules in the NYSE Manual do not apply to the Company as a “foreign private issuer”; however, Rule 303A.11 requires foreign private issuers to describe significant differences between their corporate governance standards and the corporate governance standards applicable to U.S. companies listed on the NYSE. While the Company’s management believes that its corporate governance practices are similar in many respects to those of U.S. NYSE-listed companies and provide investors with protections that are comparable in many respects to those established by the NYSE Manual, there are certain key differences which are described below.

Nominating Committee

Under Section 303A.04 of the NYSE Manual, a domestic listed company must have a nominating/corporate governance committee composed entirely of independent directors. The Company’s Nominating Committee does not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

Compensation Committee

Under Section 303A.05 of the NYSE Manual, a domestic listed company must have a compensation committee composed entirely of independent directors. The Company’s Compensation Committee does not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

Internal Audit Function

Under Section 303A.07 of the NYSE Manual, a domestic listed company must have an internal audit function. In 2012, a formal internal audit function was not in place. The Board has discussed the implementation of a formal internal audit function and envisions implementing a formal internal audit function.

 

107


Table of Contents

PART III

ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The Company has responded to Item 18 in lieu of responding to this item.

 

108


Table of Contents

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Reference is made to pages F-1 through F-55, which are incorporated herein by reference.

 

109


Table of Contents

ITEM 19: EXHIBITS

The following instruments and documents are included as Exhibits to this annual report.

 

Exhibit
Number
  Description of Document
  1.1‡   Articles of Association of InterXion Holding N.V., as amended, dated as of January 20, 2012.
  1.2‡   Bylaws of InterXion Holding N.V. dated as of January 23, 2012.
  2.1*   Indenture dated as of February 12, 2010 among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Nederland B.V., InterXion HeadQuarters B.V., InterXion Carrier Hotel (UK) Ltd, InterXion Deutschland GmbH, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, The Bank of New York Mellon (Luxembourg) S.A. and Barclays Bank PLC.
  2.2*   Intercreditor Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch and others named therein dated February 12, 2010
  2.3*

  2.4.*

 

Additional Intercreditor Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch and others named therein dated November 11, 2010.

Senior Multicurrency Revolving Facility Agreement dated as of February 1, 2010 among InterXion Holding N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, Citigroup Global Markets Limited, ABN AMRO Bank N.V. (as successor to Fortis Bank (Nederland) N.V.), Merrill Lynch International, Credit Suisse AG, London Branch and Jefferies Finance LLC.

  2.5*   Amendment Letter to the Senior Multicurrency Revolving Facility Agreement dated November 3, 2010 between InterXion Holding N.V. and Barclays Bank PLC
  2.6*
 

Form of Registration Rights Agreement.

  4.1*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Österreich GmbH and S-Invest Beteiligungsgesellschaft mbH dated January 1, 2000 as amended by the Supplement to the Floridsdorf Technology Park Lease dated November 13, 2007.
  4.2*†   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Belgium N.V. and First Cross Roads dated June 25, 2001.
  4.3*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion HeadQuarters B.V. and Keops A/S dated May 1, 2000.
  4.4*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion France Sarl and SCI 43 Rue du Landy dated June 29, 2007 as amended by the Amendment to the Lease Agreement dated October 26, 2007.
  4.5*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion France Sarl and SCI 43 Rue du Landy dated April 28, 2006.
  4.6*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Holding B.V. and GiP Gewerbe im Park GmbH dated January 29, 1999 as amended by Supplement No. 15 to the Lease Agreement dated November 30, 2009.
  4.7*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion France Sarl and ICADE dated December 23, 2008.

 

110


Table of Contents
  4.8*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Nederland B.V. and VastNed Industrial B.V. dated November 4, 2005.
  4.9*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Nederland B.V. and VA No. 1 (Point of Logistics) B.V. dated May 14, 2007.
  4.10*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Carrier Hotel S.L. and Naves y Urbanas Andalucia S.A. dated March 20, 2000 as amended by the Annex to the Lease Agreement dated March 15, 2006.
  4.11*†   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited and Eliahou Zeloof, Amira Zeloof, Ofer Zeloof and Oren Zeloof dated February 23, 2000.
  4.12*   InterXion Holding N.V. Fifth Amended and Restated Shareholders Agreement dated December 24, 2009.
  4.13*   Deed of Pledge of Shares among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Operational B.V. and Barclays Bank PLC dated June 15, 2010.
  4.14*†   Lease/Loan Agreement between Alpine Finanz Immobilien AG, InterXion (Schweiz) AG and InterXion Holding N.V. dated March 13, 2009.
  4.15‡   Directors Remuneration Policy of InterXion Holding N.V. dated January 20, 2012.
  4.16§   InterXion Holding N.V. 2011 International Stock Option and Incentive Master Award Plan dated May 31, 2011.
  4.17§   InterXion Holding N.V. 2008 International Stock Option and Incentive Master Award Plan dated May 31, 2011.
  4.18*   Shareholders Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., Chianna Investment N.V., Lamont Finance N.V. and Baker Communications Fund II, L.P.
  4.19††   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited and Amira Zeloof, Ofer Zeloof and Oren Zeloof dated November 1, 2011.
  4.20††   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion France Sas and Corpet Louvet Sas dated January 3, 2011.
  4.21††   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion España, S.A.U and Chainco Investments Company, S.L. dated October 10, 2011.
  4.22 ¨   Employment Agreement Managing Director InterXion Holding N.V.
  4.23†   Lease Agreement among InterXion España, S.A.U. and Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A. dated February 27, 2012.
  4.24†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Holding B.V. and GiP Gewerbe im Park GmbH dated January 29, 1999 as amended by Supplement No. 17 to the Lease Agreement dated September 1, 2011.
12.1   Certification of Chief Executive Officer
12.2   Certification of Chief Financial Officer
13.1   Certification of Chief Executive Officer
13.2   Certification of Chief Financial Officer
15.1   Consent of KPMG Accountants N.V.

 

111


Table of Contents

 

Notes:

* Previously filed as an exhibit to the InterXion Holding N.V.’s Registration Statement on Form F-1 (File No. 333-171662) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference to such Registration Statement.
Confidential treatment has been received for certain portions which are omitted in the copy of the exhibit filed with the SEC. The omitted information has been filed separately with the SEC pursuant to an application for confidential treatment.
†† The omitted information has been filed separately with the SEC pursuant to an application for confidential treatment.
Previously filed as an exhibit on Form 6-K (File No. 001-35053) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference.
§ Previously filed as an exhibit to the InterXion Holding N.V.’s Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File No. 119-28329) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference to such Registration Statement.
¨ Previously filed as an exhibit on Form 20-F (File No. 001-35053) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference.

 

112


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

  INTERXION HOLDING N.V.
 

/s/ David C. Ruberg

  Name:   David C. Ruberg
  Title:   Chief Executive Officer
  Date:   April 26 , 2013

 

113


Table of Contents

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Audited financial statements of InterXion Holding N.V. as of and for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010

 

Independent Auditor’s Report

     F-2   

Consolidated Income Statements

     F-4   

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income

     F-4   

Consolidated Statements of Financial Position

     F-5   

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity

     F-6   

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

     F-8   

Notes to the 2012 Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-9   

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To: The Board of Directors and Shareholders of InterXion Holding N.V.

We have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial position of InterXion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in shareholders’ equity and cash flows for the years then ended. We also have audited InterXion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries’ internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). InterXion Holding N.V.’s management is responsible for these consolidated financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements and an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the consolidated financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of InterXion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the years then ended, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. Also in our opinion, InterXion Holding N.V. maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

/s/ KPMG Accountants N.V.

Rotterdam, The Netherlands

April 26, 2013

 

F-2


Table of Contents

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

F-3


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

 

            For the year ended December 31,  
     Note      2012     2011     2010  
            (€’000)  

Revenue

     5,6         277,121        244,310        208,379   

Cost of sales

     5,7         (113,082     (101,766     (91,154
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

        164,039        142,544        117,225   

Other income

     5         463        487        425   

Sales and marketing costs

     5,7         (20,100     (17,680     (15,072

General and administrative costs

     5,7,10,11         (79,243     (67,258     (55,892
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     5         65,159        58,093        46,686   

Finance income

     8         907        2,290        582   

Finance expense

     8         (18,653     (25,074     (30,026
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

        47,413        35,309        17,242   

Income tax (expense) / income

     9         (15,782     (9,737     (2,560
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

        31,631        25,572        14,682   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Earnings per share attributable to shareholders post 5:1 reverse stock split at January 28, 2011:

         

Basic earnings per share: (€)

     16         0.47        0.40        0.33   

Diluted earnings per share: (€)

     16         0.46        0.39        0.31   

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

     For the year ended December 31,  
     2012     2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     31,631        25,572         14,682   

Foreign currency translation differences

     2,588        2,253         4,520   

Total other comprehensive income

     2,588        2,253         4,520   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Tax

     (571     200         —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total other comprehensive income, net of tax

     2,017        2,453         4,520   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income

     33,648        28,025         19,202   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-4


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

 

            As at December 31,  
       Note      2012     2011     2010  
            (€’000)  

Non-current assets

         

Property, plant and equipment

     10         620,931        477,798        342,420   

Intangible assets

     11         18,638        12,542        6,005   

Deferred tax assets

     9         30,376        39,557        39,841   

Financial asset

     12         774        —          —     

Other non-current assets

     13         4,959        3,841        3,709   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        675,678        533,738        391,975   

Current assets

         

Trade and other current assets

     13         74,854        67,874        55,672   

Cash and cash equivalents

     14         68,692        142,669        99,115   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        143,546        210,543        154,787   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

        819,224        744,281        546,762   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Shareholders’ equity

         

Share capital

     15         6,818        6,613        4,434   

Share premium

     15         477,326        466,166        321,078   

Foreign currency translation reserve

     15         9,403        7,386        4,933   

Accumulated deficit

     15         (117,973     (149,604     (175,176
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        375,574        330,561        155,269   

Non-current liabilities

         

Trade payables and other liabilities

     17         11,194        10,294        7,795   

Deferred tax liability

     9         2,414        1,742        660   

Provision for onerous lease contracts

     18         7,848        10,618        13,260   

Borrowings

     19         288,085        257,267        257,403   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        309,541        279,921        279,118   

Current liabilities

         

Trade payables and other liabilities

     17         127,778        127,639        106,038   

Tax liabilities

        2,301        2,249        868   

Provision for onerous lease contracts

     18         3,978        3,108        3,073   

Borrowings

     19         52        803        2,396   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        134,109        133,799        112,375   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities

        443,650        413,720        391,493   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

        819,224        744,281        546,762   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-5


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

 

     Note      Share
capital
     Share
premium
    Foreign
currency
translation
reserve
     Accumulated
deficit
    Total
equity
 
            (€’000)  

Balance at January 1, 2012

        6,613         466,166        7,386         (149,604     330,561   

Profit for the period

        —           —          —           31,631        31,631   

Total other comprehensive income, net of tax

        —           —          2,017         —          2,017   

Total comprehensive income, net of tax

        —           —          2,017         31,631        33,648   

Exercise of options

        205         7,750        —           —          7,955   

Share-based payments

     21         —           3,410        —           —          3,410   

Total contribution by and distributions to owners of the Company

        205         11,160        —           —          11,365   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2012

        6,818         477,326        9,403         (117,973     375,574   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at January 1, 2011

        4,434         321,078        4,933         (175,176     155,269   

Profit for the period

        —           —          —           25,572        25,572   

Total other comprehensive income, net of tax

        —           —          2,453         —          2,453   

Total comprehensive income, net of tax

        —           —          2,453         25,572        28,025   

IPO proceeds

        1,625         142,487        —           —          144,112   

Conversion of Preferred Shares

        337         (337     —           —          —     

Liquidation price paid to Preferred Shareholders

        —           (3,055     —           —          (3,055

Exercise of options

        217         3,257        —           —          3,474   

Share-based payments

     21         —           2,736        —           —          2,736   

Total contribution by and distributions to owners of the Company

        2,179         145,088        —           —          147,267   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2011

        6,613         466,166        7,386         (149,604     330,561   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-6


Table of Contents

Balance at January 1, 2010

        4,434         319,388         413         (189,858     134,377   

Profit for the period

        —           —           —           14,682        14,682   

Total other comprehensive income, net of tax

        —           —           4,520         —          4,520   

Total comprehensive income

        —           —           4,520         14,682        19,202   

Exercise of options

        —           6         —           —          6   

Share-based payments

     21         —           1,684         —           —          1,684   

Total contribution by and distributions to owners of the Company

        —           1,690         —           —          1,690   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2010

        4,434         321,078         4,933         (175,176     155,269   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

As no minority shareholders in group equity exist, the group equity is entirely attributable to the parent’s shareholders.

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-7


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

 

            For the years ended 31 December  
     Note      2012     2011     2010  
            (€’000)  

Profit for the year

        31,631        25,572        14,682   

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     10,11         43,993        35,552        31,108   

IPO transaction costs

     5                   1,725        —     

Provision for onerous lease contracts

     18         (2,328     (3,125     (3,157

Share-based payments

     21         5,488        2,736        1,684   

Net finance expense

     8         17,746        22,784        29,444   

Income tax expense

     9         15,782        9,737        2,560   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        112,312        94,981        76,321   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Movements in trade and other current assets

        (7,154     (16,942     511   

Movements in trade and other liabilities

        6,543        12,009        8,476   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash generated from operations

        111,701        90,048        85,308   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest and fees paid

        (18,081     (24,472     (9,980

Interest received

        1,007        2,251        390   

Income tax paid

        (5,545     (3,784     (1,339
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash flows from operating activities

        89,082        64,043        74,379   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flow from investing activities

         

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

        (172,036     (154,559     (98,171

Disposal of property, plant and equipment

                  945        230   

Purchase of intangible assets

        (6,295     (7,397     (2,223

Acquisition of financial asset

        (774     —          —     
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash flows used in investing activities

        (179,105     (161,011     (100,164
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flow from financing activities

         

Proceeds from exercised options

        7,956        3,474        6   

Proceeds from issuance new shares at IPO

        —          142,952        —     

Repayment of ‘Liquidation Price’ to former Preferred Shareholders

        —          (3,055     —     

Proceeds/(repayment) bank facilities

        —          —          (159,046

Proceeds from mortgage loan

        9,890        —          —     

Proceeds from Senior Secured Notes and RCF

        (1,159     (645     254,276   

Repayment of other Borrowings

        (804     (2,396     (2,488
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash flows from financing activities

        15,883        140,330        92,748   

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash

        163        192        149   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net movement in cash and cash equivalents

        (73,977     43,554        67,112   

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

        142,669        99,115        32,003   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of year

     14         68,692        142,669        99,115   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-8


Table of Contents

NOTES TO THE 2012 CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

1 The Company

Interxion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) is domiciled in The Netherlands. The address of the Company’s registered office is Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands. The consolidated financial statements of the Company for the year ended December 31, 2012 comprise the Company and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the “Group”). The Group is a leading pan-European operator of carrier-neutral Internet data centers.

The financial statements were approved and authorized for issue by the Board of Directors on April 26, 2013. The financial statements are subject to adoption by the General Meeting of Shareholders.

 

2 Basis of preparation

Statement of compliance

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) effective as at December 31, 2012 as issued by the Internal Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”).

Basis of measurement

The Group prepared its consolidated financial statements on a going-concern basis and under the historical cost convention except for certain financial instruments which have been measured at fair value.

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently by the Group entities and to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements.

Use of estimates and judgments

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ from these estimates. Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimates are revised and in any future periods affected.

In particular, information about significant areas of estimation uncertainty and critical judgments in applying accounting policies that have the most significant effect on amounts recognized in the financial statements are discussed below:

Property, plant and equipment depreciation (also see Note 10) — Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are also reviewed for impairment where there has been a triggering event by assessing the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on the Group’s best estimates of future prices, output and costs, and is therefore subjective.

Intangible fixed assets amortization (also see Note 11) — Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of intangible fixed assets are also reviewed for impairment where there has been a triggering event by assessing the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on the Group’s best estimates of future prices, output and costs, and is therefore subjective.

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Lease accounting (also see Note 22) — At inception or modification of an arrangement, the Group determines whether such an arrangement is or contains a lease. Classification of a lease contract (operating versus a finance lease) is based on the extent to which risks and rewards incidental to ownership of a leased asset lie with the lessor or the lessee. The classification of lease contracts includes the use of judgments and estimates.

Provision for onerous lease contracts (also see Note 18) — A provision is made for the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the leases. Where unused sites have been sublet or partly sublet, management has taken account of the contracted sublease income expected to be received over the minimum sublease term, which meets the Group’s revenue recognition criteria in arriving at the amount of future losses.

Costs of site restoration (also see Note 24) — Liabilities in respect of obligations to restore premises to their original condition are estimated at the commencement of the lease and reviewed yearly based on rent period, contracted extension possibilities and possibilities of lease terminations.

Deferred taxation (also see Note 9) — Provision is made for deferred taxation at the rates of tax prevailing at the period-end dates unless future rates have been substantively enacted. Deferred tax assets are recognized where it is probable that they will be recovered based on estimates of future taxable profits for each tax jurisdiction. The actual profitability may be different depending upon local financial performance in each tax jurisdiction.

Share-based payments (also see Note 21) — the Group issues equity-settled share-based payments to certain employees under the terms of the long-term incentive plans. The charges related to equity-settled share-based payments, options to purchase ordinary shares, are measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value at the grant date is determined using the Black Scholes model and is expensed over the vesting period. The value of the expense is dependent upon certain assumptions including the expected future volatility of the Group’s share price at the date of grant.

Functional and presentation currency

These consolidated financial statements are presented in euro, which is the Company’s functional and presentation currency. All information presented in euro has been rounded to the nearest thousand, except when stated otherwise.

 

3 Significant accounting policies

Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and all entities in which a direct or indirect controlling interest exists. Subsidiaries are entities that are directly or indirectly controlled by the Company. Control exists when the Company has the power to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities.

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently by all subsidiaries to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements.

Loss of control

On the loss of control, the Company derecognizes the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary, any non-controlling interests and the other components of equity related to the subsidiary. Any surplus or deficit arising on the loss of control is recognized in profit or loss.

Transactions eliminated on consolidation

Intercompany balances and transactions, and any unrealized income and expenses arising from intercompany transactions, are eliminated in preparing the consolidated financial statements.

 

F-10


Table of Contents

Subsidiaries

With the exception of Stichting Administratiekantoor Management Interxion, all of the subsidiary undertakings of the Group as set out below are wholly owned. Stichting Administratiekantoor is part of the consolidation based on the groups controlling influence.

 

 

Interxion HeadQuarters B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

 

 

Interxion Nederland B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

 

 

Interxion Trademarks B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

 

 

Interxion Österreich GmbH, Vienna, Austria;

 

 

Interxion Belgium N.V., Brussels, Belgium;

 

 

Interxion Denmark ApS, Copenhagen, Denmark;

 

 

Interxion France SAS, Paris, France;

 

 

Interxion Real Estate II SARL, Paris, France;

 

 

Interxion Real Estate III SARL, Paris, France;

 

 

Interxion Deutschland GmbH, Frankfurt, Germany;

 

 

Interxion Ireland Ltd, Dublin, Ireland;

 

 

Interxion Telecom SRL, Milan, Italy;

 

 

Interxion España SAU, Madrid, Spain;

 

 

Interxion Sverige AB, Stockholm, Sweden;

 

 

Interxion (Schweiz) AG, Zurich, Switzerland;

 

 

Interxion Carrier Hotel Ltd., London, United Kingdom;

 

 

Interxion Europe Ltd., London, United Kingdom;

 

 

Interxion Real Estate Holding B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

 

 

Interxion Real Estate I B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

 

 

Interxion Real Estate IV B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

 

 

Interxion Operational B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

 

 

Interxion Datacenters B.V., The Hague, the Netherlands (formerly Centennium Detachering B.V.);

 

 

Interxion Consultancy Services B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands (dormant);

 

 

Interxion Telecom B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands (dormant);

 

 

Interxion Trading B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands (dormant);

 

 

Interxion B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands (dormant);

 

 

Interxion Telecom Ltd., London, United Kingdom (dormant);

 

 

Stichting Administratiekantoor Management Interxion, Amsterdam, the Netherlands.

Foreign currency

Foreign currency transactions

The individual financial statements of each Group entity are presented in the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (its functional currency). For the purpose of the consolidated financial statements, the results and the financial position of each entity are expressed in euros, which is the functional currency of the Company and the presentation currency for the consolidated financial statements.

 

F-11


Table of Contents

In preparing the financial statements of the individual entities, transactions in foreign currencies other than the entity’s functional currency are recorded at the rates of exchange prevailing at the dates of the transactions. At each balance sheet date, monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at the rates prevailing at the balance sheet date. Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are not retranslated. The income and expenses of foreign operations are translated to euros at average exchange rates.

Foreign operations

For the purpose of presenting consolidated financial statements, the assets and liabilities of the Group’s foreign operations are expressed in euros using exchange rates prevailing at the balance sheet date. Income and expense items are translated at average exchange rates for the period. Exchange differences arising, if any, on net investments including receivables from or payables to a foreign operation for which settlement is neither planned nor likely to occur, are recognized directly in the foreign currency translation reserve (FCTR) within equity. When control over a foreign operation is lost, in part or in full, the relevant amount in the FCTR is transferred to profit or loss.

Borrowing costs

Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of qualifying assets, which are assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to get ready for their intended use or sale, are added to the cost of those assets, until such time as the assets are substantially ready for their intended use or sale. All other borrowing costs are recognized in profit or loss in the period in which they are incurred.

Statement of cash flows

The consolidated statement of cash flows is prepared using the indirect method. The cash flow statement distinguishes between operating, investing and financing activities.

Cash flows in foreign currencies are converted at the exchange rate at the dates of the transactions. Currency exchange differences on cash held are separately shown. Payments and receipts of corporate income taxes and interest paid are included as cash flow from operating activities.

Financial instruments

Derivative financial instruments

The Group may enter into derivative financial instruments (interest rate swaps) to manage its exposure to interest risk. Derivatives are initially recognized at fair value at the date the derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently re-measured to their fair value at the end of each reporting period. The fair value of interest rate swaps is based on broker quotes. Those quotes are tested for reasonableness by discounting estimated future cash flows based on the terms and maturity of each contract and using market interest rates for a similar instrument at the measurement date.

The resulting gain or loss is recognized in profit or loss immediately.

Non-derivative financial instruments

Non-derivative financial instruments comprise trade and other receivables, cash and cash equivalents, loans and borrowings, and trade and other payables.

Non-derivative financial instruments are recognized initially at fair value, net of any directly attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, non-derivative financial instruments are measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method, less any impairment losses.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

The Group derecognizes a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the asset expire, or it transfers the right to receive the contractual cash flows in a transaction in which substantially all the risk and rewards of ownership of the financial asset are transferred. Any interest in such transferred financial assets that is created or retained by the Group is recognized as a separate asset or liability.

Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when, and only when, the Group has a legal right to offset the amounts and intends either to settle on a net basis or to realize the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

Financial assets are designated as at fair value through profit and loss if the Group manages such investments and makes purchase and sale decisions based on their fair value in accordance with the Group’s risk management or investment strategy. Attributable transactions costs are recognized in profit and loss as incurred. Financial assets at fair value through profit and loss are measured at fair value and changes therein, which takes into account any dividend income, are recognized in profit and loss.

The fair values of investments in equity are determined with reference to their quoted closing bid price at the measurement date or, if unquoted, determined using a valuation technique.

Trade receivables and other current assets

Trade receivables and other current assets are recognized initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment.

A provision for impairment of trade receivables and other current assets is established when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original term of the receivables. Significant financial difficulties of the debtor, probability that the debtor will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganization, and default or delinquency in payments are considered indicators that the trade receivable is impaired.

The amount of the provision is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is recognized in the income statement.

When a trade receivable and other current asset is uncollectable, it is written off against the allowance account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited in the income statement.

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents includes cash in hand, deposits held at call with banks and other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less. Cash and cash equivalents, including short-term investments, are valued at face value, which equals its fair value.

Share capital

Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of ordinary shares and share options are recognized as a deduction from equity, net of any tax effects.

Preference share capital, no longer applicable since the IPO in January 2011, is classified as equity if it is non-redeemable and any dividends are discretionary. Dividends thereon are recognized as distributions within equity upon approval by the Group’s shareholders.

Trade payables and other current liabilities

Trade payables and other current liabilities are recognized initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses.

Cost includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of the asset and comprises purchase cost, together with the incidental costs of installation and commissioning. These costs include external consultancy fees, capitalized borrowing costs, rent and associated costs attributable to bringing the assets to a working condition for their intended used and internal employment costs which are directly and exclusively related to the underlying asset. Where it is probable that the underlying property lease will not be renewed, the cost of self-constructed assets includes the estimated costs of dismantling and removing the items and restoring the site on which they are located.

When parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, they are accounted for as separate items (major components) of property, plant and equipment.

Gains and losses on disposal of an item of property, plant and equipment are determined by comparing the proceeds from disposal with the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment and are recognized within income.

The cost of replacing part of an item of property, plant and equipment is recognized in the carrying amount of the item if it is probable that the future economic benefits embodied within the part will flow to the Group and its cost can be measured reliably. The carrying amount of the replaced part is derecognized. The costs of the day-to-day servicing of property, plant and equipment are recognized in profit or loss as incurred.

Depreciation is calculated from the date an asset becomes available for use and is depreciated on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of each part of an item of property, plant and equipment. Leased assets are depreciated on the same basis as owned assets over the shorter of the lease term and their useful lives. The principal periods used for this purpose are:

 

Freehold land

   Not depreciated

Data center buildings and equipment

   10–30 years

Office buildings

   10–15 years

Office equipment

   3–5 years

Depreciation methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually.

Data center buildings and equipment consists of buildings, leasehold improvements and equipment or infrastructure for advanced environmental controls such as ventilation and air conditioning, specialized heating, fire detection and suppression equipment and monitoring equipment. Office buildings consist of office buildings, office leasehold improvements and office equipment which consists of furniture, computer equipment and software.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets represent power grid rights, software and other intangible assets, and are recognized at cost less accumulated amortization and accumulated impairment losses. Other intangible assets principally consist of lease premiums (paid in addition to obtain rental contracts).

Software includes development expenditure, which is capitalized only if development costs can be measured reliably, the product or process is technically and commercially feasible, future economic benefits are probable, and the Group intends to and has sufficient resources to complete development and to use the asset. The expenditure capitalized includes the cost of material, services and direct labor costs that are directly attributable to preparing the asset for its intended use.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Amortization is calculated on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the intangible asset. Amortization methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually.

The estimated useful lives are:

 

Power grid rights

   10–15 years

Software

   3–5 years

Other

   3–12 years

Impairment of non-financial assets

The carrying amounts of the Group’s non-financial assets, other than deferred tax assets, are reviewed at each reporting date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, then the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated. For intangible assets that are not yet available for use, the recoverable amount is estimated at each reporting date.

The recoverable amount of an asset or cash-generating unit is the greater of either its value in use or its fair value less costs to sell. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. For the purpose of impairment testing, assets are grouped together into the smallest group of assets that generates cash inflows from continuing use that are largely independent of the cash inflows of other assets or groups of assets (the “cash-generating unit”).

Considering the Company manages its data centers per country, and the financial performance of data centers within a country is highly inter-dependent given the data center campus structures, the Company has determined that the cash-generating unit for impairment testing purposes should be the group of data centers per country, unless specific circumstances would indicate that a single data center is a cash-generating unit.

An impairment loss is recognized if the carrying amount of an asset or its cash-generating unit exceeds its estimated recoverable amount. Impairment losses are recognized in the income statement. Impairment losses recognized in respect of cash-generating units are to reduce the carrying amount of the assets in the unit (group of units) on a pro-rata basis.

Impairment losses recognized in prior periods are assessed at each reporting date for any indications that the loss has decreased or no longer exists. An impairment loss is reversed if there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount. An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or amortization, if no impairment loss had been recognized.

Borrowings

Borrowings are recognized initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently stated at amortized costs; with any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value recognized in the income statement over the period of the Borrowings using the effective interest method.

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 12 months after the balance sheet date. The Group derecognizes a borrowing when its contractual obligations are discharged, cancelled or expired.

Provisions

A provision is recognized in the statement of financial position when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event; it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be estimated reliably. Provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and, where appropriate, the risks specific to the liability. The discount amount arising on the provision is amortized in future years through interest.

 

F-15


Table of Contents

A provision for site restoration is recognized when costs for restoring leasehold premises to their original condition at the end of the lease need to be made and the likelihood of this liability is estimated to be probable. The discounted cost of the liability is included in the related assets and is depreciated over the remaining estimated term of the lease. If the likelihood of this liability is estimated to be possible, rather than probable, it is disclosed as a contingent liability in Note 24.

A provision for onerous lease contracts is recognized when the expected benefits to be derived by the Group from a contract are lower than the unavoidable cost of meeting its obligations under the contract. The provision is measured at the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the leases. Where unused sites have been sublet or partly sublet, management has taken account of the contracted sublease income expected to be received over the minimum sublease term, which meets the Group’s revenue recognition criteria in arriving at the amount of future losses. Before a provision is established, the Group recognizes any impairment loss on the assets associated with that contract.

Leases

Leases, where the Group assumes substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, are classified as finance leases. Upon initial recognition, the leased asset is measured at an amount equal to the lower of either its fair value or the present value of the minimum lease payments. Subsequent to initial recognition, the asset is accounted for in accordance with the accounting policy applicable to that asset.

Other leases are operating leases and the leased assets are not recognized on the Group’s statement of financial position. Payments made under operating leases are recognized in the income statement, or capitalized during construction, on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Lease incentives received are recognized as an integral part of the total lease expense, over the term of the lease.

Minimum finance lease payments are apportioned between the finance charge and the reduction of the outstanding liability. The finance charge is allocated to each period during the lease term so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability.

At inception or modification of an arrangement, the Group determines whether such an arrangement is or contains a lease. This will be the case if the following two criteria are met:

 

   

The fulfillment of the arrangement is dependent on the use of a specific asset or assets; and

 

   

The arrangement contains the right to use an asset(s).

At inception or on reassessment of the arrangement, the Group separates payments and other consideration required by such an arrangement into those for the lease and those for other elements on the basis of their relative fair values.

Segment reporting

The segments are reported in a manner consistent with internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision-maker, identified as the Board of Directors. There are two segments: the first segment being France, Germany, the Netherlands and the United Kingdom and the second segment being Rest of Europe , which comprises Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Ireland, Spain, Sweden and Switzerland. Shared expenses such as corporate management, general and administrative expenses, loans and borrowings and related expenses and income tax assets and liabilities are stated in Corporate and other .

Segment results, assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. Unallocated items presented as Corporate and other principally comprise loans and Borrowings and related expenses; corporate assets and expenses (primarily the Company’s headquarters); and income tax assets and liabilities.

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Segment capital expenditure is defined as the net cash outflows during the period to acquire property, plant and equipment, and intangible assets other than goodwill.

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA, as well as recurring revenue, are additional indicators of our operating performance, and are not required by or presented in accordance with, IFRS. EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from sub-leases on unused data center sites. We present EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €60 million Revolving Credit Facility and €260 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. However, other companies may present EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA differently. EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS.

This information, provided to the chief operating decision-maker, is disclosed to permit a more complete analysis of our operating performance. Exceptional items are those significant items that are separately disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence to enable a full understanding of the Group’s financial performance.

Revenue recognition

Revenues are recognized when it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to the Group and that these benefits, together with their related costs, can be measured reliably. Revenues are measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable taking into account any discounts or volume rebates.

The Group reviews transactions for separately identifiable components and if necessary applies individual recognition treatment, revenues are allocated to separately identifiable components based on their relative fair values.

The Group earns colocation revenue as a result of providing data center services to customers at its data centers. Colocation revenues and lease income are recognized in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the term of the customer contract. Incentives granted are recognized as an integral part of the total income, over the term of the customer contract. Incentives granted are recognized as an integral part of the total income, over the term of the customer contract. Customers are usually invoiced quarterly in advance and income is recognized on a straight-line basis over the quarter. Initial setup fees payable at the beginning of customer contracts are deferred at inception and recognized in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the initial term of the customer contract. Power revenues are recognized based on customers’ usage.

Other services revenue including managed services, connectivity and customer installation services including equipment sales are recognized when the services are rendered. Certain installation services and equipment sales, which by its nature have a non-recurring character, are presented as non-recurring revenues and are recognized upon delivery of service.

Deferred revenues relating to invoicing in advance and initial setup fees are carried on the statement of financial position as part of trade payables and other liabilities. Deferred revenues due to be recognized after more than one year are held in non-current liabilities.

Cost of sales

The cost of sales consists mainly of rental costs for the data centers and offices, power costs, maintenance costs relating to the data center equipment, operation and support personnel costs and costs related to installations and other customer requirements. In general, maintenance and repairs are expensed as incurred. In cases where maintenance contracts are in place, the costs are recorded on a straight-line basis over the contractual period.

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Sales and marketing costs

The operating expenses related to sales and marketing consist of costs for personnel (including sales commissions), marketing and other costs directly related to the sales process. Costs of advertising and promotion are expensed as incurred.

General and administrative costs

General and administrative costs are expensed as incurred.

Employee benefits

Defined contribution pension plans

A defined contribution pension plan is a post-employment plan under which an entity pays fixed contributions into a separate entity and has no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to defined contribution plans are recognized as an employee benefit expense in the income statement in the periods during which the related services are rendered by employees. Prepaid contributions are recognized as an asset to the extent that a cash refund or a reduction in future payments is available. Contributions to a defined contribution plan that are due more than 12 months after the end of the period in which the employees render the service are discounted to their present value.

Termination benefits

Termination benefits are recognized as an expense when the Group is demonstrably committed, without realistic possibility of withdrawal, to a formal detailed plan to either terminate employment before the normal retirement date, or to provide termination benefits as a result of an offer made to encourage voluntary redundancy. Termination benefits for voluntary redundancy are recognized as an expense if the Group has made an offer of voluntary redundancy, it is probable that the offer will be accepted, and the number of acceptances can be estimated reliably. If benefits are payable more than 12 months after the reporting date, then they are discounted to their present value.

Share-based payments

The share option programme allows Group employees to acquire shares (and before the IPO share certificates) of the Group. The fair value at the date of grant to employees of share options, as determined using the Black Scholes model, is recognized as an employee expense, with a corresponding increase in equity, over the period that the employees become unconditionally entitled to the options. The amount recognized as an expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of share options that vest.

Finance income and expense

Finance expense comprises interest payable on borrowings calculated using the effective interest rate method, fair value losses on financial assets at fair value through profit and loss and foreign exchange gains and losses. Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of data center assets, which are assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to get ready for their intended use, are added to the costs of those assets, until such time as the assets are ready for their intended use.

Interest income is recognized in the income statement as it accrues, using the effective interest method. The interest expense component of finance lease payments is recognized in the income statement using the effective interest rate method.

Foreign currency gains and losses are reported on a net basis, as either finance income or expenses, depending on whether the foreign currency movements are in a net gain or a net loss position.

 

F-18


Table of Contents

Income tax

Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Income tax is recognized in the income statement except to the extent that it relates to items recognized directly in equity, in which case it is recognized in equity.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantially enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is recognized using the balance sheet liability method, providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not provided for: the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit, and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that they will probably not reverse in the foreseeable future. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realization or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date that are expected to be applied to temporary differences when they reverse or loss carry forwards when they are utilized.

A deferred tax asset is also recognized for unused tax losses and tax credits. A deferred tax asset is recognized only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can be utilized. Deferred tax assets are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will be realized.

Additional income taxes that arise from the distribution of dividends are recognized at the same time as the liability to pay the related dividend.

In determining the amount of current and deferred tax the Company takes into account the impact of uncertain tax positions and whether additional taxes and interest may be due. The Company believes that its accruals for tax liabilities are adequate for all open tax years based on its assessment of many factors, including interpretations of tax law and prior experience. This assessment relies on estimates and assumptions and may involve a series of judgments about future events. New information may become available that causes the Company to change its judgment regarding the adequacy of existing tax liabilities; such changes to tax liabilities will impact tax expense in the period that such a determination is made.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax liabilities and assets, and they relate to taxes levied by the same tax authority on the same taxable entity, or on different tax entities, but they intend to settle current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis of their tax assets and liabilities will be realized simultaneously.

Earnings per share

The Group presents basic and diluted earnings per share (EPS) data for its ordinary shares. Before the IPO, ordinary shares shared on an equal basis in profits with preference shares. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the profit or loss attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders of the Company by the weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares outstanding during the year. Diluted EPS is determined by adjusting the profit or loss attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders and the weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares outstanding for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares, which comprise the share options granted.

New standards and interpretations not yet adopted

A number of new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations are not yet effective for the year ended December 31, 2012 and have not been applied in preparing these consolidated financial statements. Those which may be relevant to the group are set out below.

 

 

IFRS 9, “Financial Instruments”

 

 

IFRS 10, “Consolidated Financial Statements”

 

F-19


Table of Contents
 

IFRS 11, “Joint Arrangements”

 

 

IFRS 12, “Disclosures of Interests in Other Entities”

 

 

IFRS 13, “Fair Value Measurement”

 

 

Revision to IFRIC 14, IAS 19, “The Limit on a Defined Benefit Assets, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction”

The Group has not opted for earlier adoption. Following an internal review, it is not anticipated that the adoption of these new but not yet effective standards and interpretations will have a material financial impact on the financial statements in the period of initial application and subsequent reporting, except for IFRS 9 “Financial Instruments” which becomes mandatory for the Groups 2014’s consolidated financial statements and could change the classification and measurement of financial assets.

 

4 Financial risk management

Overview

The Group has exposure to the following risks from its use of financial instruments:

 

 

Credit risk

 

 

Liquidity risk

 

 

Market risk

 

 

Other price risks

This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to each of the above risks, the Group’s goals, policies and processes for measuring and managing risk, and the Group’s management of capital. Further quantitative disclosures are included throughout these consolidated financial statements.

The Board of Directors has overall responsibility for the oversight of the Group’s risk management framework.

The Group continues developing and evaluating the Group’s risk management policies with a view to identifying and analyzing the risks faced by the Group, to setting appropriate risk limits and controls, and to monitoring risks and adherence to limits. Risk management policies and systems are reviewed regularly to reflect changes in market conditions and the Group’s activities. The Group, through its training and management standards and procedures, aims to develop a disciplined and constructive control environment in which all employees understand their roles and obligations.

The Board of Directors oversees how management monitors compliance with the Group’s risk management policies and procedures and reviews the adequacy of the risk management framework in relation to the risks faced by the Group.

Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer, bank or other counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual obligations. This risk principally arises from the Group’s receivables from customers. The Group’s most significant customer, serviced from multiple locations under multiple service contracts, accounts for less than 5% of the recurring revenues for 2012, 2011 and 2010.

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Trade and other receivables

The Group’s exposure to credit risk is influenced mainly by the individual characteristics of each customer. The demographics of the Group’s customer base, including the default risk of the industry and the country in which customers operate, has less of an influence on credit risk.

The Group has an established credit policy under which each new customer is analyzed individually for creditworthiness before they commence trading with the Group. If customers are independently rated, these ratings are used. Otherwise, if there is no independent rating, the credit quality of the customer is analyzed taking into account its financial position, past experience and other factors.

The Group’s standard terms require contracted services to be paid in advance of these services being delivered. In the event that a customer fails to pay amounts that are due, the Group has a clearly defined escalation policy that can result in a customer’s access to their equipment being denied or service to the customer being suspended.

In 2012, 94% (2011: 93% and 2010: 93%) of the Group’s revenues were derived from contracts under which customers pay an agreed contracted amount including power on a regular basis (usually monthly or quarterly) or from deferred initial setup fees paid at the outset of the customer contract.

As a result of the Group’s credit policy and the contracted nature of the revenues, losses have occurred infrequently (see Note 20). The Group establishes an allowance that represents its estimate of potential incurred losses in respect of trade and other receivables. This allowance is entirely composed of a specific loss component relating to individually significant exposures.

Bank counterparties

The Group has certain obligations under the terms of its revolving loan agreement and Senior Secured Notes which limit disposal with surplus cash balances. Term risk is limited to short-term deposits. The Group monitors its cash position, including counterparty and term risk, daily.

Guarantees

Certain of our subsidiaries have granted guarantees to our lending banks in relation to our facilities. The Company grants rent guarantees to landlords of certain of the Group’s property leases (see Note 24).

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s approach to managing liquidity is to ensure, as far as possible, that it will always have sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities when due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to the Group’s reputation or jeopardizing its future.

The majority of the Group’s revenues and operating costs are contracted, which assists it in monitoring cash flow requirements, which are monitored on a daily and weekly basis. Typically the Group ensures that it has sufficient cash on demand to meet expected normal operational expenses for a period of 60 days, including the servicing of financial obligations; this excludes the potential impact of extreme circumstances that cannot reasonably be predicted, such as natural disasters.

All significant capital expansion projects are subject to formal approval by the Board of Directors, and material expenditure or customer commitments are only made once the management is satisfied that the Group has adequate committed funding to cover the anticipated expenditure (refer to Note 22).

The Group listed €260 million 9.5% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. The notes are listed on the Luxembourg Stock Exchange’s Euro MTF Market. Interest on the Senior Secured Notes is payable at the rate of 9.5%, which falls due on February 12, and August 12 of each year.

 

F-21


Table of Contents

In 2012, the Group has renewed its secured €60 million multicurrency Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”) that is fully undrawn as at December 31, 2012. As at December 31, 2012, on the Revolving Credit Facility the interest payable on EUR amounts drawn would be at the rate of EURIBOR plus 325 basis points and for GBP amounts drawn the interest payable would be LIBOR plus 325 basis points.

The Revolving Credit Facility Agreement contains two financial maintenance covenants: an interest coverage covenant and a leverage covenant. The interest coverage covenant requires the Company to maintain a minimum ratio of Adjusted EBITDA (as defined in the Revolving Credit Facility Agreement) to finance charges. The leverage covenant requires the Company not to exceed a ratio of consolidated total debt to pro-forma EBITDA (as defined in the Revolving Facility Agreement). In addition, the Company must ensure that the guarantors represent a certain percentage of Adjusted EBITDA of the Company as a whole and a certain percentage of the consolidated net assets of the Company as a whole.

The breach of any of these covenants by the Company or the failure by the Company to maintain its leverage or interest coverage ratios could result in a default under the Revolving Facility Agreement. The group regularly analyses the Company’s performance to the covenants and actively monitors the available headroom to the covenants. As of December 31, 2012, the Company was in compliance with all covenants in the Revolving Facility Agreement. In addition, the Company does not anticipate any such breach or failure and believes that its ability to borrow funds under the Revolving Facility Agreement will not be adversely affected by the covenants.

On November 5, 2012, the Company secured a 5-year mortgage bank loan of €10 million. The loan is subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin of 275 basis points. Interest is due quarterly in arrears. No covenants apply to this loan next to the repayment schedule.

Refer to Borrowing section for more details (Note 19).

Market risk

Currency risk

The Group is exposed to currency risk on sales, purchases and Borrowings that are denominated in a currency other than the respective functional currencies of Group entities, primarily the euro, but also pounds sterling (GBP), Swiss francs (CHF), Danish kroner (DKK) and Swedish kronor (SEK). The currencies in which these transactions are primarily denominated are EUR, GBP, CHF, DKK and SEK.

Historically, the revenues and operating costs of each of the Group’s entities have provided an economic hedge against foreign currency exposure and have not required foreign currency hedging.

It is anticipated that a number of capital expansion projects will be funded in a currency that is not the functional currency of the entity in which the associated expenditure will be incurred. In the event that this occurs and is material to the Group, the Group will seek to implement an appropriate hedging strategy.

The majority of the Group’s Borrowings are euro denominated and the Company believes that the Interest on these Borrowings will be serviced from the cash flows generated by the underlying operations of the Group whose functional currency is the euro. The Group’s investments in subsidiaries are not hedged.

Interest rate risk

Following the issuance of 9.5% Senior Secured Notes in 2010 and the repayment of the old bank facilities, the Group was no longer exposed to significant variable interest rate expense for Borrowings.

On November 5, 2012, the Company secured a 5-year mortgage of €10 million. The loan is subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin of 275 basis points per annum. Interest is due quarterly in arrears.

As at December 31, 2012, on the Revolving Credit Facility the interest payable on EUR amounts drawn would be at the rate of EURIBOR plus 325 basis points and for GBP amounts drawn the interest payable would be LIBOR plus 325 basis points. The Revolving Credit Facility was fully undrawn as at December 31, 2012.

 

F-22


Table of Contents

As at December 31, 2012, the interest rate risk is very limited.

Other risks

Price risk

There is a risk that changes in market circumstances, such as strong unanticipated increases in operational costs, construction costs of new data centers or churn in customer contracts will churn, will negatively affect the Group’s income. Customers individually have medium-term contracts that require notice prior to termination. The objective of market risk management is to manage and control market risk exposures within acceptable parameters, while optimizing the return.

The Group is a significant user of power and has exposure to increases in power prices. The Group uses independent consultants to monitor price changes in electricity and seeks to negotiate fixed-price term agreements with the power supply companies, not more than for own use, where possible. The risk to the Group is mitigated by the contracted ability to recover power price increases through adjustments in the pricing for power services.

Capital management

The Group has a capital base comprising its equity, including reserves, Senior Secured Notes, mortgage loan, finance leases and committed debt facilities. The Group monitors its solvency ratio, financial leverage, funds from operations and net debt with reference to multiples of the Group’s last twelve months Adjusted EBITDA levels. The Company’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base and access to capital in order to sustain the future development of the business and maintain shareholders, creditors and customers confidence.

The principal use of capital in the development of the business is through capital expansion projects for the deployment of further equipped space in new and existing data centers. Major capital expansion projects are not started unless the Company has access to adequate capital resources at the start of the project to complete the project, and they are evaluated against target internal rates of return before approval. Capital expansion projects are continually monitored both before and after completion.

There were no changes in the Group’s approach to capital management during the year.

 

5 Information by segment

Operating segments are to be identified on the basis of internal reports about components of the Group that are regularly reviewed by the chief operating decision-maker in order to allocate resources to the segments and to assess their performance. Management monitors the operating results of its business units separately for the purpose of making decisions about performance assessments.

The performance of the operating segments is primarily based on the measures of revenue, EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA. Other information provided, except as noted below, to the Board of Directors is measured in a manner consistent with that in the financial statements.

 

F-23


Table of Contents

Information by segment, 2012

 

     FR, DE, NL
and UK
    Rest of
Europe
    Subtotal     Corporate
and other
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Recurring revenue

     159,136        100,113        259,249        —          259,249   

Non-recurring revenue

     12,640        5,232        17,872        —          17,872   

Total revenue

     171,776        105,345        277,121        —          277,121   

Cost of sales

     (66,367     (40,559     (106,926     (6,156     (113,082
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit/(loss)

     105,409        64,786        170,195        (6,156     164,039   

Other income

     463        —          463        —          463   

Sales and marketing costs

     (6,039     (4,259     (10,298     (9,802     (20,100

General and administrative costs

     (36,497     (21,558     (58,055     (21,188     (79,243
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

     63,336        38,969        102,305        (37,146     65,159   

Net finance expense

             (17,746
          

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

             47,413   
          

 

 

 

Total Assets

     546,842        197,802        744,644        74,580        819,224   

Total Liabilities

     139,576        48,183        187,759        255,891        443,650   

Capital expenditures, including intangible assets*

     (145,080     (29,014     (174,094     (4,237     (178,331

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (25,686     (15,691     (41,377     (2,616     (43,993

Adjusted EBITDA

     90,121        55,068        145,189        (30,174     115,015   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-24


Table of Contents

Information by segment, 2011

 

     FR, DE, NL
and UK
    Rest of
Europe
    Subtotal     Corporate
and other
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Recurring revenue

     136,460        91,868        228,328        —          228,328   

Non-recurring revenue

     10,352        5,630        15,982        —          15,982   

Total revenue

     146,812        97,498        244,310                  244,310   

Cost of sales

     (58,969     (37,685     (96,654     (5,112     (101,766
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit/(loss)

     87,843        59,813        147,656        (5,112     142,544   

Other income

     487        —          487        —          487   

Sales and marketing costs

     (4,730     (3,876     (8,606     (9,074     (17,680

General and administrative costs

     (30,014     (17,956     (47,970     (19,288     (67,258
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

     53,586        37,981        91,567        (33,474     58,093   

Net finance expense

             (22,784
          

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

             35,309   
          

 

 

 

Total Assets

     412,160        181,186        593,346        150,935        744,281   

Total Liabilities

     97,779        40,774        138,553        275,167        413,720   

Capital expenditures, including intangible assets*

     (122,880     (35,366     (158,246     (3,710     (161,956

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (21,289     (12,371     (33,660     (1,892     (35,552

Adjusted EBITDA

     74,774        50,676        125,450        (27,813     97,637   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-25


Table of Contents

Information by segment, 2010

 

     FR, DE, NL
and UK
    Rest of
Europe
    Subtotal     Corporate
and other
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Recurring revenue

     114,689        78,284        192,973        —          192,973   

Non-recurring revenues

     9,161        6,245        15,406        —          15,406   

Total revenue

     123,850        84,529        208,379                  208,379   

Cost of sales

     (52,861     (33,513     (86,374     (4,780     (91,154
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit/(loss)

     70,989        51,016        122,005        (4,780     117,225   

Other income

     425        —          425        —          425   

Sales and marketing costs

     (4,859     (3,357     (8,216     (6,856     (15,072

General and administrative costs

     (27,297     (15,854     (43,151     (12,741     (55,892
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

     39,258        31,805        71,063        (24,377     46,686   

Net finance expense

             (29,444
          

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

             17,242   
          

 

 

 

Total assets

     279,735        150,026        429,761        117,001        546,762   

Total liabilities

     81,339        35,335        116,674        274,819        391,493   

Capital expenditures, including intangible assets*

     (59,419     (35,709     (95,128     (5,266     (100,394

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (18,659     (10,972     (29,631     (1,477     (31,108

Adjusted EBITDA

     58,060        43,010        101,070        (21,867     79,203   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

 

* Capital expenditures, including intangible assets, represent payments to acquire property, plant and equipment and intangible assets, as recorded in the consolidated statement of cash flows as “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” and “Purchase of intangible assets” respectively. In 2011, this definition was amended to include paid intangible assets in comparison to 2010. The comparative 2010 figures have been adjusted to reflect this change.

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Reconciliation Adjusted EBITDA

Consolidated

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Operating profit

     65,159        58,093        46,686   

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     43,993        35,552        31,108   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (1)

     109,152        93,645        77,794   

Share-based payments

     5,488        2,736        1,684   

Increase/(decrease) in provision of onerous lease contracts (2)

     838        18        150   

IPO transaction costs

     —          1,725        —     

Income from sub-lease of unused data center sites

     (463     (487     (425
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     115,015        97,637        79,203   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

France, Germany, Netherlands and UK

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Operating profit

     63,336        53,586        39,258   

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     25,686        21,289        18,659   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (1)

     89,022        74,875        57,917   

Share-based payments

     724        368        418   

Increase/(decrease) in provision onerous lease contracts (2)

     838        18        150   

Income from sub-lease of unused data center sites

     (463     (487     (425
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     90,121        74,774        58,060   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:—

 

(1) Operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets.
(2) Before deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Rest of Europe

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Operating profit

     38,969         37,981         31,805   

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     15,691         12,371         10,972   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

EBITDA (1)

     54,660         50,352         42,777   

Share-based payments

     408         324         233   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     55,068         50,676         43,010   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Corporate and other

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Operating profit

     (37,146     (33,474     (24,377

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     2,616        1,892        1,477   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (1)

     (34,530     (31,582     (22,900

Share-based payments

     4,356        2,044        1,033   

IPO transaction costs

     —          1,725        —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     (30,174     (27,813     (21,867
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:—

 

(1) Operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets.

In 2012, the share-based payments include an amount of €2,078,000 related to taxes and social security charges.

In 2011, the IPO transaction costs represent the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.

 

6 Revenues

Revenues consist of colocation revenue derived from the rendering of data center services, which includes customer installation services and equipment sales.

 

F-28


Table of Contents
7 Employee benefit expenses

The Group employed on average 385 employees (full-time equivalents) during 2012 (2011: 347 and 2010: 321). Costs incurred in respect of these employees were:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Salaries, commissions and bonuses

     30,229         26,540         24,588   

Social security charges

     5,295         4,364         4,037   

Contributions to defined contribution pension plans

     1,776         1,487         1,437   

Other personnel-related costs

     5,233         6,155         6,176   

Share-based payments

     5,488         2,736         1,684   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     48,021         41,282         37,922   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The following income statement line items include employee benefit expenses of:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Costs of sales

     16,634         15,147         14,419   

Sales and marketing costs

     12,300         11,352         9,848   

General and administrative costs

     19,087         14,783         13,655   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     48,021         41,282         37,922   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group operates a defined contribution scheme for most of its employees. The contributions are made in accordance with the scheme and are expensed in the income statement as incurred.

In 2012, the Dutch Government imposed a crisis wage tax payable by employers. The total charge in 2012, included in General and administrative costs, amounts to €1,854,000.

 

8 Finance income and expense

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Bank and other interest

     907        2,271        582   

Net foreign currency exchange gain

     —          19        —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Finance income

     907        2,290        582   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest expense on Senior Secured Notes, bank and other loans

     (16,680     (23,302     (18,155

Interest expense on finance leases

     (61     (57     (92

Interest expense on provision for onerous lease contracts

     (428     (518     (578

Other financial expenses

     (1,221     (1,197     (11,102

Net foreign currency exchanges loss

     (263     —          (99
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Finance expense

     (18,653     (25,074     (30,026
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net finance expense

     (17,746     (22,784     (29,444
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The “Interest expense on provision for onerous lease contracts” relates to the unwinding of the discount rate used to calculate the “Provision for onerous lease contracts”.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

Other financial expenses in 2010 principally consisted of €10.2 million costs related to the repayment of the Company’s bank Borrowings and termination of the hedge contracts of which €3.5 million was non-cash.

 

9 Income taxes

Income tax benefit/(expense)

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Current taxes

     (6,219     (5,033     (1,802

Deferred taxes

     (9,563     (4,704     (758
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total income tax (expense)/benefit

     (15,782     (9,737     (2,560
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

A reconciliation between income taxes calculated at the Dutch statutory tax rate of 25% in 2012 (25% in 2011 and 25.5% in 2010) and the actual tax benefit/(expense) with an effective tax rate of 33.3% (27.6% in 2011 and 14.8% in 2010) is as follows:

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Profit for the year

     31,631        25,572        14,682   

Income tax (expense)/benefit

     (15,782     (9,737     (2,560
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     47,413        35,309        17,242   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income tax using Company’s domestic tax rate

     (11,854     (8,827     (4,397

Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions

     (1,308     (1,300     (891

Change in tax rate and legislation

     (1,042     (325     (1,038

Non-deductible expenses

     (1,372     (1,494     (645

Recognition of previously unrecognized tax losses

     355        2,741        3,532   

Current year results for which no deferred tax asset was recognized

     (328     219        849   

Prior year adjustments included in current year tax

     201        (243     —     

Change in previously unrecognized temporary differences

     —          37        30   

Other

     (434     (545     —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income tax (expense)/benefit

     (15,782     (9,737     (2,560
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-30


Table of Contents

Recognized deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

The movement in recognized deferred tax assets during the year is as follows:

 

     Property,
plant and
equipment,
and
Intangibles
    Provision
onerous
contracts
    Other     Tax loss
carry-
forward
    Total  
     (€’000)  

January 1, 2010

     636        5,683        1,518        36,580        44,417   

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2010

     (340     (435     3,175        1,440        3,840   

Effects of movements in exchange rates

     —          —          —          354        354   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2010

     296        5,248        4,693        38,374        48,611   

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2011

     14,526        (866     (2,635     (15,316     (4,291

Recognized in equity

     —          —          —          3,225        3,225   

Effects of movements in exchange rates

     (74     —          (10     197        113   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

     14,748        4,382        2,048        26,480        47,658   

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2012

     210        (743     2,547        (8,013     (5,999

Recognized in equity

     —          —          —          (571     (571

Effects of movements in exchange rates

     21        —          5        255        281   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2012

     14,979        3,639        4,600        18,151        41,369   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Offset deferred tax liabilities

     (8,942     —          (1,278     (773     (10,993
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

     6,037        3,639        3,322        17,378        30,376   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated tax losses in the Netherlands available as at December 31, 2010, which were due to expire by December 31, 2011, have been preserved and renewed, resulting in a temporary valuation difference for intangible assets.

In 2011, a total of €3,225,000 in deferred taxes was recognized directly in equity to account for the deferred tax impact of fiscally deductible IPO costs directly recognized in equity.

 

F-31


Table of Contents

The movement in recognized deferred tax liabilities during the year is as follows:

 

     Property,
plant and
equipment,
and
Intangibles
    Provision
onerous
contracts
     Other     Tax loss
carry-
forward
     Total  
     (€’000)  

January 1, 2010

     (3,211     —           (1,621        (4,832

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2010

     (5,416     —           818           (4,598
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2010

     (8,627     —           (803        (9,430

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2011

     (163     —           (250        (413
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

     (8,790     —           (1,053        (9,843

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2012

     (3,501     —           (63        (3,564
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2012

     (12,291     —           (1,116        (13,407
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Offset deferred tax assets

     8,942        —           1,278        773         10,993   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

     (3,349     —           162        773         (2,414
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

The deferred tax assets and liabilities are presented as net amounts per tax jurisdiction as far as the amounts can be offset.

The estimated utilization of carried-forward tax losses in future years is based on management’s forecasts of future profitability by tax jurisdiction.

The following net deferred tax assets have not been recognized:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Deductible temporary differences - net

     46         67         (204

Tax losses

     1,501         2,054         5,305   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,547         2,121         5,101   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The accumulated recognized and unrecognized tax losses expire as follows:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Within one year

     3,798         4,204         52,149   

Between 1 and 5 years

     7,057         10,974         15,047   

After 5 years

     5,918         7,140         10,055   

Unlimited

     69,403         77,491         91,282   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     86,176         99,809         168,533   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The accumulated tax losses expiring within one year include tax losses in Switzerland. The expiration of accumulated tax losses was part of the assessment of the valuation of deferred tax assets.

 

F-32


Table of Contents
10 Property, plant and equipment

 

     Freehold
Land
     Data center
buildings
and
equipment
    Office
buildings
    Office
equipment
    Assets under
construction
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Cost:

             

As at January 1, 2012

     20,445         525,112        9,409        15,421        101,173        671,560   

Additions

     23,647         66,390        1,805        2,168        89,431        183,441   

Exchange differences

     —           2,862        66        46        —          2,974   

Disposals

     —           (1,628     (14     (18     —          (1,660

Transfers

     —           160,051        —          —          (160,051     —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2012

     44,092         752,787        11,266        17,617        30,553        856,315   

Accumulated depreciation and impairment:

             

As at January 1, 2012

     —           (177,158     (4,312     (12,292     —          (193,762

Depreciation

     —           (40,220     (651     (1,624     —          (42,495

Exchange differences

     —           (726     (20     (41     —          (787

Disposals

     —           1,628        14        18        —          1,660   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2012

     —           (216,476     (4,969     (13,939     —          (235,384
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2012

     44,092         536,311        6,297        3,678        30,553        620,931   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cost:

             

As at January 1, 2011

     1,388         467,228        7,578        14,020        16,346        506,560   

Additions

     19,057         43,229        1,732        1,418        103,245        168,681   

Exchange differences

     —           2,783        103        46        (42     2,890   

Disposals

     —           (6,504     (4     (63     —          (6,571

Transfers

     —           18,376        —          —          (18,376     —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     20,445         525,112        9,409        15,421        101,173        671,560   

Accumulated depreciation and impairment:

             

As at January 1, 2011

     —           (149,425     (3,737     (10,978     —          (164,140

Depreciation

     —           (33,340     (547     (1,315     —          (35,202

Impairment reversal

     —           783        —          —          —          783   

Exchange differences

     —           (774     (28     (35     —          (837

Disposals

     —           5,598        —          36        —          5,634   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     —           (177,158     (4,312     (12,292     —          (193,762
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2011

     20,445         347,954        5,097        3,129        101,173        477,798   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-33


Table of Contents
     Freehold
Land
     Data center
buildings
and
equipment
    Office
buildings
    Office
equipment
    Assets under
construction
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Cost:

             

As at January 1, 2010

     —           326,345        6,211        12,265        62,165        406,986   

Additions

     1,388         72,740        1,000        1,221        15,889        92,238   

Exchange differences

     —           5,667        116        157        1,936        7,876   

Disposals

     —           (529     (10     (1     —          (540

Transfers

     —           63,005        261        378        (63,644     —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2010

     1,388         467,228        7,578        14,020        16,346        506,560   

Accumulated depreciation and impairment:

             

As at January 1, 2010

     —           (117,941     (3,282     (9,803     —          (131,026

Depreciation

     —           (28,916     (384     (1,038     —          (30,338

Exchange differences

     —           (2,878     (71     (137     —          (3,086

Disposals

     —           310        —          —          —          310   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2010

     —           (149,425     (3,737     (10,978     —          (164,140
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2010

     1,388         317,803        3,841        3,042        16,346        342,420   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

In December 2012, the Group exercised its option to purchase the PAR7 data center land. The actual legal transaction will effect in 2019. As a result of this modification, in accordance with IAS17, the lease which was previously reported as an operating lease is reported as a financial lease as of December 20, 2012. The carrying amount of the land amounts to €20,832,000. In addition, the Group leases data center equipment under a number of finance lease agreements. At December 31, 2012, the carrying amount of the leased equipment classified in data centers was €224,000 (2011: €1,048,000 and 2010: €1,845,000).

Capitalized interest relating to borrowing costs for 2012 amounted to €9,195,000 (2011: €2,577,000 and 2010: €1,987,000). The cash effect of the interest capitalized for 2012 amounted to €8,224,000 which in the Statement of Cash Flows is presented under “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” (2011: €1,298,000 and 2010: €1,800,000).

In 2012, the Group purchased freehold land in the Netherlands for a value of €2,815,000. In 2011, freehold land was purchased in Paris for a value of €19,057,000.

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment is disclosed as general and administrative cost in the consolidated statement of income.

At December 31, 2012 properties with a carrying value of €17,568,000 (2011 and 2010: nil) are subject to a registered debenture to secure mortgage loans (see Note 19).

In 2011, the Group reversed the impairment of data center assets in Sweden, as recognized in 2007, for an amount of €783,000 resulting from improved profitability and future potential of the Swedish company.

 

F-34


Table of Contents
11 Intangible assets

The components of intangible assets are as follows:

 

     Power grid
rights
    Software     Other     Total  
           (€’000)              

Cost:

        

As at January 1, 2012

     7,378        6,246        1,835        15,459   

Additions

     4,300        2,822        330        7,452   

Disposals

     —          (9     —          (9

Exchange differences

     155        —          —          155   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2012

     11,833        9,059        2,165        23,057   

Amortization:

        

As at January 1, 2012

     (350     (1,820     (747     (2,917

Amortization

     (249     (1,071     (178     (1,498

Disposals

     —          9        —          9   

Exchange differences

     (13     —          —          (13
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2012

     (612     (2,882     (925     (4,419
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2012

     11,221        6,177        1,240        18,638   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cost:

        

As at January 1, 2011

     1,711        4,220        1,835        7,766   

Additions

     5,653        2,026        —          7,679   

Exchange differences

     14        —          —          14   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     7,378        6,246        1,835        15,459   

Amortization:

        

As at January 1, 2011

     (198     (980     (583     (1,761

Amortization

     (138     (840     (164     (1,142

Exchange differences

     (14     —          —          (14
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     (350     (1,820     (747     (2,917
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2011

     7,028        4,426        1,088        12,542   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cost:

        

As at January 1, 2010

     304        2,494        1,835        4,633   

Additions

     1,407        1,726        —          3,133   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2010

     1,711        4,220        1,835        7,766   

Amortization:

        

As at January 1, 2010

     (66     (454     (471     (991

Amortization

     (132     (526     (112     (770
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2010

     (198     (980     (583     (1,761
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2010

     1,513        3,240        1,252        6,005   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-35


Table of Contents

Amortization of intangible assets is disclosed as general and administrative cost in the consolidated income statement.

 

12 Financial asset

The financial asset consists of a 2% equity shareholding in Istream Planet Inc. The financial asset was designated as a financial asset measured at fair value through profit and loss.

 

13 Trade and other (non-) current assets

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Non-current

        

Rental and other supplier deposits

     2,254         2,536         1,886   

Deferred financing costs

     1,371         667         1,281   

Deferred rent related stamp duties

     606         638         542   

Other non-current assets

     728         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     4,959         3,841         3,709   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current

        

Trade receivables – net (Note 20)

     51,119         43,350         38,370   

Taxes

     3,052         7,474         219   

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

     20,683         17,050         17,083   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     74,854         67,874         55,672   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The deferred financing costs relate to the costs incurred for the Revolving Credit Facility. In 2012, the Company amended the terms of its existing Revolving Credit Facility. The amended facility, originally scheduled to expire on February 1, 2013, extends the termination date to May 12, 2016, expands the credit commitment from €50 million to €60 million and aligns the incurrence covenants with those contained in the indenture for our 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. As of December 31, 2012 the RCF remained undrawn.

Capitalized costs are amortized over the duration period of the facility agreement.

Prepaid expenses and other current assets principally comprise accrued income, prepaid insurances, rental and other related operational data center and construction-related prepayments.

 

14 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents include €5,017,000 (2011: €4,813,000 and 2010: €4,235,000) that is restricted and held as collateral to support the issuance of bank guarantees on behalf of a number of subsidiary companies.

 

F-36


Table of Contents
15 Shareholders’ equity

Share capital and share premium

 

     Ordinary shares      2002 Series A preference shares  
     2012      2011      2010      2012      2011     2010  
     (In thousands of shares, post-reverse stock split)  

On issue at January 1,

     66,129         9,546         9,543         —           34,808        34,808   

Issue/conversion of shares

     2,047         56,583         3         —           (34,808     —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

On issue at December 31,

     68,176         66,129         9,546         —           —          34,808   

On January 28, 2011, the Company issued 16,250 thousand new shares (post reverse stock split) at the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol INXN. Upon completion of the offering, the Company did a reverse stock split 5:1, which resulted in nominal value of €0.10 per ordinary shares. The 34,808 thousand Preferred Shares were converted into ordinary shares and the Liquidation Price of €1.00 (post reverse stock split) per Preferred A Share was either paid out in cash or converted in ordinary shares (3.3 million ordinary shares). In 2012, approximately two million (2011: 2.2 million) of options have been exercised.

At December 31, 2012 and 2011, the authorized share capital comprised 200 million (post reverse stock split as at January 18, 2011) ordinary shares at par value of €0.10. At December 31, 2010, prior to the reversed stock split, the authorized share capital amounted to 575 million ordinary shares and 175 million 2002 Series A preference shares. All issued shares are fully paid. Prior to the IPO and the reverse stock split, all the shares had a par value of €0.02.

The net proceeds of the Initial Public Offering in 2011 amounted to €138.6 million, which is used for general corporate purposes including, without limitation, capital expenditures relating to expansion of existing data centers and construction of new data centers.

Voting

Upon completion of the initial public offering in January 2011, the Company entered into a shareholders’ agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of our Board of Directors, including the right to nominate the Chairman of our Board of Directors. As a result, these shareholders have, and will continue to have, directly or indirectly, the power, among other things, to affect our legal and capital structure and our day-to-day operations, as well as the ability to elect and change our management and to approve other changes to our operation. The interests of Baker Capital and its affiliates could conflict with your interests, particularly if we encounter financial difficulties or are unable to pay our debts when due. Affiliates of Baker Capital also have an interest in pursuing acquisitions, divestitures, financings or other transactions that, in their judgment, could enhance their equity investments, although such transactions might involve risks to you as a holder of ordinary shares. In addition, Baker Capital or its affiliates may, in the future, own businesses that directly compete with ours or do business with us. The concentration of ownership may further have the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change of control of our Company, could deprive our shareholders of an opportunity to receive a premium for their ordinary shares as part of a sale of our company and might ultimately affect the market price of our ordinary shares.

Prior to the initial public offering in January 2011, the holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares were entitled to vote, together with holders of the Company’s ordinary shares, on all matters submitted to shareholders for vote. Each share equals one vote. In addition to voting privileges, holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares were entitled to certain prior-consent rights against certain actions proposed by the Board of Directors.

 

F-37


Table of Contents

Dividends

Prior to the IPO, dividends that are paid from the profits of the Company and, if permitted under Dutch law, as a result of a sale by the Company of shares or assets of the Company or a subsidiary other than pursuant to an IPO, sale or liquidation event shall be distributed in the following priority: first to holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares in an amount equal to the purchase price of the 2002 Series A preference shares (reduced by any dividend previously received on the 2002 Series A preference shares) and second to the extent any residual amount exits thereafter, pro rata amongst all holders of ordinary shares and 2002 Series A preference shares. Upon the completion of an IPO or a sale, the holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares were entitled to receive the 2002 Series A Share Purchase Price of €0.20 per share (pre-reverse stock split) less any dividends exclusively paid to the holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares in cash or in ordinary shares.

Foreign currency translation reserve

The foreign currency translation reserve comprises of all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign operations as well as from the translation of intergroup balances with a permanent nature.

 

16 Earnings per share

Basic earnings per share

The calculation of basic earnings per share at December 31, 2012, was based on the profit of €31,631,000 attributable to ordinary shareholders and pre-IPO the preference shareholders (2011: €25,572,000 and 2010: €14,682,000) and a weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year ended December 31, 2012 of 67,309,000 (and including preference shares outstanding for the years; 2011: 64,176,000 and 2010: 44,352,000). Profit is attributable to ordinary and preference shares (pre-IPO) on an equal basis.

Diluted earnings per share

The calculation of diluted earnings per share at December 31, 2012 was based on the profit of €31,631,000 attributable to ordinary shareholders and pre-IPO the preference shareholders (2011: €25,572,000 and 2010: €14,682,000) and a weighted average number of ordinary shares and the impact of options outstanding during the year ended December 31, 2012 of 68,262,000 (and including preference shares outstanding for the years; 2011: 65,896,000 and 2010: 47,707,000) post reverse stock split.

In January 2011, the Company issued new shares at the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol INXN. Upon completion of the offering, the Company did a reverse stock split 5:1, which resulted in nominal value of €0.10 per ordinary share. The 5:1 reverse stock split as effected is presented in the basic earnings per share calculation and the diluted earnings per share calculation.

Profit attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Profit attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders (basic)

     31,631         25,572         14,682   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Profit attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders

     31,631         25,572         14,682   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-38


Table of Contents

Weighted average number of ordinary shares and preference shares

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (in thousands of shares, post reverse
stock split)
 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares (basic)

     67,309         61,506         9,544   

Weighted average number of preference shares

     —           2,670         34,808   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares at December 31,

     67,309         64,176         44,352   

Dilution effect of share options on issue

     953         1,720         3,355   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares (diluted) at December 31,

     68,262         65,896         47,707   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

17 Trade payables and other liabilities

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Non-current

        

Deferred revenue

     5,014         4,801         6,093   

Other non-current liabilities

     6,180         5,493         1,702   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     11,194         10,294         7,795   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current

        

Trade payables

     21,087         34,090         20,504   

Tax and social security

     10,788         4,180         2,725   

Customer deposits

     18,274         16,942         15,487   

Deferred revenue

     41,516         38,110         33,152   

Accrued expenses

     36,113         34,317         34,170   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     127,778         127,639         106,038   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Trade payables include €10,319,000 (2011: €20,877,000 and 2010 €8,027,000) accounts payable in respect of purchases of property, plant and equipment.

Accrued expenses are analyzed as follows:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Data-center-related costs

     9,959         7,951         9,243   

Personnel and related costs

     8,060         7,973         7,895   

Professional services

     2,083         2,476         1,876   

Customer implementation and related costs

     3,039         2,237         1,586   

Financing-related costs

     9,625         9,650         10,236   

Other

     3,347         4,030         3,334   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     36,113         34,317         34,170   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-39


Table of Contents

As at December 31, 2012, the accrued financing-related costs principally relate to interest expenses on the Senior Secured Notes.

 

18 Provision for onerous lease contracts

As at December 31, 2012, the provision for onerous lease contracts relates to two unused data center sites in Germany, one in Munich terminating in March 2016 and one in Dusseldorf terminating in August 2016.

The provision is calculated based on the discounted future contracted payments net of any sublease revenues.

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

As at January 1,

     13,726        16,333        18,912   

Increase in provision

     838        —          —     

Unwinding of discount

     428        518        578   

Utilization of provision

     (3,166     (3,125     (3,157
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31,

     11,826        13,726        16,333   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Non-current

     7,848        10,618        13,260   

Current

     3,978        3,108        3,073   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31,

     11,826        13,726        16,333   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Discounted estimated future losses are calculated using a discount rate based on the 5-year euro-area government benchmark bond yield prevailing at the balance sheet date.

 

19 Borrowings

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Non-current

        

Senior Secured Notes 9.5%, due 2017

     256,268         255,560         254,924   

Mortgage loan

     9,903         —           —     

Finance lease liabilities

     20,309         102         336   

Other loans

     1,605         1,605         2,143   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     288,085         257,267         257,403   

Current

        

Finance lease liabilities

     52         235         429   

Other loans

     —           568         1,967   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     52         803         2,396   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Borrowings

     288,137         258,070         259,799   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s Borrowings are principally denominated in euros. The face value of the Senior Secured Notes is €260,000,000 as at December 31, 2012 and 2011.

The face value of the mortgage loan amounts to €10,000,000 as at December 31, 2012.

 

F-40


Table of Contents

Senior Secured Notes and bank Borrowings

In November 2012, the Group entered into a 5-year mortgage loan for €10,000,000. The mortgage loan is secured over land and data center buildings with a carrying value of €17,568,000 (2011 and 2010: nil) (see Note 10). The loan is subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin of 275 basis points. Acquiring the mortgage loan did not conflict with the restrictions of the Indenture and the Revolving Credit Facility.

In February 2010, the Company issued, at par, €200,000,000 of 9.5% Senior Secured Notes due 2017 (the “Original Notes”), which are guaranteed by some of its subsidiaries. The notes are listed on the Luxembourg Stock Exchange’s Euro MTF Market. A portion of the proceeds were used to repay in full the Company’s bank Borrowings outstanding under the €180,000,000 bank credit facilities and to pay transaction fees and expenses. On February 18, 2010, the Group closed out its interest-rate swap contracts.

Optional Redemption prior to February 12, 2013 upon Equity Offering

At any time prior to February 12, 2013, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may on any one or more occasions redeem up to 35% of the aggregate principal amount of Notes at a redemption price of 109.5% of their principal amount, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, with the net proceeds from one or more Equity Offerings other than an Initial Public Offering within 6 months of the issue date. We may only do this, however, if:

 

  a) at least 65% of the aggregate principal amount of Notes that were initially issued would remain outstanding immediately after the proposed redemption; and

 

  b) the redemption occurs within 90 days after the closing of such Equity Offering.

Optional Redemption prior to February 12, 2014

At any time prior to February 12, 2014, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may also redeem all or part of the Notes at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof plus the Applicable Redemption Premium and accrued and unpaid interest to the redemption date.

Optional Redemption on or after February 12, 2014

At any time on or after February 12, 2014 and prior to maturity, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may redeem all or part of the Notes. These redemptions will be in amounts of €50,000 or integral multiples of €1,000 in excess thereof at the following redemption prices (expressed as percentages of their principal amount at maturity), plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, if redeemed during the 12-month period commencing on February 12 of the years set forth below.

 

Year

   Redemption price  

2014

     104.750

2015

     102.375

2016 and thereafter

     100.000

Any optional redemption or notice thereof may, at our discretion, be subject to one or more conditions precedent.

In November 2010, the Company issued, above par at 106.5, €60 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017 as additional notes (the “Additional Notes”) under the indenture pursuant to which we issued the Original Notes.

In 2010, the Company also entered into a new €60 million Revolving Credit Facility with a syndicate of banks. The Revolving Credit Facility was reduced to €50 million before year-end 2011. In May 2012, the Company amended the terms of its existing Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”). The amended facility, originally scheduled to expire on February 1, 2013, extends the termination date to May 12, 2016, expands the credit commitment from €50 million to €60 million and aligns the incurrence covenants with those contained in the indenture for our 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. As at December 31, 2012, the Revolving Credit Facility was undrawn.

 

F-41


Table of Contents

The proceeds of the Senior Secured Notes and the former bank Borrowings were used to finance investments in capital expansion projects in order to increase equipped space within new and existing data centers.

The maturity profile of the gross amounts of Senior Secured Notes and Mortgage loan is set out below:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Within one year

     —           —           —     

Between 1 and 5 years

     270,000         —           —     

Over 5 years

     10,000         260,000         260,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     270,000         260,000         260,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group has the following undrawn bank borrowing facilities:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Expiring within one year

     —           —           —     

Expiring between 1 and 5 years

     60,000         50,000         50,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     60,000         50,000         50,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Revolving Facility Agreement contains various covenants that restrict, among other things and subject to certain exceptions, the ability of the Company and its subsidiaries to:

 

   

create certain liens;

 

   

incur debt;

 

   

enter into transactions other than on arm’s-length basis;

 

   

pay dividends or make certain distributions or payments;

 

   

engage in any business activity not authorized by the Revolving Facility Agreement;

 

   

sell certain kinds of assets;

 

   

impair any security interest on the assets serving as collateral for the Revolving Facility Agreement;

 

   

enter into any sale and leaseback transaction;

 

   

make certain investments or other types of restricted payments;

 

   

change the nature of their business;

 

   

designate unrestricted subsidiaries; and

 

   

effect mergers, consolidations or sale of assets.

The Revolving Facility Agreement contains two financial maintenance covenants: an interest coverage covenant and a leverage covenant. The interest coverage covenant requires the Company to maintain a minimum ratio of Adjusted EBITDA (as defined in the Revolving Facility Agreement) to finance charges.

 

F-42


Table of Contents

The leverage covenant requires the Company not to exceed a ratio of consolidated total debt to pro-forma EBITDA (as defined in the Revolving Facility Agreement). In addition, the Company must ensure that the guarantors represent a certain percentage of Adjusted EBITDA of the Company as a whole and a certain percentage of the consolidated net assets of the Company as a whole.

The breach of any of these covenants by the Company or the failure by the Company to maintain its leverage or interest coverage ratios could result in a default under the Revolving Facility Agreement. As of December 31, 2012, the Company was in compliance with all covenants in the Revolving Facility Agreement. In addition, the Company does not anticipate any such breach or failure and believes that its ability to borrow funds under the Revolving Facility Agreement will not be adversely affected by the covenants in the next 12 months.

The Indenture contains covenants for the benefit of the holders of the Notes that restrict, among other things and subject to certain exceptions, the ability of the Company and its subsidiaries to:

 

   

create certain liens;

 

   

incur debt;

 

   

enter into certain transactions with, or for the benefit of, an affiliate;

 

   

pay dividends or make certain distributions or payments;

 

   

engage in any business activity not authorized by the Indenture;

 

   

sell certain kinds of assets;

 

   

impair any security interest on the assets serving as collateral for the Notes;

 

   

enter into any sale and leaseback transaction;

 

   

make certain investments or other types of restricted payments;

 

   

designate unrestricted subsidiaries; and

 

   

effect mergers, consolidations or sale of assets.

The breach of any of these covenants by the Company could result in a default under the Indenture. As of 31 December 2012, the Company was in compliance with all covenants in the Indenture.

Interxion remained in full compliance with its debt covenants. The Company’s Leverage ratio stood at 2.54 compared to a required ratio of less than 4.00. The Senior Notes also have a consolidated fixed charge covenant that requires the Company to exceed 2.00. For 2012, the Company’s consolidated fixed charge ratio was 4.36.

 

F-43


Table of Contents

Financial lease liabilities

Financial lease liabilities relate to the acquisition of property, plant and equipment with the following repayment schedule:

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Gross lease liabilities:

      

Within one year

     1,659        236        459   

Between 1 and 5 years

     7,215        132        351   

More than 5 years

     23,442        —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     32,316        368        810   

Future interest payments

     (11,955     (31     (45

Present value of minimum lease payments

     20,361        337        765   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

In December 2012, the Group exercised its option to purchase the PAR7 data center land. The actual legal transaction will effect in 2019. As a result of this modification, in accordance with IAS17, the lease which was previously reported as an operating lease is treated as a financial lease as of December 20, 2012. The carrying amount of the land amounts to €20,832,000.

Other loans

The Group has a loan facility with the landlord of one of its unused data center sites in Germany to allow the Group to invest in improvements to the building to meet the requirements of sub-lessees. The non-current loan bears interest at 6% per annum and is repayable at the end of the lease term. As at December 31, 2012, the balance of the landlord loan was €1,605,000 (2011: €1,605,000 and 2010: €1,605,000).

During 2009, the Group entered into a loan facility with the landlord of its unused data center site in Switzerland to fund the settlement of the lease of that site. The loan has been fully repaid as at December 31, 2011 (2010: €1,673,000).

In 2010, the Group entered into a supplier loan amounting to approximately €800,000, which bears an interest at 7%. The loan has been fully repaid as at December 31, 2012 (2011: €568,000 and 2010: €832,000).

 

20 Financial instruments

Credit risk

Exposure to credit risk

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Trade receivables

     51,119         43,350         38,370   

Rental and other supplier deposits

     2,254         2,536         1,886   

Cash and cash equivalents

     68,692         142,669         99,115   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     122,065         188,555         139,371   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group seeks to minimize the risk related to Cash and cash equivalents by holding cash as widely as possible across multiple bank institutions. Term risk is limited to deposits of no more than two weeks. The Group monitors its cash position, including counterparty and term risk, daily.

The maximum credit exposure on the trade receivables is limited through the deferred revenue balance amounting to €46,530,000 as presented in Note 17 (2011: €42,911,000 and 2010: €39,245,000).

 

F-44


Table of Contents

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the reporting date by geographic region was:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

UK, France, Germany and the Netherlands

     36,960         31,336         27,162   

Rest of Europe

     14,159         12,014         11,208   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     51,119         43,350         38,370   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group’s most significant customer, serviced from multiple locations under multiple service contracts, accounts for less than 6% of the trade receivables carrying amount as at December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010.

The aging of trade receivables as at the reporting date was:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     Gross      Allowance      Gross      Allowance      Gross      Allowance  
     (€’000)  

Not past due

     42,184         —           36,533         —           28,129         —     

Past due 1–30 days

     5,369         —           3,549         —           6,546         —     

Past due 31–120 days

     2,913         39         3,009         35         3,884         235   

Past due 121 days–1 year

     763         108         609         358         177         150   

More than 1 year

     219         182         267         224         114         95   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     51,448         329         43,967         617         38,850         480   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The movement in the allowance for impairment in respect of trade receivables during the year was as follows:

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Balance as at January 1,

     617        480        302   

Impairment loss recognized

     372        281        192   

Write-offs

     (660     (144     (14
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as at December 31,

     329        617        480   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Based on historic default rates, the Group believes that no impairment allowance is necessary in respect of trade receivables other than those that have been specifically provided for.

 

F-45


Table of Contents

Liquidity risk

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, including interest payments and excluding the impact of netting agreements.

December 31, 2012

 

     Carrying
amount
     Contractual
cash flows
     Less than
1 year
     Between
1 - 5 years
     More than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Financial liabilities

              

Senior Secured Notes

     256,268         371,150         24,700         346,450         —     

Finance lease liabilities

     20,361         32,316         1,659         7,215         23,442   

Mortgage loan

     9,903         11,327         938         10,389         —     

Other loans

     1,605         1,918         96         1,822         —     

Trade and other payables (1)

     88,517         88,517         88,517         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     376,654         505,228         115,910         365,876         23,442   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

 

     Carrying
amount
     Contractual
cash flows
     Less than
1 year
     Between
1 - 5 years
     More than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Financial liabilities

              

Senior Secured Notes

     255,560         395,850         24,700         98,800         272,350   

Finance lease liabilities

     337         368         263         105         —     

Other loans

     2,173         2,623         729         1,894         —     

Trade and other payables (1)

     89,529         89,529         89,529         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     347,599         488,370         115,221         100,799         272,350   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2010

 

     Carrying
amount
     Contractual
cash flows
     Less than
1 year
     Between
1 - 5 years
     More than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Financial liabilities

              

Senior Secured Notes

     254,924         411,110         24,700         98,800         287,610   

Finance lease liabilities

     765         810         459         351         —     

Other loans

     4,110         4,759         2,753         385         1,621   

Trade and other payables (1)

     74,595         74,595         74,595         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     334,394         491,274         102,507         99,536         289,231   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:—

 

(1) Excludes deferred revenues and rental holidays.

 

F-46


Table of Contents

Market risk

Exposure to currency risk

The following significant exchange rates applied during the year:

 

     Average rate      Report date
mid-spot rate
 
     2012      2011      2010      2012      2011      2010  

Euro

                 

GBP 1

     1.233         1.152         1.179         1.222         1.193         1.161   

CHF 1

     0.830         0.812         0.780         0.828         0.822         0.802   

DKK 1

     0.134         0.134         0.134         0.134         0.135         0.134   

SEK 1

     0.115         0.111         0.110         0.116         0.112         0.111   

Sensitivity analysis

A 10% strengthening of the euro against the following currencies at December 31 would have increased (decreased) equity and profit or loss by approximately the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular interest rates, remain constant and is performed on the same basis for 2011 and 2010.

 

     Equity     Profit or
loss
 
     (€’000)  

December 31, 2012

    

GBP

     (849     (622

CHF

     (1,192     146   

DKK

     (1,434     (149

SEK

     (390     43   

December 31, 2011

    

GBP

     (219     (561

CHF

     (1,321     71   

DKK

     (1,279     (149

SEK

     (416     (384

December 31, 2010

    

GBP

     344        (805

CHF

     (1,356     (88

DKK

     (1,122     (112

SEK

     (27     (26

A 10% weakening of the euro against the above currencies at December 31 would have had the equal but opposite effect on the above currencies to the amounts shown above, on the basis that all other variables remain constant.

 

F-47


Table of Contents

Interest rate risk

Profile

At the reporting date, the interest rate profile of the Group’s interest-bearing financial instruments was:

 

     Carrying amount  
     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Fixed-rate instrument

        

Senior Secured Notes

     256,268         255,560         254,924   

Finance lease liabilities

     20,361         337         765   

Other loans

     1,605         2,173         4,110   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     278,234         258,070         259,799   

Variable-rate instruments

        

Mortgage loan

     9,903         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     288,137         258,070         259,799   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cash flow sensitivity analysis for fixed-rate instruments

The group does not account for any fixed-rate financial assets and liabilities at fair value through profit and loss, and the Group does not designate derivatives (interest rate swaps) as hedging instruments under a fair value hedge accounting model. Therefore a change in interest rates at the end of the reporting period would not affect profit or loss.

Cash flow sensitivity analysis for variable rate instruments

A change of 100 basis points in interest rates payable at the reporting date would have increased (decreased) equity and profit or loss by the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign currency rates, remain constant. For the comparative years, 2011 and 2010, there were no variable rate instruments.

 

     Profit or loss      Equity  
     100 bp
increase
    100 bp
decrease
     100 bp
increase
     100 bp
decrease
 
     (€’000)  

December 31, 2012

          

Variable rate instruments

     (40     40         —           —     

Fair values and hierarchy

Fair values versus carrying amounts

The market price of the Senior Secured Notes as of December 31, 2012 was 112.05. Using this premium, the fair value of the Senior Secured Notes would have been approximately €291.3 million compared to its nominal value of €260 million. The carrying amounts of other financial assets and liabilities approximate their fair value.

Fair value hierarchy

As at December 31, 2012, there are no liabilities related to financial instruments which are carried at fair value. The company uses three levels of valuation method as defined below:

 

Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities

 

F-48


Table of Contents
Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e., as prices) or indirectly (i.e., derived from prices)

 

Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

At December 31, 2012, the Group had a financial asset carried at fair value, its investment in Istream Planet Inc. In the years 2011 and 2010, the Group had no financial instruments carried at fair value.

 

December 31, 2012    Level 1      Level 2      Level 3  

Financial asset

     —           —           774   

Capital management

The Board’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base so as to maintain investor, creditor and market confidence and to sustain future development of the business. The Board of Directors monitors the return on capital.

The Group’s net debt to adjusted equity ratio at the reporting date was as follows:

 

     2012     2011     2010  
     (€’000)  

Net debt

      

Total liabilities

     443,650        413,720        391,493   

Less: Cash

     (68,692     (142,669     (99,115
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     374,958        271,051        292,378   

Equity

      

Total equity

     375,574        330,561        155,269   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net debt to adjusted equity ratio

     1.00        0.82        1.88   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-49


Table of Contents
21 Share-based payments

Summary of outstanding options

Share options to acquire a fixed number of shares are granted to employees and others based on a number of factors. The exercise price is fixed at the date of the grant. The numbers of options listed below are post the reverse stock split 5:1, which was effected upon completion of the initial public offering on January 28, 2011.

The terms and conditions of the grants, post reverse stock split, under the 2008 Option Plan with an exercise price, are as follows:

 

Grant date

  

Employees entitled

   Exercise
price in €
     Options
granted
outstanding
     Options
granted
outstanding,
vested
 
                 (In thousands)  

2007

   Key management      3.50         98         98   
   Key management      4.45         60         60   

2008

   Senior employees      4.45         56         56   
   Senior employees      5.00         17         17   

2009

   Key management      5.00         100         75   
   Senior employees      5.00         9         4   

2010

   Key management      5.00         40         28   
   Senior employees      5.00         102         58   
   Key management      6.50         60         34   
   Senior employees      6.50         30         12   
   Senior employees      7.50         25         14   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 
   Total share options         597         456   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 

The terms and conditions of the grants, post reverse stock split, under the 2011 Option Plan with an USD exercise price, are as follows:

 

Grant date

  

Employees entitled

   Exercise
price in  $
     Outstanding      Exercisable  
                 (In thousands)  

2011

   Key management (Executive Director)      14.74         600         400   
   Non-Executive Directors      13.00-14.74         30         10   
   Senior employees      13.00-14.65         658         200   

2012

   Key management      10.00-11.50         195         —     
   Non-Executive Directors      13.92         15         —     
   Senior employees      13.07-21.37         320         56   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 
   Total share options         1,818         666   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 

Share options granted before the year 2012, under the 2008 Option Plan, vest over 4 years and can be exercised up to 5 years after the date of grant. In 2010, the exercise periods of some options granted in 2003 and 2005 but not yet exercised were extended to March 31, 2012. Share options granted in the year 2011, under the 2011 Option Plan generally, vest over 4 years and can be exercised up to 8 years after the date of grant. The options granted in 2011 to the Company’s Executive Director, Non-Executive Directors and certain employees as well as the options granted in 2012 to the Non-Executive Directors have an accelerated vesting term. In 2012, the options granted to key management in the year 2007 have been extended with one year. The related costs are accounted for in the employee expenses related to share-based payments.

 

F-50


Table of Contents

The number and weighted average exercise prices of outstanding share options, post reverse stock split, under the 2008 Option Plan with euro exercise prices are as follows:

 

     Weighted average exercise price in €      Number of options in thousands  
     2012      2011      2010      2012     2011     2010  

Outstanding at 1 January

     3.94         2.91         2.65         2,554        4,733        4,366   

Granted

     —           —           5.64         —          —          415   

Exercised

     3.61         1.61         1.50         (1,939     (2,156     (4

Expired

     —           —           1.00         —          —          (6

Forfeited

     5.22         5.76         5.62         (18     (23     (38
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding –December 31

     4.98         3.94         2.91         597        2,554        4,733   

Exercisable –December 31

     4.76         3.72         2.36         456        2,231        3,997   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The number and weighted average exercise prices of outstanding share options, post reverse stock split, under the 2011 Option Plan with US dollar exercise prices are as follows:

 

     Weighted average exercise price in $      Number of options in thousands  
     2012      2011      2010      2012     2011      2010  

Outstanding at 1 January

     13.65         —           —           1,336        —           —     

Granted

     13.43         13.65         —           609        1,336         —     

Exercised

     12.76         —           —           (92     —           —     

Expired

     —           —           —             —           —     

Forfeited

     13.00         —           —           (35     —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding –December 31

     13.64         13.65         —           1,818        1,336         —     

Exercisable –December 31

     14.01         14.41         —           666        247         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

The options outstanding at December 31, 2012 have a weighted average remaining contractual life of 5.5 years (2011: 3.2 years and 2010: 4.3 years).

Employee expenses

In 2012, the Company recorded employee expenses of €5,488,000 related to share-based payments (2011: €2,736,000 and 2010: €1,684,000). The 2012 share-based payments related expenses include an amount of €2,078,000 related to taxes and social security charges.

The weighted average fair value at grant date of options granted during the period has been determined using the Black-Scholes valuation model. The following inputs have been used:

 

     2012     2011     2010  

Share price in € at grant date (post reverse stock split)

     10.65-16.47        8.02-9.71        10.20-14.10   

Exercise price in € (post reverse stock split)

     7.71 to 17.45        9.01 to 10.95        5.00 to 7.50   

Dividend yield

     0     0     0

Expected volatility

     40     40     35

Risk-free interest rate

     0.7%-2.0     2.0     4.0

Expected life weighted average

     5.1 years        5.1 years        3.5 years   

 

F-51


Table of Contents

The significant inputs into the model were:

 

   

Expected volatility based on a combination of the performance of the Company and, given the short period that the shares of the Company are traded publicly, other companies that are considered to be comparable to the Group.

 

   

The risk-free interest rate based on the yield on zero coupon bonds issued by the European Central Bank for European Union government debt rates with a maturity similar to the expected life of the options.

 

   

Dividend yield is considered to be nil.

 

   

Expected life is considered to be equal to the average of the share option exercise and vesting periods.

 

22 Financial commitments

(Non-)cancellable operating lease commitments

At December 31, the Group has future minimum commitments for (non-)cancellable operating leases with terms in excess of one year as follows:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     28,755         25,529         23,280   

Between 1 and 5 years

     118,418         102,741         92,269   

After 5 years

     223,635         167,428         124,488   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     370,808         295,698         240,037   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2012, of the non-cancellable operating leases an amount of €11,557,000 relates to the lease contracts, which are provided for as part of the provision for onerous lease contracts.

Of the total operating leases, as at December 31, 2012, an amount of €76,188,000 is cancellable until January 1, 2016.

The total gross operating lease expense for the year 2012 was €22,900,000 (2011: €22,000,000 and 2010: €21,082,000).

Future committed revenues receivable

The Group enters into initial contracts with its customers for periods of at least one year and generally between three and five years resulting in future committed revenues from customers. At December 31, the Group had contracts with customers for future committed revenues receivable as follows:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     204,164         139,475         154,634   

Between 1 and 5 years

     240,951         201,620         149,900   

After 5 years

     105,069         103,934         18,606   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     550,184         445,029         323,140   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-52


Table of Contents

Commitments to purchase power

The Group, where possible and for its own use, seeks to purchase power on fixed-price term agreements with local power supply companies within the cities in which it operates. In some cases the Group also commits to purchase certain minimum volumes of power at fixed prices. At December 31, the Group had entered into non-cancellable power purchase commitments as follows:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     21,600         15,800         13,900   

Between 1 to 5 years

     11,600         —           14,700   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     33,200         15,800         28,600   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

23 Capital commitments

At December 31, 2012, the Group had outstanding capital commitments totaling €17,900,000 (2011: €102,000,000 and 2010: €19,855,000). These commitments are expected to be settled in the following financial year. The decrease results from the timing of expansion projects.

 

24 Contingencies

Guarantees

Certain of our subsidiaries have granted guarantees to our lending banks in relation to our Borrowings. The Company has granted rent guarantees to landlords of certain of the Group’s property leases. Financial guarantees granted by the Group’s banks in respect of operating leases amount to €6,456,000 (2011: €6,350,000 and 2010: €3,920,000) and other guarantees amounting to €211,000 (2011: €1,027,000).

Site restoration costs

As at December 31, 2012, the estimated discounted cost and recognized provision relating to the restoration of data center leasehold premises was €716,000 (2011: €701,000 and 2010: €695,000).

In accordance with the Group’s accounting policy site restoration costs have only been provided in the financial statements in respect of premises where the liability is considered probable and the related costs can be estimated reliably. As at December 31, 2012, the Group estimated the possible liability to be in the range from nil to €19,600,000 (2011: nil to €17,000,000 and 2010: nil to €15,400,000).

Other obligations pertaining to the Company, not appearing on the statement of financial position have been disclosed in Note 36 below.

 

25 Related-party transactions

There are no material transactions with related parties, other than as disclosed below, and all transactions are conducted at arm’s length.

Shareholders’ Agreement

Upon completion of the Initial Public Offering, the Company entered into a shareholders’ agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of Interxion’s outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of the Board of Directors, including the right to nominate the Chairman of our Board of Directors.

If Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 25% but more than 15% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for

 

F-53


Table of Contents

nomination three of the seven members of the Board, at least one of whom shall satisfy the criteria for independent Directors. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 15% but more than 10% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination two of the seven members of our Board, none of whom shall be required to be independent. At such time that the ownership of Baker Capital or its affiliates is less than or equal to 10% but more than 5% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination one of the seven members of our Board, who shall not be required to be independent.

Furthermore, for so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right, but not the obligation, to nominate the Chairman of our Board.

As long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 15% of the outstanding ordinary shares, at least one of Baker Capital’s Director nominees shall be appointed to each of our standing committees, provided that such Baker Capital nominees shall meet any independence or other requirements of the applicable listing standards.

As at April 1, 2013, private equity investment funds affiliated with Baker Capital indirectly own 30.20% of Interxion’s equity.

Key management compensation

The total compensation of key management is as follows:

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Short-term employee benefits (salaries and bonuses)

     2,510         3,406         3,937   

Post-employment benefits

     60         44         88   

Share-based payments

     1,219         1,263         635   

Crisis wage tax

     1,565         —           —     

Termination benefits

     —           115         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     5,354         4,828         4,660   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Key management’s share-based payment compensation is disclosed in Note 21, and the compensation of the Executive Director and Non-Executive Directors of the Board is disclosed on individual basis elsewhere in this annual report.

In 2012, the Dutch Government imposed a crisis wage tax payable by employers over the employee’s total compensation in excess of €150,000, including the benefit from options exercised. The crisis wage tax payable over key management compensation including the benefit from options exercised is presented as “Crisis wage tax” in the table above.

France IX loan

Interxion France is a member and co-founder of the France IX association, founded in 2010, the mission of which is to reinforce Paris as a global peering point by developing a panel of services that meets the various, and current, needs of the market, and by gathering together French and foreign ISPs and Internet services, and content providers. In 2011, Interxion France incurred costs which were recharged to France IX association, receipt of which has been formalized in a loan agreement, of which €620,000 is outstanding as at December 31, 2012. The receivable is presented as another non-current asset.

 

F-54


Table of Contents
26 Events subsequent to the balance sheet date

On January 18, 2013, the Group completed a €10 million mortgage financing. The loan is secured by a mortgage on the PAR3 land owned by Interxion Real Estate II Sarl and the PAR5 land owned by Interxion Real Estate III Sarl, a pledge on the lease agreement, and is guaranteed by Interxion France SAS. The loan with a maturity of fifteen years has a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus 260 basis points. The principal is to be repaid in quarterly installments of €167,000 of which the first quarterly installment was due on and was paid before April 18, 2013.

No other subsequent events have been identified.

 

F-55

Exhibit 4.23

Lease Agreement among InterXion España, S.A.U. and Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A. dated February 27, 2012.

 

  * * *Confidential material has been omitted and filed separately with the Commission

 

En Madrid, a 27 de febrero de 2012

CONTRATO DE

ARRENDAMIENTO

DE LA PROPIEDAD SITA EN

CALLE EMILIO MUNOZ 49-51

Reunidos,

DE UNA PARTE, Interxion Espania, S.A.U., con domicilio legal en Calle Albasanz 71, 28037 Madrid, y CIF A- 82517731 y representada por D. Robert J.M. Assink, en calidad de Administrador Solidario (en adelante “Arrendatario”)

Don Robertus Johannes Michael Assink con Tarjeta de Residencia en Espafia N.I.E. N° X-1589529-E, interviene en su calidad de Administrador Solidario en nombre y representation de INTERXION ESPANA, S.A.U, con CIF A-82517731, en virtud de escritura autorizada por el Notario de Madrid Don Carlos Perez Baudin en fecha 18 de mayo de 2010, con protocolo n° 1.125 domiciliada en la Calle Albasanz, N°7i, 28037 Madrid, sociedad inscrita en el Registro Mercantil de Madrid, al Tomo 14.952, Libro o, Folio 161, Section  8 a , Hoja M-249071, Inscription 7 a (15-062010),. En adelante, el “Arrendatario”.

DE OTRA PARTE, Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A., con domicilio social en Madrid 28016, Avda. Pio XII, 44, bajo derecha, con CIF.: A- 28122299, representada para este acto por D. Agustin Torrego Casado en calidad de Presidente del Consejo de Administracion (en adelante, “Arrendador”).

In Madrid, on February 27, 2012

LEASE AGREEMENT

LEASE OF THE PROPERTY

LOCATED AT CALLE EMILIO

MUNOZ 49-51

Don Agustin Torrego Casado con DNI. N° 260.157-g, interviene en su calidad de Presidente del Consejo de Administracion y consejero delegado

By and between,

ON THE ONE HAND, Interxion

ON THE ONE HAND, Interxion Espania, S .A .U., with registered address at Calle Albasanz 71, 28037 Madrid, with Tax Identification Number A-82517731 and represented by Mr. Robert J.M. Assink, in his capacity as Joint Director (hereinafter “Lessee”)

Mr. Robertus Johannes Michael Assink with Green Card in Spain and foreign identification number (N.I.E) number X-1589529-E, acts in his capacity as Joint and Several Director in representation and on behalf of INTERXION ESPANA, S.A.U, with tax identification number A-82517731, by virtue of a public deed granted by the Notary from Madrid Mr. Carlos Perez Baudin on date 18 th May 2010 with registry number 1.125 of the abovementioned Notary, and with registered offices in Calle Albasanz, N°7i, 28037 Madrid, registered at the Commercial Registry of Madrid, Volume 14952, Book o, Page 161, Section 8, Sheet M-249071 Entry 7 (15-06- 2010). Hereinafter, the “Lessee”.

and,

ON THE OTHER HAND, Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A., with corporate address at Avda. Pio XII, 44, bajo derecha, Madrid 28016 with Tax

 

 

1


Identification Number A-28122299, represented in this act by Mr. Agustin Torrego Casado in his capacity as Chairman of the Board of Directors (hereinafter “Lessor” ).

Mr. Agustin Torrego Casado with DNI number 260.157-g, acts in his capacity as President of the Board of Directors and CEO of Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A. , by

 

2


solidario de la sociedad Edificios Alsina Siw, S.A., para este acto en virtud de escritura autorizada por el Notario de Madrid Don Juan Perez Hereza en fecha 8 de junio de 2010, con protocolo N° 846, sociedad inscrita en el Registro Mercantil de Madrid, al Tomo 6572, Libro 0, Folio 99, Hoja M-106.965, Inscription i6 a . En adelante, el “Arrendador” .

De aqui en adelante, al Arrendador y Arrendatario se les denominara la

“Parte” individualmente, y las “Partes”, colectivamente.

AMBAS PARTES, convienen en manifestar lo siguiente:

EXPONEN

1. El Arrendador es propietario de la propiedad sita en la calle Emilio Muiioz numeros 49-51 de Madrid 28037. La propiedad incluye el terreno y todo lo que esta construido en el segun se describe en el siguiente expositivo (en adelante, la “Propiedad”).

2. La Propiedad consiste de dos partes diferentes e inseparables.

 

i)

Una finca con una superficie de 2.124 ni 2 con 5-042 m 2 construidos y numero de Catastro 7164 811VK 4776 C0001 RG 4776 C0001 RG.

 

ii)

Otra finca con una superficie de 325 m 2 con 993 m 2 construidos y numero de Catastro 7164 810 VK

La Propiedad incluye las siguientes fincas registrales:

 

i) Finca registral 334 inscrita en el Registro de la Propiedad n° 17 de Madrid (tomo 2347, libro 1361, folio 87).

 

ii) Finca registral 10244 inscrita en el Registro de la Propiedad n° 17 de Madrid, al tomo 2140, libro 1154, folio 42.

 

iii) Fincas 19322, 19324, 19326 y

virtue of a power of attorney granted by the Notaiy from Madrid Mr. Juan Perez Hereza on date 8th June 2010 with registry number 846 of the abovementioned Notaiy, registered at the Commercial Registiy of Madrid, Volume 6572, Book 0, Page 99, Sheet M-106.965, Entiy 16 th , hereinafter, the “Lessor” .

Hereinafter, Lessee and Lessor shall be referred to individually as the “Party”, and collectively as the “Parties”.

BOTH PARTIES agree to state the following:

THEY DECLARE

1. Lessor is the owner of the property located at Calle Emilio Muiioz numbers 49-51, Madrid 28037. It includes the terrain and everything that’s constructed on it, as described in the following Declaration (hereafter: “Property”)

2. The Property consists of two different and inseparable parts.

 

i)

Land with a surface of 2.124 m 2 with 5.042 m 2 built space and Cadaster identification number 7164 811 VK 4776 C0001 RG,

 

ii)

Land with a surface of 325 m 2 with 993 m 2 built space and Cadaster identification number 7164 810 VK 4776 C0001 KG.

The Property includes the following plots of Land as registered in the Land Registiy:

 

i) Land Registiy of Madrid number 17, plot number 334 (volume 2347, book 1361, sheet 87).

 

ii) Land Registry of Madrid number 17, plot number 10244 (volume 2140, book 1154, sheet 42).

 

iii) Land Registiy of Madrid number 17,
 

 

3


19328 (procedentes de la antigua finca 17873 que ha sido extinguida al realizarse una declaration de obra nueva y division horizontal que ha dado lugar a las citadas fincas registrales).

Impuestos y gastos: Se encuentra al corriente de pago de impuestos, tasas, contribuciones y arbitrios, hasta la fecha de firma del presente Contrato.

Cargas: Libre de cargas, gravamenes y arrendatarios, a exception de:

Un prestamo hipotecario por un plazo maximo de 120 meses suscrito por el Arrendador con el Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria, S.A., formalizado en escritura publica, otorgada el 10.12.2003 ante el Notario D. Antonio Perez Sanz (en adelante, “Prestamo Hipotecario”), en el que se hipotecan las fincas registrales que forman la Propiedad, distribuyendose la responsabilidad hipotecaria a la fecha de la constitution de la siguiente manera:

 

  i) Finca registral 334: 1.920.000 € mas intereses y gastos.

 

  ii) Finca registral 19322: 64.000 € mas intereses y gastos.

 

  iii) Finca registral 10244: 64.000 € mas intereses y gastos.

 

  iv) Finca registral 19324: 64.000 € mas intereses y gastos.

 

  v) Finca registral 19326: 256.000 € mas intereses y gastos.

 

  vi) Finca registral 19328: 832.000 € mas intereses y gastos.

El Arrendador debera como condition previa cancelar el Prestamo Hipotecario con anterioridad a la Fecha de Inicio del presente contrato, segun se define en la clausula 4.

Asimismo, el Arrendador debera acreditar al Arrendatario, la escritura publica de cancelation a la Fecha de Inicio segun se define en la clausula 4

plots number 19322, 19324, 19326 and 19328 (all of them deriving from the old plot of land number 17873).

Taxes and charges: Up to the date of signature of the present Agreement there are no due payment of taxes, levies and taxes.

Charges: Free of liens, encumbrances and tenants, except:

A mortgage loan for a maximum term of 120 months entered into by the Lessor with Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria, S.A., executed into public deed granted before the Public Notaiy Mr. Antonio Perez Sanz, on 10.12.2003 (hereinafter, “Mortgage Loan”), upon the Land Registries that integrate the Property, sharing the mortgage liability at the execution date, as follows:

 

  i) Plot number 334: 1.920.000 € plus interest and expenses.

 

  ii) Plot number 19322: 64.000 C plus interest and expenses.

 

  iii) Plot number 10244: 64.000 € plus interest and expenses.

 

  iv) Plot number 19324: 64.000 € plus interest and expenses.

 

  v) Plot number 19326: 256.000 € plus interest and expenses.

 

  vi) Plot number 19328: 832.000 C plus interest and expenses.

The Lessor shall pay off as precedent condition , the Mortgage Loan before the Commencement Date of this Lease Agreement, as defined in clause 4.

Likewise, the Lessor shall provide to the Lessee the cancellation deed, the Commencement Date, as defined in clause 4-excluded from the above mortgage charges (the “Mortgage Charge”).

 

 

4


3. El Arrendador se reserva el derecho de constituir en el futuro cargas hipotecarias, exclusivamente sobre los terrenos, de manera que los edificios que en cada momenta existan sobre los terrenos, queden excluidos de las citadas cargas hipotecarias (la “Carga Hipotccaria”).

En el caso de que el Arrendador decidiera constituir la Carga Hipotecaria descrita, el Arrendador se compromete a ponerlo en conocimiento del Arrendatario por medio de requerimiento notarial y con una antelacion de 30 dias naturales a la fecha prevista para el otorgamiento de la correspondiente escritura de constitucion de hipoteca. Asimismo, el Arrendador se compromete a realizar en la escritura de constitucion de la hipoteca, las manifestaciones oportunas sobre la existencia del presente contrato y sus condiciones.

Si la simple manifestation no fuera suficiente para hacer constar la existencia del presente Contrato de Arrendamiento en el Registro de la Propiedad, el Arrendador se compromete a inscribir el presente contrato de arrendamiento, siendo de su cuenta todos los gastos, impuestos, etc., derivados de la inscription.

4. En fecha 28 de Noviembre de 2011 las Partes firmaron un Acuerdo Base del Contrato de Arrendamiento de la Propiedad, el cual se adjunta como Anexo I (“Acuerdo Base”). En dicho Acuerdo Base, y tras la novation modificativa suscrita en fecha 26 de enero de 2012, se acordo un plazo de tres meses, hasta el 28 de febrero de 2012, desde el la firma del Acuerdo Base, para suscribir el Contrato de Arrendamiento.

5. Asimismo, en fecha 28 de Noviembre de 2011, y al objeto de dar firmeza a la voluntad de las Partes sobre la perfection y consentimiento sobre el Contrato de Arrendamiento asi como sobre la perfection y consentimiento de la option de compra a que se refiere la Clausula 11.4 del Acuerdo Base, el 3. The Lessor reserves the right to establish, in the future, mortgages, exclusively on the plots of land, so that any existing building/s in the land, while this Lease Agreement is in force, shall be

In the event that Lessor decides to constitute the Mortgage Charges described, Lessor shall communicate it to the Lessee through a Public Notaiy Communication, which shall have to be sent 30 calendar days prior to the scheduled date for the execution of the mortgage deed. In addition, the Lessor shall perform in the mortgage deed the corresponding declarations about the existence of the present Lease Agreement and its conditions.

If the referred declaration was not enough to record the existence of this Lease Agreement in the Land Registiy, Lessor agrees to register this Lease Agreement and to assume all the expenses, taxes, etc., derived from the registration of the present Lease Agreement.

4. On date 28 November 2011 both Parties signed the Heads of Terms of the Lease, which is attached as Annex I (“Heads of Terms”). On said Heads of Terms and after the extension agreed on date 26 th January, 2012, it was agreed a three months term, until 28 th February 2012, to negotiate and sign the Lease Agreement.

5. On date 28 November 2011, in order to honor the serious intentions of both Parties about the perfection and consent of the Lease Agreement and the Call Option stated in Clause 11.4 of the Heads of Terms, the Lessee paid the Lessor the amount of ( [***] € plus VAT), equivalent to the rent of two months, after receipt of the Lessor’s corresponding invoice.

 

 

5


Arrendatario entrego una cantidad equivalente a dos mensualidades de renta mas el IVA correspondiente ([***] euros mas IVA) contra la correspondiente factura emitida por el Arrendador.

6. Que el Arrendatario se encuentra interesado en el arrendamiento de la Propiedad para destinarlo al ejercicio de la actividad propia del objeto social, en especial, a la instalacion, funcionamiento, mantenimiento de centros de proceso de datos (CPD) y conexiones entre redes de operadores de telecomunicaciones, y el Arrendador en arrendarselo al Arrendatario.

7. Ambas Partes han llegado a un acuerdo sobre las condiciones principales para el “Arrendamiento” , por un plazo determinado, de la citada Propiedad, dentro del plazo estipulado en el Acuerdo Base y su novation modificativa.

En consideration de lo anteriormente expuesto, las Partes suscriben el presente Contrato de Arrendamiento, al objeto de regular el contenido basico del Arrendamiento.

El presente Contrato se regira por las siguientes,

CLAUSULAS

1. - Contrato de Arrendamiento

De acuerdo con la Clausula 10 del Acuerdo Base, el presente Contrato de Arrendamiento desarrolla los derechos y obligaciones derivados del Acuerdo Base.

2. - Objeto del presente Contrato de Arrendamiento

1. Por el presente Contrato, el Arrendador cede en arrendamiento al Arrendatario, que lo acepta, la Propiedad descrita en el Expositivo 2

6. The Lessee is interested in the lease of the Property, in order to cany out the activities related with its corporate purpose, specifically for the installation, functioning and maintenance of data centers, and facilitating interconnections of telecommunication networks. The Lessor is interested in letting the Property to the Lessee.

7. Both Parties have reached an agreement on the material conditions of the “Lease” for a specific period, of the aforementioned Property within the period agreed in the Heads of Terms and its extension.

On account of the above, the Parties sign this “Lease Agreement” in order to regulate the basic content of the Lease.

This Lease Agreement shall be regulated by the following,

CLAUSES

1. - Lease Agreement

In accordance with Clause 10 of the Heads of Terms, this Lease Agreement develops the rights and obligations arising from the Heads of Terms.

2. - Purpose of this Lease Agreement

1. Through this Agreement, the Lessor leases to the Lessee, who accepts, the Property described here above in the “Declaration” num. 2.

 

 

6


2. El Arrendador se compromete a mantener la patifica posesion de la Propiedad arrendada a tal efecto. Asimismo, el Arrendador manifiesta que no existen derechos, cargas, gravamenes o cualquier otra circunstancia que pueda perjudicar total o parcialmente el derecho del Arrendatario bajo este Contrato.

 

3.

El Arrendador concede el derecho al Arrendatario de demoler las instalaciones actuales y construir nuevas instalaciones (“Nuevas Instalaciones”) para el desarrollo y explotacion como centro de datos con oficinas auxiliares y espacio de parking en el mas amplio sentido de la palabra. Las Nuevas Instalaciones, despues de terminal - la obra, formaran parte de la Propiedad.

 

4. Las Nuevas Instalaciones que realice el Arrendatario seran propiedad del Arrendador. A la termination del Contrato de Arrendamiento, el Arrendatario entregara las Nuevas Instalaciones al Arrendador, sin derecho a indemnizacion, ni a reintegro de cantidad alguna, debiendo la Arrendataria devolver la Propiedad libre, sin ocupantes y sin cargas. El Arrendatario tendra derecho a retirar, junto con los bienes muebles, la maquinaria, los equipos, instalaciones, motores y demas elementos que no formen parte inherente de las Nuevas Instalaciones.

 

5. No obstante lo anterior, se le permitira al Arrendatario, en los terminos de la clausula 11.6, arrendar la Propiedad para un uso distinto del referido en el Expositivo 6 siempre que el Arrendador preste su consentimiento por escrito, , que no podra ser denegado sin justa causa.

 

6. El Arrendatario tramitara las licencias oportunas para el uso previsto ante los organismos oficiales de las administraciones publicas locales. El Arrendador se compromete a cooperar de buena fe en relation con la obtencion de las licencias.
2. The Lessor is committed to maintaining the peaceful possession of the Property leased. Also the Lessor expresses that there are no rights, liens, encumbrances or any other circumstances that can harm totally or partially the right of the Lessee under this Agreement.

 

3. The Lessor grants the right to the Lessee to demolish the existing built space that forms part of the Property and build new premises (“New Premises”) for the development and exploitation as a data center with ancillary offices and parking spaces in the broadest sense of the word. The New Premises will, after completion, form part of the Property.

 

4. The New Premises that the Lessee will build wall become property of Lessor. Upon termination of the lease contract, the Lessee will hand over the New Premises free of liens, encumbrances, tenants, and without the right of any indemnity for the Lessor. The Lessee will have the right to remove all the movable goods, machinery, equipment and installations that do not inseparable belong to the New Premises.

 

5. Notwithstanding the above, Lessee will be permitted, as stated in clause 11 .6, to lease the Property and New Premises for a different use as stated in the Declaration 6, after the written approval of Lessor which shall not be withheld without just cause.

 

6. The Lessee will arrange the required permits and approvals for the intended use from the (local) municipal authorities. The Lessor undertakes to cooperate on a good faith basis to obtain such permits and approvals.
 

 

7


En el caso de que la solicitud de licencia deba ser legalmente solicitada por los duenos de la Propiedad, el Arrendador autorizara al Arrendatario para que pueda actuar como mandatario y representante de la Arrendadora en la solicitud y gestion de la correspondiente licencia ante las autoridades competentes.

3. - Duracion del Arrendamiento

La duracion inicial del presente Contrato de Arrendamiento sera de diez (10) anos desde su Fecha de Inicio segun se regula en la Clausula 4, plazo de obligado cumplimiento para ambas partes, despues de la cual se prorrogara con dos periodos consecutivos de diez (10) aiios, salvo denuncia por el Arrendatario en los terminos pactados en esta clausula 3. Despues del periodo inicial y tambien despues de la primera prorroga de diez aiios, unicamente el Arrendatario podra terminal* el Arrendamiento. La termination del Contrato de Arrendamiento podra comunicarse al final de cada periodo de diez aiios mediante aviso escrito, que debera efectuarse por requerimiento notarial con doce (12) meses de antelacion.

En cualquier caso, el presente Contrato de Arrendamiento quedara automaticamente terminado despues de transcurridos treinta (30) aiios desde su Fecha de Inicio segun se regula en la Clausula 4.

4. Fecha de inicio del Contrato dc Arrenda miento

La Fecha de Inicio del Contrato de Arrendamiento (“Fecha de Inicio”) sera el 1 de julio de 2013, en la cual el Arrendatario tomara posesion del inmueble.

In the event that the application for a license had to be legally requested by the owner of the Property, the Lessor shall authorize the Lessee to act in on behalf of the Lessor when applying for and carrying out the relevant procedures before the competent authorities.

3. - Term of the Lease

The initial term of this Lease Agreement shall be ten (10)  years from its Commencement Date as stated in Clause 4, of obligatory duration, after which the Lease Agreement will be automatically extend it in two consecutive periods of ten (10) years, unless the Lessee terminates the Lease Agreement, accordingly with the terms agreed in this clause 3. After the initial 10 year term as well as after the first 10 year extension term, the Lease can only be terminated by the Lessee.

The termination of the Lease Agreement can be communicated in writing and through a Public Notaiy Communication, at the end of each period of 10 years within twelve (12) months prior notice.

In any case, this Lease Agreement shall be automatically terminated after thirty (30) years from its Commencement Date as stated in Clause 4.

4. - Commencement date of this Lease Agreement

The commencement date of the Lease Agreement (“Commencement Date”), will be, 1 st July 2013 on which date, Lessee may take possession of the Property.

 

 

8


El Arrendatario podria solicitar iniciar el Contrato antes, sujeto a un preaviso escrito de 3 meses. Esta fecha alternativa sera entre tres (3) meses despues de firmar el Acuerdo Base y el 1 de julio de 2013. En este caso, el Arrendador tiene la obligation de dar la posesion al Arrendatario tres meses despues de recibir la notification escrita.

Para dicha fecha, el Arrendador debera ostentar la pacifica y libre posesion de la Propiedad, y la Propiedad debera estar libre de cualquier carga, gravamen, arrendatario, etc. En caso contrario el presente Arrendamiento no entrant en vigor.

5. - Precio del Alquiler

El importe anual total de la renta asciende a [***] euros (“Renta”) y se devengara mensualmente a razon de [***] euros/mes.

El precio de la Renta es un importe fijo, sin perjuicio de los aumentos 0 disminuciones que puedan derivarse de su actualization mediante el IPC, y se vera incrementado con el IVA aplicable.

6. - IVA y Retention Fiscal

El Arrendatario es responsable del pago del IVA, el cual sera calculado sobre el importe del alquiler.

El presente Contrato de Arrendamiento se sujetara a retencion segun la normativa vigente en cada pago de la renta mensual acordada. No obstante, cuando la ley prevea la exoneration de retencion, el Arrendatario no practicara retencion alguna cuando se cumplan los requisitos normativos correspondientes. Cuando la exoneration de retencion requiera un certificado que deba remitir el Arrendador al Arrendatario, este ultimo no practicara retencion sobre la renta a partir del momento en que dicho certificado sea puesto a su disposition. El Arrendador entrega en este acto al Arrendatario y se adjunta al presente contrato como Anexo II , copia del

Lessee may request, at its sole discretion, to commence the Lease earlier, subject to 3 months prior written notice. This alternative date can be, between three (3) months after signing the Heads of Terms and the 1 st of July 2013. Lessor in that case is obliged to give possession of the Property three months after receipt of the written notice.

By such date, the Lessor must hold the free and pacific possession of the Property, and the Property will have to be free of any charge, lien, encumbrance, tenant, etc., Otherwise, this Lease shall not enter into force.

5. - Rental Price

The total rent per annum paid is [***] euros ( “Rent” ) which will be payable monthly for an amount of [***] euros/month.

The Rent is a fixed amount, subject to increases or decreases that may arise from their update based on CPI grounds, and shall be augmented with applicable VAT.

6. - VAT AND Tax Withholding

Lessee is subject to VAT. VAT will be calculated over the rent.

This contract is subject to tax withholding under current regulations (for each payment of the agreed monthly Rent). However, in the future, when the law provides for exemption from tax withholding, the Lessee will not practice any tax withholding once fulfilled the legislative requirements. When the tax withholding exemption requires a Certificate which must to be sent by the Lessor to the Lessee, the latter will not practice income tax withholding on the monthly rent, just from the date on which such Certificate is made available to the Lessee. The Lessor hereby delivers to Lessee and is attached to this contract as Annex II , copy of certificate issued by the Tax Withholding Waiver on Landlord.

 

 

9


Certificado expedido por la Agenda Tributaria sobre Exoneration de Retencion a los Arrendadores.

7. - Modificaciones de la Renta

La Renta se incrementara 0 reducira anualmente, empezando un ano despues de la firma del Acuerdo Base (28/11/2011), en la misma proportion que experimente el aumento 0 reduction del Indice de Precios de Consumo (“IPC”) en el periodo de doce meses previo a la revision, segun lo publicado en el Instituto Nacional de Estadisticas, u organization que lo sustituya. En consecuencia, el IPC de referencia para la primera revision (que tendra lugar el 28/11/2012), sera el vigente a la firma del Acuerdo Base (28/11/2011). Es decir, aunque la renta no sea pagada durante el periodo de carencia, se procedera a su actualization en los terminos previstos en esta clausula.

Los incrementos 0 reducciones hasta un 3% seran aplicados integramente al 100%. Los incrementos 0 reducciones por encima de 3% seran aplicados al 50%, con la condition de que el primer 3% sera aplicado integramente al 100%. La variation del porcentaje siempre sera aplicada al importe de alquiler vigente que corresponde al mes anterior al mes de revision.

8. - Pago

El pago de la renta se realizara por mensualidades anticipadas, debiendo expedirse la factura dentro de los cinco primeros dias de cada mes. La factura sera pagada antes de que finalice el mes de su emision.

9. - Impuestos y Tasas

El Arrendatario sera responsable del pago de la parte del IBI referida a la edification (excluido el valor del solar) y de las tasas referentes a: paso de carruajes, basuras y todos aquellos impuestos estatales, autonomicos y locales que graven la actividad, la propiedad o uso de la construction.

7. - Adjustments of rent

The Rent shall increase or decrease on an annual basis, starting one year after the date of the signature of the Heads of Terms (28/11/2011), in identical proportion to the increase or decrease of the Consumer Price Index (“CPI”) in the twelve months prior to the review, as published by the National Statistics Institute, or organisation replacing such. Consequently, the reference CPI for the first review (which will occur on 28/11/2012) will be the one which was applicable on the Heads of Terms signing date (28/11/2011). That is, although the rent is not paid during the grace period, will proceed its update in the terms provided in this clause.

Indexation increases or decrease up to 3% will be charged at 100%. Indexation increase or decrease above 3% will be charged at 50%, with the proviso that the first 3 % will be charged at 100 %. The percentage variation shall always be applied to the rent chargeable in the month prior to that in which the review takes place.

8. - Payment

The payment of the Rent will be made monthly in advance. The invoice must be issued within the first five days of each month and will be paid before the end of the month in which was issued.

9. - Taxes and Tax Rates

The Lessee is responsible for paying the part of the IBI referred to the building (excluding the value of the plots of land) and other fees and taxes related to the activity or ownership of the buildings: passage of carriages, rubbish and all state taxes, regional and local taxes imposed on the activity or ownership of the building.

 

 

10


10. - Garantia Bancaria

El Arrendatario entregara al Arrendador una garantia bancaria, con los ajustes razonables realizados por el arrendatario conforme al Anexo III , por una cantidad de tres (3) meses de renta + IVA, no mas tarde del comienzo de la Fecha de inicio del Arrendamiento. Esta garantia bancaria debera ser emitida por una institution bancaria registrada en Espafia. La garantia debera de actualizarse cada cinco aiios, con arreglo al importe de la renta vigente en cada fecha de actualization.

11. - Clausulas Especiales 11.1 — Estado de entrega

La Propiedad sera entregada en su estado actual, estado conocido suficientemente por ambas partes de acuerdo con la description de la propiedad adjunta como Anexo IV al presente Contrato de Arrendamiento (en adelante, “Description de la Propiedad”).

El Arrendador no garantiza que la construction y el estado de la Propiedad cumplen con los requisitos especificos para un centro de datos.

El Arrendatario tiene la obligation propia e independiente para establecer que la propiedad sea adecuada para el uso previsto mediante la realization de ciertas obras realizadas a su costa, con el fin de que la Propiedad cumpla con los requisitos del Arrendatario (en adelante, las “Obras” ).

Antes del inicio del Arrendamiento el Arrendador elaborara un informe que sera entregado al Arrendatario para su firma por ambas partes. En caso de encontrar cualquier tipo de contamination - como parte de las pruebas ambientales y de certification durante la demolition y el proceso de

10. - Bank Guarantee

Lessee will provide Lessor with a written bank guarantee model with reasonable adjustments by Lessee as attached in Annex III for an amount of three (3) months rent + VAT, not later than the Commencement Date of Lease. This bank guarantee must be provided by a banking institution that is registered in Spain. This guarantee must be updated every five years according to the new current amount of the Rent in eveiy date of updating.

11. - Special Clauses

11.1 - State of delivery

The Property will be delivered in its current state, as sufficiently known to both parties according to a description of the Property attached as Annex IV to the present Lease Agreement (hereafter: “Property Description”).

Lessor does not warrant that the construction and state of the Property complies with the specific requirements for a data center.

Lessee has an own and independent obligation to establish that the Property suffices for the intended use by carrying out certain w r orks at the expense of Lessee in order to arrange that the Property meets Lessee’s requirements (hereafter: “Works”).

Before commencement of the Lease Agreement a delivery report will be drawn up by Lessor that will be signed by both Parties. In case of finding any contamination - as part of the environmental tests and certification during the demolition and construction process - the Lessor will take care of all costs related to cleaning it observing in all cases the Commencement Date of this Lease.

 

 

11


construction - el Arrendador se hara cargo de todos los costes relacionados con la limpieza de manera que se respete, en todo momento la Fecha de Inicio del Arrendamiento.

11.2 - Primer Pago

No se devengara ni cobrara ninguna renta antes y durante los primeros seis (6) meses del Contrato de Arrendamiento (desde el la Fecha de Inicio del Arrendamiento segun se regula en la Clausula 4). Despues de este periodo, se pagara el importe de alquiler mensualmente segun el articulo 8 de este Contrato de Arrendamiento.

11.3 - Entrega de llave

El Arrendatario recibira las Haves con la toma de la posesion en la que se hara entrega de la Propiedad (en la Fecha de Inicio). La entrega se llevara a cabo en la Fecha de Inicio del Arrendamiento, pero siempre que la garantia bancaria se haya entregado.

Antes de la Fecha de Inicio del Arrendamiento, el Arrendatario tendra derecho de acceso a la propiedad para los trabajos preparatorios (por ejemplo, estudios geotecnicos y medidas). Sin embargo, no se le permite llevar a cabo la ejecucion de las Obras. Desde la Fecha de Inicio del Contrato, el Arrendatario podra llevar a cabo la ejecucion de las Obras.

11.4 - Option de compra

El Arrendador concede al Arrendatario una opcion de compra de la Propiedad (“Option de Compra”), sin contraprestacion segun los siguientes terminos:

 

a) Antes del 1 de julio de 2013, a un precio de [***] euros (mas impuestos legalmente aplicables).

 

b) Entre el 1 de julio de 2013 y el 31 de diciembre de 2017, a un precio de [***] euros (mas impuestos legalmente

11,2 - First payment

No rent will be due before and during the first six (6) months of the Lease Agreement (from its Commencement Date according with Clause 4). After this period, the rent will be due monthly in accordance with article 8 of this Lease Agreement.

11.3 - Key transfer

Lessee will receive the key at the delivery of the Property (on the Commencement Date). The delivery will take place on or directly after the Lease Commencement Date, however only after the Lease Agreement has been signed by both Parties and the bank guarantee has been settled.

Prior to the Commencement Date of the Lease Agreement, Lessee shall have the right to have access to the Property for preparatory works (e.g. geotechnical studies and measurements) but is not allowed to carry out the Works. After the Commencement Date of the Lease, the Lessee shall have the right to carry out the Works.

c) 11.4 - Purchase Option

The Lessor grants the Lessee an option to purchase the Property (“ Call Option ”) at no consideration in accordance with the following terms:

 

a) Before July 1, 2013 at a price of [***] euros (plus applicable taxes).

 

b) Between July 1, 2013 and December 31, 2017 at a price of [***] euros (plus applicable taxes) increased on the basis of the annual
 

 

12


aplicables) incrementado con el IPC anual calculado desde la rlrnia del Acuerdo Base (28 de noviembre de 2011). El IPC se incrementara anualmente un 2% adicional desde las actualizaciones posteriores al 1 de enero de 2013.

11.5 - Modificacioiies de la Propiedad

El Arrendador tiene conocimiento de que el Arrendatario instalara un centro de datos en las Nuevas Instalaciones de acuerdo con lo que se denomina “box in box”, construction autosuficiente dentro de las Nuevas Instalaciones, que no afectara a las especificaciones estructurales de las mismas. El Arrendatario podra llevar a cabo estas reformas no estructurales internas sin el consentimiento del Arrendador.

El Arrendatario podra realizar alteraciones estructurales en las Nuevas Instalaciones con el consentimiento del Arrendador (“Modificaciones Estructurales”), consentimiento que no podra ser denegado 0 retrasado sin justa causa. Las partes acuerdan que el Arrendador solo podra denegar el consentimiento para realizar Modificaciones Estructurales cuando tales alteraciones reduzcan el valor de la propiedad.

El Arrendador permite que se realice cualquier alteration, siempre y cuando ninguna de las modificaciones en las Nuevas Instalaciones reduzca el numero de metros cuadrados disponibles en comparacion con las edificaciones actuales situadas en la Propiedad.

Los cambios estructurales drasticos que se realicen en la Propiedad, excluyendo las Nuevas Instalaciones, construir un centro de datos con oficinas auxiliares y plazas de parking, (en adelante, “Cambios”), seran presentados para su revision al arrendador, quien no podra negar su aprobacion sin justa causa. Las partes acuerdan que el Arrendador solo podra denegar el consentimiento para realizar Modificaciones Estructurales cuando tales alteraciones reduzcan el valor de la propiedad.

CPI increase calculated as of the date of signature of the Heads of Terms (28 th November 2011). The CPI will be increased annually with an additional 2% for the adjustments after January 1, 2013.

11.5 - Alterations to the fit-out of the Property

Lessor is aware that Lessee will install a data center in the New Premises according to a so called “box in a box” principle which concerns a self-supporting construction added inside the New Premises which shall not affect the structural specifications of the New Premises. The Lessee may carry out these nonstructural internal alterations without the Lessor’s consent.

Lessee may cany out Structural Alterations to the New Premises with the Lessor’s consent (“Structural Alterations”), such consent shall not to be unreasonably denied or delayed. The parties agree that Lessor only can deny the consent to perform Structural Alterations when such alterations reduce die value of the Property.

The Lessor allows any alteration, as long as none of the modifications of the New Premises reduces the number of square meters that can be let compared to the buildings currently located on the Property.

Drastic structural changes to the Property, excluding the New Installations, and the building of a data center with ancillary offices and parking spaces, hereafter: “Changes”) will be presented for review to Lessor. Lessor shall not deny its approval, on unreasonable grounds. The parties agree that Lessor only can deny the consent to perform Changes when such Changes reduce the value of the Property.

 

 

13


El arrendador dispondra de un plazo de un (1) mes para dar su aprobacion desde la reception de los Cambios.

11.6 - Subarriendo

El Arrendador permite al Arrendatario el subarriendo o cesion de uso de la totalidad o parte de la propiedad a las empresas afiliadas. En el caso de cesion de uso o subarriendo a terceros, sera necesaria la aprobacion previa por escrito del Arrendador, para usos ajenos a la actividad diaria del Arrendatario, que no podra denegarse sin causa justa y tendra que concederse como maximo en un plazo de 20 dias habiles desde la reception de la notification del Arrendatario. En el caso de subarrendamiento, el Arrendatario sera responsable de todas las obligaciones derivadas del Contrato de Arrendamiento.

11.7 - Acuerdo de licencia / servicio

Con el fin de llevar a cabo sus operaciones diarias, el Arrendatario esta autorizado a ofrecer servicios y facilidades a los clientes, tales como dar en uso parte del equipo del centro de datos, el suministro de varios servicios de telecomunicaciones y dar espacio de oficinas, todo ello a traves de un Contrato de Servicio; y no requiriendose el consentimiento del Arrendador.

11.8 - Cesion

El Arrendatario tiene el derecho de ceder el contrato de arrendamiento a otra filial de Interxion Holding NV sin la aprobacion del Arrendador. Asimismo, tiene el derecho de ceder el contrato a otro Arrendatario, pero en este ultimo caso previa aprobacion por escrito del Arrendador.

Si el Arrendatario desea ejercer este derecho informant al Arrendador y le proporcionara information sobre el

Lessor has to give its approval within one (1) month after receipt of the Changes.

11.6 - Subletting

Lessor allows Lessee to sublet or give into use the whole or parts of the Property to affiliated companies.

Lessee has the right to sublet or give into use the whole or parts of the leased space to third parties after prior written approval of the Lessor for uses not related to the daily operations of the Lessee, which approval shall not be withheld on unreasonable grounds and which shall be granted by the Lessor in a 20 working days from the reception of the notification of the Lessee. In case of sublease, Lessee will remain responsible for all the obligations deriving from the Lease.

11.7 - License / service agreement

In order to carry out its daily operations, Lessee is allowed to offer services and facilities to customers, such as giving into use part(s) of the fitted out data center, via a Service Agreement;, part(s) of the fitted out data center, supply of several telecommunication services and giving into use, via a service agreement, office space. No further consent from Lessor is required regarding the ordinary daily activity of the Lessee.

11.8 - Assignment

Lessee has the right to assign the Lease to another affiliated company of Interxion Holding N.V. without approval from Lessor. Lessee has the right to assign the Lease to another Lessee, after written approval from Lessor.

If Lessee wishes to use this right he will inform Lessor thereof and will provide information about the new Lessee to Lessor for review. Lessor shall not withhold its approval on unreasonable grounds.

 

 

14


nuevo Arrendatario para que este lo examine y estudie y pueda decidir sobre su aprobacion sin que quepa su denegacion sin causa justa.

El Arrendador verificara, entre otras cosas, la moral, la solvencia y la liquidez del nuevo Arrendatario, asi como la capacidad de este para cumplir con todas las obligaciones derivadas del Contrato de Arrendamiento. Si el nuevo Arrendatario no es igual al Arrendatario con respecto a uno o mas de los aspectos mencionados, el Arrendador tendra derecho a denegar su aprobacion, salvo que el cesionario aporte garantias de solvencia suficientes equivalentes a las del cedente.

El Arrendador podra ceder sus derechos derivados del presente Contrato a favor de otra persona juridica o fisica, debiendo informar a cualquier tercero (comprador, cesionario, etc.), de la existencia del presente Contrato. Se pacta expresamente que, en caso de que el Arrendador, se decidiera a ejercitar tal derecho, (excepto en el supuesto de venta y transmision de la Propiedad, que esta regulado en la clausula 11.12), la situation del Arrendador pasaria a sex ocupada por dicho tercero, y todas las partes intervinientes, reciprocamente se comprometen expresamente en tal caso a sustituir el presente Contrato de Arrendamiento por otro con el mismo contenido, con la duracion que procediera hasta la termination del presente Contrato de Arrendamiento segun lo pactado en la clausula 3, suscrito por el referido tercero, manteniendo los compromisos y las obligaciones suscritas en el presente Contrato, sin poder oponerse ninguna de las partes a dicha cesion.

11.9 - Electricidad, gas y otros servicios

El Arrendatario debera obtener su propio suministro directo de electricidad, agua, gas, basura y cualquier otro posible servicio de la empresa de servicio publico respecto de las instalaciones.

Lessor will check amongst other things the morality, creditworthiness, liquidity and solvability of the new Lessee as well as the capability of this new Lessee to meet all obligations ensuing from the Lease. If the new Lessee is not at least equal to Lessee with regard to one or more of the mentioned aspects, Lessor is entitled to deny its approval unless the new Lessee provides enough guarantees of a solvency equivalent to Lessee’s solvency.

The Lessor may assign the rights derived from this Agreement to any other legal or natural person, with the obligation to inform any third party (buyers, assignees, etc.), about this Lease Agreement. It is expressly agreed by the parties that, in the event that the Lessor decides to exercise such right (except in the event of transfer and selling the Property which is regulated in clause 11.12), the contractual position of the Lessor will be taken over by such third party; and all intervening parties mutually commit to substituting this Lease Agreement with another one with the same content, obligations and with the agreed term which proceeds until the termination of the present Lease Agreement, according with clause 3, to be subscribed with such third party, without the possibility of any of the parties to object against this assignment.

11.9 - Electricity, Gas and other services

The Lessee shall obtain its own direct supply of electricity, gas, water, waste and any other possible services from the relevant utility company in respect of the Property.

 

 

15


11.10 - Carteles y Rotulos

El Arrendatario tendra derecho a instalar carteles, rotulos, logos, marcas y cualesquiera otros signos distintivos (en adelante “Rotulos” ) en el edificio despues de la aprobacion por escrito del Arrendador, la cual no sera negada si los Rotulos se ajustan a la normativa aplicable. El Arrendatario debera obtener los permisos y aprobacion necesaria del municipio. Los Rotulos no pueden ser colocados antes de que todos los permisos y aprobaciones se hayan obtenido. Todos los costes relativos a la colocacion de los Rotulos, incluyendo los costes de los permisos, instalacion, mantenimiento, extraction y posterior limpieza y reparation de la fachada seran asumidos por el Arrendatario.

11.11 - Servicios

El Arrendador no presta servicios al Arrendatario,

11.12. - Transmision y Venta de la Propiedad.

1. El Arrendador tiene la obligation derespetar los derechos del Arrendatarioen los terminos establecidos en elpresente Contrato de Arrendamiento.

2. En el caso de que el Arrendadorquiera vender la Propiedad a un tercero,al Arrendatario se le reconoce underecho de tanteo y retracto por elmismo precio y condiciones que a esetercero.

El Arrendatario podra ejercitar un derecho de tanteo sobre la finca arrendada en un plazo de treinta (30) dias naturales a contar desde el siguiente en que se le notifique en forma fehaciente la decision de vender la finca arrendada, el precio y las demas condiciones esenciales de la transmision. Ademas podra el Arrendatario ejercitar el derecho de retracto en un plazo de treinta (30) dias, con sujecion a lo dispuesto en el articulo 1.518 del Codigo Civil, cuando no se le hubiese hecho la notification prevenida.

11.10 - Signage rights [right to put up signs]

Lessee will receive the right to install put posters, labels, logos, brands and any other distinctive signs (hereafter: “Labels”) on the building after Written approval from Lessor which will not be withheld if the Labels are according to the applicable regulation. Lessee will arrange the necessary permits and approval from the Municipality. The Labels may not be put up before all required permits and approvals have been obtained. All costs with regard to the placing of the Labels, including costs for permits, installation, maintenance, removing and subsequent cleaning and repairing of the facade will be borne by Lessee.

11.11 - Services

The Lessor does not provide any services to the Lessee.

11.12. - Transfer and Selling of the Property

1. Lessor has to respect the Lessee’s rightsstated in this Lease Agreement, and agreein this sense with any third party.

2. In case that the Lessor has the intentionto sell the Property to a third party, theLessee will have the right of first refusal forthe same price and conditions offered tothis third party.

The Lessee wdll have the right of first refusal on the Property leased within thirty (30) calendar days from the following in which the Lessor notifies to the Lessee the decision to sell the Property leased, the price and the essential conditions of the transmission. As well, the Lessee will have this right within thirty (30) days, subject to the provisions of article 1.518 of the Civil Spanish Code, when he had not been made the prevented notification.

 

 

16


Se excluyen las ventas que el Arrendador pueda realizar a companias de su mismo grupo de empresas.

En todo caso, el Arrendador informara a un comprador tercero sobre el Acuerdo Base del Contrato y el Contrato de Arrendamiento en si. En todo caso, el Arrendador se obliga a imponer sus obligaciones derivadas del Contrato de Arrendamiento incluyendo las obligaciones referentes la opcion de compra - a su sucesor.

11.13. - Seguro de la Propiedad.

El Arrendador se hace cargo de todos los seguros de la Propiedad hasta la fecha de inicio del Contrato de Arrendamiento. A partir de la Fecha de Inicio del Contrato de Arrendamiento, el Arrendatario se hace cargo de los seguros.

12. - Gastos

Cada Parte soportara los gastos en que incurra, incluidos los incurridos por la actuation de fedatario publico, en su caso, y los impuestos legalmente a su cargo, en la preparation, negotiation y cumplimentacion del presente Contrato de Arrendamiento (excepto en supuesto regulado en el Expositivo 3 del presente Contrato de Arrendamiento).

13. - Condition Resolutoria

El Arrendamiento comenzara como muy tarde el 1 de Julio de 2013, no obstante, seran condiciones resolutorias del mismo las siguientes:

1. No obtencion de la licencia de obraspara la construction de las NuevasInstalaciones.

2. En el caso de obtcnerse la anteriorlicencia de obras, sera conditionresolutoria la no obtencion por parte delAyuntamiento de la licencia de actividad0 equivalente para iniciar y ejecutar la actividad.

It is expressly excluded the sale of the Property made by the Lessor to any company belonging to the same group of companies.

In all cases, Lessor shall inform the third party buyer of the Heads of Terms and the Lease Agreement. In all cases, Lessor is obligated to impose its obligations arising from the Lease Agreement including the obligations arising from the purchase option to its successor.

11.13. - Insurance of the Property.

The Lessor will be responsible of all insurances of the Property until the Commencement Date of the Lease Agreement. After that date, the Lessee will be responsible for the insurances.

12. - Legal and other costs

Each Part}’ shall bear its own costs and taxes, including Notary Public costs (if applicable), in preparing, negotiating and completing this Lease Agreement (with the exception of the event regulated in the Declaration 3 of this Lease Agreement).

13. Conditions Subsequent

The Lease wall begin at the latest the 1 of July of 2013, however, it will be a subsequent conditions for it:

1. Not obtaining the planning permission {Licencia de Obra y Licencia de Actividad) to locate a data center in the NewPremises.

2. In case of obtaining the planningpermission, the contract can be terminatedif the Municipality of Madrid does notapprove the license to commence andexecute the activity [Licencia de Actividad 0 equivalente].

 

 

17


“En el caso de no obtener alguna de las mencionadas licencias requeridas para iniciar la actividad de negocio del Arrendatario, solo se puede rescindir el Contrato si las autoridades municipales (o en su caso, el organismo publico que pueda sustituir a las autoridades municipales en dichas competencias en el futuro), deniegan el otorgamiento de cualquiera de las 2 licencias.”

14. - Incumplimiento

El presente Contrato de Arrendamiento es de obligado cumplimiento para ambas Partes. La parte arrendadora debera entregar la posesion de la Propiedad en la Fecha de Inicio del Contrato segun la Clausula 4. La Arrendataria se obliga a gestionar la obtencion de las licencias oportunas conforme a lo establecido en este Contrato con la debida diligencia.

En caso de incumplimiento de las obligaciones asumidas por las partes por causa imputable a las mismas, la parte que hubiera cumplido sus obligaciones podra exigir a la otra; (i) el cumplimiento de las mismas; (ii) 0 bien la resolution del contrato. En este ultimo caso se establece una penalidad cumulativa minima de [***] Euros, equivalente a una anualidad de renta.

En ambos casos -(i) cumplimiento 0 (ii) resolution- la parte que hubiere cumplido con sus obligaciones podra exigir de forma adicional los daiios y perjuicios que se deriven del incumplimiento del contrato.

15. - Idioma

El presente Contrato de Arrendamiento ha sido elaborado en ingles y espaiiol, pero en caso de disputa la version inglesa prevalecera.

In case of not obtaining any of the mentioned licenses to commence and execute the activity of the Lessee, the Contract Lease Agreement may only be terminated by Lessee without any liability if the competent authorities of the City Council (or, where appropriate, the competent authority which can replace the City Council in such competences in the future), denies the granting of either of the 2 licenses.

14. - Breach of Contract

This Lease Agreement will be of mandatory compliance for both Parties. The Lessor will be obliged to deliver the Property to the Lessee on the Commencement Date of the Lease as stated in Clause 4. The Lessee will endeavor to obtain the appropriate licenses as stipulated in this Agreement.

In case of breach of the obligations assumed by the parties for reasons attributable to said parties, the party which has fulfilled its obligations may require to the other: (i) the fulfillment of the contract, or; (ii) the termination of the contract. In this case the parties agree a minimum cumulative penalty of [***] Euros, equivalent to one annual Rent.

In both cases -(i) fulfillment or (ii) termination- the breaching party shall pay, in addition, all die damages arising from the breach of the contract.

15. - Language

This Lease Agreement is made in Spanish and English languages, but in the case of dispute the English version shall prevail.

 

 

18


16. - Legislation aplicable y fuero

Las Partes, con expresa renuncia a cualquier fuero propio que pudiera corresponderles, acuerdan someter todas las discrepancias que entre ellas pudieran suscitarse respecto a la interpretation, cumplimiento, validez 0 resolution del presente Contrato de Arrendamiento 0 de los que del mismo hubieran de traer causa a los Tribunales de la ciudad de Madrid.

Este Contrato de Arrendamiento y los Anexos que lo acompanan se regiran de acuerdo con las Leyes espafiolas.

17. - Domicilios a efectos de notificaciones

Cualquier notification que deba realizarse en relation con el presente Contrato de Arrendamiento debera efectuarse en el domicilio que aparece en el encabezamiento.

18. - Elevation a piiblico e inscripci6n en el Registro de la Propiedad.

El presente Contrato podra elevarse a publico ante Notario designado por el Arrendatario, siendo de entera costa y cargo del Arrendatario todos los honorarios, aranceles, gastos e impuestos que suponga dicha elevacion publica y su inscription en el Registro de la Propiedad (excepto en supuesto regulado en el Expositivo 3 del presente Contrato de Arrendamiento), entregando una copia autorizada de dicha elevacion publica al Arrendador, sin coste para el.

19. - Regulation Juridica

Este Contrato se regira por la voluntad de las partes y en lo no contemplado por estas, por la Ley de Arrendamientos Urbanos, por el Codigo Civil y se sujeta en todos sus aspectos a las normas del ordenamiento juridico espaiiol.

16. - Applicable legislation

The Parties, expressly renounce any own jurisdiction that could correspond to them and agree to submit any disputes that may arise between them as regards the interpretation, fulfilment, validity or termination of this Lease Agreement, or contracts that may have to derive from such, to the Courts of Madrid.

This Lease Agreement and the Annexes accompanying it shall be governed by Spanish Law.

17. Addresses for notifications

Any type of notification to be performed in connection with this Lease Agreement should be done in the address or location specified in the header.

18. - Execution of the Agreement in a public document and registration with the Property Registiy.

This Agreement can be formalized in Public Deed, by the public notaiy appointed by the Lessee, being in charge of the Lessee all the costs, fees, taxes and charges involving die Publi Deed, and its registration at the Land Registiy (with the exception of the event regulated in the Declaration 3 of this Lease Agreement), providing an authorized copy of the Public Deed to the Lessor for free.

19. - Legal Regulation

This Agreement is governed by die will of the parties and what is not covered by them, by the Spanish Urban Lease Act, the Civil Code and is subject in all respects to the rules of Spanish law.

 

 

19


Y en prueba de conformidad, firman a un solo efecto el presente Contrato de Arrendamiento, en dos (2) copias, en el lugar y la fecha indicadas en el encabezamiento.

Firma

Por Interxion Espana, S.A.

D. Robert J.M. Assink Administrador Solidario

Firma

Por Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A

D. Agustin Torrego Casado Presidente del Consejo y Consejero Delegado

And in witness whereof, they sign two (2) copies of this Lease Agreement for a single purpose in the location and on the date specified in the header.

Signature

On behalf of Interxion Espafia, S.A.

Mr. Robert J.M. Assink Joint Administrator

Signature

On behalf of Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A.

Mr. Agustin Torrego Casado President of the Board and Chief Executive

 

 

20

Exhibit 4.24

Lease Agreement between InterXion Holding B.V. and GiP Gewerbe im Park GmbH dated January 29, 1999 as amended by Supplement No. 17 to the Lease Agreement dated September 1, 2011.

* * *Confidential material has been omitted and filed separately with the Commission

Union Investment

ANNEX

17

to the lease dated 29 January / 5 February 1999

and Annex 1 dated 21 May 1999

and Annex 2 dated 14 / 28 May 1999

and Annex 3 dated 1 / 18 October 1999

and declaration of acceptance dated 23 November 1999

and Annex 4 dated 11 September 2000

and Annex 5 dated 11 January / 11 September 2000

and Annex 6 (undated)

and Annex 7 dated 27 October / 11 December 2000

and Annex 8 dated 20 / 24 March 2003

and Annex 9 dated 16 / 18 October 2006

and Annex 10 dated 29 March / 3 April 2007

and Annex 11 dated 21 December 2007

and Annex 12 dated 11 June / 16 June 2008

and Annex 13 dated 29 May / 16 June 2009

and Annex 14 dated 28 July 2009

and Annex 15 dated 2 December / 4 December 2009

and Annex 16 dated 19 May / 25 May 2011

between

Interxion Deutschland GmbH

Hanauer Landstrasse 298, 60314 Frankfurt

Tax No. 045 236381 19

 

1


represented by Mr Peter Knapp, Managing Director

- hereinafter referred to as the “ lessee ” -

and

Union Investment Real Estate GmbH

Caffamacherreihe 8, 20355 Hamburg

Tax No. 27/144/00080

represented by: Mr Philip La Pierre and Mr Claas Zincke

- hereinafter referred to as the “ lessor ” –

[As at 1 September 2011]

Lease no.: 1187.V0000010

(Please quote in all correspondence and payments)

Property: Hanauer Landstrasse 296-326, Frankfurt

1 September 2011

Genossenschaftliche FinanzGruppe Volksbanken Raiffeisenbanken

Union Investment Real Estate GmbH • Caffamacherreihe 8, 20355 Hamburg • Postfach 30 11 99, 20304 Hamburg

Tel. No.: +49-40-34919-0 • Fax No.: +49-40-34919-4191 • e-mail: service@union-investment.de • Website:

www.union-investment.de • Registered office of the company: Hamburg

Company registration no. HRB 110793 at Hamburg District Court:

Board of Management: Dr. Reinhard Kutscher (Chairman), Dr. Frank Billand, Dr. Karl-Joseph Hermanns-Engel, Volker Noack

Chairman of the supervisory board: Jens Wilhelm

Introduction

The lessee and lessor concluded a lease on 29 January / 15 February 1999 and annexes 1-16 on office and service premises, indoor floor space and parking spaces on property 1187, Hanauer Landstrasse Business Park, Frankfurt.

In addition to the aforementioned office and service premises and indoor floor space, the lessee also wishes to lease further office premises and indoor floor space in building section E4, Hanauer Landstrasse 296a and office premises and indoor floor space in building section D 3, Hanauer Landstrasse 306 from 1 October 2011 and 1 November 2011 until 31 December 2024 (fixed term of the lease). The lessee intends to establish a data center on the office premises and indoor floor space in building section E4, Hanauer Landstrasse 296a.

The lessee also wishes to lease the office premises located on the ground floor and first floor of building section C4, Hanauer Landstrasse 310, from 1 October 2012 until 31 December 2024 (fixed term of the lease).

The lessee also wishes to return its indoor floor space in building section G2, Weismüllerstrasse 25 leased under Annex 15 dated 2 December 2009 / 4 December 2009 to the lessor on 30 September 2011.

 

2


The lessee wishes to extend the fixed term of the lease for all the premises leased in accordance with the lease and Annexes 1 to 16 until 31 December 2024 (fixed term of the lease).

For this reason, the parties agree the following, with reference to the lease:

§1

Leased property

 

(1) From 1 October 2011, the lessee will lease the following additional premises, the position of which (with the exception of the proportion of the communal areas) can be seen from the following plans attached as

ANNEX 1.1 to 1.3:

 

1.    Indoor floor space in building section E4, Hanauer Landstrasse 296a, ground floor, including a proportion of the communal areas    approx.1,606.32 m 2
2.    Office premises in building section E4, Hanauer Landstrasse 296a, ground floor and first floor, including a proportion of the communal areas    approx. 151.43 m 2
3.    Indoor floor space in building section D3, Hanauer Landstrasse 306, ground floor, including a proportion of the communal areas    approx. 974.95 m 2

 

(2) From 1 November 2011, the lessee will lease the following additional premises on the property, the position of which can be seen from the following plans (with the exception of the proportion of the communal areas) attached as

ANNEX 2.1 to 2.2

 

1.    Office premises in building section D3, Hanauer Landstr. 306, ground floor and first floor, including a proportion of the communal areas    approx. 556.13 m 2

 

(3) From 01 October 2012, the lessee will lease the following additional premises, the location of which (with the exception of the proportion of the communal areas) can be seen from the attached plans attached as

ANNEX 3.1 to 3.2

 

1.    Office premises in building section C4, Hanauer Landstrasse 310, ground floor and first floor including a proportion of the communal areas.    approx. 421.97 m 2

 

(4) The additional leased premises listed in paragraphs (1) to (3) will be transferred in the condition familiar to the lessee. A reciprocal certificate will be issued at the transfer inspection. Should the transfer certificate not mention any shortcomings or any necessary corrective work applicable to the leased premises, the lessee will acknowledge the condition of the rented premises as corresponding to the lease upon signature of the transfer certificate. Hidden defects are excepted.

 

3


§2

Return of parts of the leased property

The lessee undertakes to vacate the following parts of the leased property, as specified in detail in ANNEX 4 , by 30 September 2011, completely, and return them to the lessor in a clean and tidy condition.

The relevant parts of this lease will expire upon return of said parts of the leased property.

Weismüllerstrasse 25, building section G2 on the ground floor

 

1.    Indoor floor space, including a proportion of the communal areas    approx. 529.49 m 2

An inventory of the leased premises must be made in good time before they are returned, in accordance with §10, sub-paragraph 2 of the lease dated 29 January 1999/ 5 February 1999, to record and evaluate wear and tear, any cosmetic repairs required, any fixtures and alterations to be restored to their former state, which must be invoiced to the lessee if necessary. The property management company commissioned by the lessor will be responsible for the inventory, evaluation and return of the leased premises.

Should the lessee fail to return the leased premises punctually in a condition in accordance with the lease, it will be obliged to pay the rent at the current rate, including overheads and incidental expenses, until the end of the month in which it vacates the premises, and to return said premises to the lessor in a condition in accordance with the lease. The lessor reserves the right to assert a claim for further loss.

§3

Term of the lease / Option to extend the lease

 

(1) The lessee will extend the existing lease dated 29 January 1999 / 5 February 1999 and Annexes 1 to 16, including Annex 17, by a further five (5) years from 1 January 2020 until 31 December 2024 (“fixed term of the lease”).

 

(2) The lessee is granted the right to extend the fixed term of the lease once by 5 (five) years (option to extend the term of the lease) by unilateral declaration, under the terms and conditions of the lease valid at that time (“right of option to extend the lease”). The lessee must exercise its right of option to extend the lease by writing to the lessor 12 (twelve) months prior to expiry of the fixed term of the lease at the latest.

Should the lessee not exercise the option to extend the lease, the lease will be extended indefinitely, unless it is cancelled by either party to the lease 12 (twelve) months prior to expiry of the fixed term of the lease at the latest. Should the lessee exercise the right of option to extend the lease, the lease will be extended indefinitely from the end of said option, unless it is cancelled by either party to the lease 12 (twelve) months prior to the end of the option to extend the lease, at the latest. If the lease has been extended indefinitely, it will also be subject to cancellation at 12 (twelve) months’ notice.

Should the lessee continue to use the premises after the end of the term of the lease, the lease will not be deemed to have been extended. §545 BGB ([German] Civil Code) is waived.

 

4


§4

Rent

 

(1) The rent for all the leased premises is broken down as follows from 1 October 2011 :

 

1.    151.43    m 2   Office premises in building section E4 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2      =                   [***
2.    1,606.32    m 2   Indoor floor space in building section E4 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2      =       [***
3.    974.95    m 2   Indoor floor space in building section D3 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2      =       [***
4.    4,314.32    m 2   Office premises including a proportion of the communal areas @ € [***]      =       [*** ]  
5.    9,087.55    m 2   Indoor floor space @ € [***] /m 2       [*** ]  
6.    138.67    m 2   Office premises in building section D6 including a proportion of the communal areas @ € [***]      =       [*** ]  
7.    337.50    m 2   Service premises in building section D6 @ € [***] /m 2       [*** ]  
8.    1    each   Parking space @€ [***]       [*** ]  
9.    31    each   Outdoor parking spaces      =       [*** ]  
10.    30    each   Parking spaces in the multi-storey car park       [*** ]  
             

 

 

 
11.         Net rent      =       [*** ]  
12.    4,604.42    m 2   Prepayment of ancillary and heating costs for office premises @ € [***] /m 2      =       [*** ]  
13.    12,006.32    m 2   Prepayment of ancillary costs for indoor and service premises @ € [***] /m 2      =       [*** ]  
14.         Subtotal      =       [*** ]  
15.         plus VAT at the statutory rate (currently 19%)      =       [*** ]  
             

 

 

 
16.         Total monthly rent =       [***
             

 

 

 

 

(2) The lessee is exempt from payment of the net rent for office premises and indoor floor space in accordance with §4, sub-paragraph (1), clauses 1 and 2, for the months of October, November and December 2011.

 

5


The lessee is also exempt from payment of the net rent for the office premises in accordance with §4, sub-paragraph (1), clause 3, for the months of October, November and December 2011 and January and February 2012. However, the lessee is still liable for the respective ancillary and heating costs and the rent for the other leased premises and parking spaces, including the statutory VAT, during the rent-free periods.

 

(3) The rent for all the leased premises is broken down as follows from 1 November 2011 :

 

1.    151.43    m 2   Office premises in building section E4 including a proportion of the communal areas @ € [***] /m 2      =                   [*** ]  
2    1,606.32    m 2   Indoor floor space in building section E4 including a proportion of the communal areas @ € [***] /m 2       [*** ]  
3    974.95    m 2   Indoor floor space in building section D3 including a proportion of the communal areas @ € [***] /m 2      =       [*** ]  
4.    556.13    m 2   Office premises in building section D3 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/ m 2      =       [***
5.    4,314.32    m 2   Office premises including a proportion of the communal areas @ € [***]      =       [*** ]  
6.    9,087.55    m 2   Indoor floor space @ € [***] /m 2       [*** ]  
7.    138.67    m 2   Office premises in building section D6 including a proportion of the communal areas @ € [***]      =       [*** ]  
8.    337.50    m 2   Service premises in building section D6 @ € [***] /m 2       [*** ]  
9.    1    each   Parking space @ € [***]       [*** ]  
10.    31    each   Outdoor parking spaces = € [***] each       [*** ]  
11.    30    each   Parking spaces in the multi-storey car park @ € [***] each.      =       [*** ]  
             

 

 

 
12.         Net rent      =       [*** ]  
13.    5,160.55    m 2   Prepayment of ancillary and heating costs for office premises @ € [***] /m 2      =       [*** ]  
14.    12,006.32    m 2   Prepayment of ancillary costs for indoor and service premises @ € [***] /m 2      =       [*** ]  
             

 

 

 
15.         Subtotal      =       [*** ]  
16.         Plus VAT at the statutory rate (currently 19%)      =       [*** ]  
             

 

 

 
17.         Total monthly rent =       [*** ]  
             

 

 

 

 

6


(4) The lessee is exempt from payment of the net rent for office and service premises in accordance with §4, sub-paragraph (3), clause 4, for the months of November and December 2011 and January 2012. However, the lessee will still be liable for the respective ancillary and heating costs and the rent for the other leased premises and parking spaces, including the statutory VAT, during the rent-free periods.

 

(5) The lessee is exempt from payment of the net rent for office premises and indoor floor space in accordance with §4, sub-paragraph (3), clauses 1 to 8, for a total of 4 (four) months, i.e. March to June 2012. However, the lessee will still be liable for the respective ancillary and heating costs and the rent for the other leased premises and parking spaces, including the statutory VAT, during the rent-free periods.

 

(6) With effect from 1 October 2012 , the rent for all the rented premises will be broken down as follows:

 

1.    151.43    m 2   Office premises in building section E4 including a proportion of communal areas at € [***] /m 2      =                   [***
2    1,606.32    m 2   Indoor floor space in building section E4 including a proportion of communal areas at € [***] /m 2      =       [***
3    974.95    m 2   Indoor floor space in building section D3 including a proportion of communal areas at € [***] /m 2      =       [***
4.    556.13    m 2   Office premises in building section D3 including a proportion of communal areas at € [***] /m 2      =       [***
5.    421.97    m 2   Office premises in building section C4 including a proportion of communal areas at €[***]/m 2      =       [***
6.    4,314.32    m 2   Office premises including a proportion of communal areas at € [***]      =       [***
7.    9,087.55    m 2   Indoor floor space at € [***] /m 2      =       [***
8.    138.67    m 2   Office premises in building section D6 including a proportion of communal areas at € [***]      =       [***
9.    337.50    m 2   Service area in building section D6 at € [***] /m 2      =       [***
10.    1    Each   Parking space at € [***]      =       [***
11.    31    Each   Open-air parking spaces at € [***] /each      =       [***
12    30    Each   Covered parking spaces at €[***]/each      =       [***
13.         Net rent      =       [***
             

 

 

 
14.    5,582.52    m 2   Prepayment of incidental expenses and heating costs for office premises at € [***] /m 2      =       [***
15.    12,006.32    m 2   Prepayment of incidental expenses for indoor floor space and service areas at € [***] /m 2      =       [***
             

 

 

 
16.         Subtotal      =       [***
17.         plus VAT at the statutory rate (currently 19%)      =       [***
             

 

 

 
18.         Total monthly rent      =       [***
             

 

 

 

 

7


(7) The lessee is exempt from payment of the net rent for office premises in accordance with §4, sub-paragraph (6), clause 5 for the months of October, November and December 2012. However, the lessee is still liable for incidental expenses and heating costs, and the rent for the remaining leased space and parking spaces, plus the statutory VAT, during the rent-free periods.

 

(8) The value guarantee clause agreed between the parties in the lease remains unaffected and also applies in full to the additional premises leased under this Annex. The most recent index adjustment will apply to the value adjustment of the rent. The next index adjustment for all the leased space will be on 1 January 2013.

§5

Completion / Alteration / Restoration

Under Annex no. 17, the lessee will be responsible for completion of the newly-leased office and indoor floor space at its own expense, in close consultation with the lessor. The lessee will be responsible for draft planning of the internal fixtures and fittings of the indoor floor space, outdoor areas and the surface of the roof, and will submit relevant documents to the lessor.

The lessee will also be responsible for obtaining any planning permission, at its own expense and risk. The lessee bears sole responsibility for the technical and financial suitability of the leased premises for the purpose for which they are leased.

The completion work and the erection of the planned additional structures, particularly on the office and indoor floor space in building section E4, Hanauer Landstrasse 296a, are subject to the following requirements:

 

 

The lessee must carry out the alterations and extensions to the building on its own responsibility and at its own expense.

 

 

The applications for planning permission yet to be submitted must be submitted to and agreed with the lessor before submission to the planning authority. Changes to the external appearance require the express written approval of the lessor.

 

 

The extension measures involve the technical installations on the existing flat roof. The existing roof must be strengthened for erection of the structures, the surface of the roof made load-bearing and accessible for maintenance purposes and the plant integrated into the lighting conductor system of the building. The lessee will assume the maintenance of and maintenance obligation for roof penetration occasioned by the lessee’s installations and structures.

 

 

The lessee will assume the maintenance obligation for its fixtures and fittings.

 

8


 

Working drawings must always be made available to the lessor in good time, before work commences, for information and approval.

 

 

Completion of building work must be notified to the lessor in writing for each section of the building for the purpose of joint inspection of proper implementation.

As-built documentation of the conversions and additions must be made available to the lessor in digital form, immediately after completion.

The lessee undertakes to return the leased property to its original state at the end of the lease, by agreement with the lessor. The lessee will bear the costs of the above restoration obligation.

The interests of the other lessees of the property must be treated with the greatest possible consideration during building work. Should the other lessees be affected during the building work and should claims be made as a result, Interxion Deutschland GmbH will bear responsibility for direct negotiation and making a fair settlement, if the claims are justified. The lessee will indemnify the lessor against any claims whatsoever in this respect. A separate agreement must be made with the lessor on the areas required for the storage of building materials or parking construction plant.

§6

Indemnification clause and lessees in building sections E5 and D6

 

(1) Interxion Deutschland GmbH undertakes to compensate Union Investment and the latter’s lessees for any losses incurred due to the building work in building sections E and D and to rectify restrictions or damage which are also attributable to the building work specified under §6 immediately, at its own expense. This also expressly applies to any soiling of the façades and outdoor areas of the Union Investment building.

 

(2) Should third parties (other lessees and their business partners) on the Hanauer Landstrasse business park be affected by the lessee’s building work in the areas around building sections E5 and D6 because the access to their leased premises or parking spaces are in this area, Interxion Deutschland GmbH will ensure from the outset that access to these leased areas and parking spaces remains unimpeded, at its own expense. Interxion Deutschland GmbH must also ensure that the upgrading work to be carried out is agreed with the affected lessees of Union Investment.

§7

Other agreements

All the other provisions of the lease dated 29 January / 5 February 1999 and Annexes 1 to 16 which have not been changed by this Annex 17 remain unaffected.

The parties are aware of the statutory requirement for the written form. They mutually undertake to take any action and make any declarations which may be required to satisfy the requirement for the written form, particularly in connection with the conclusion of this Annex 17 and further Annexes, and not to cancel the lease prematurely in the meantime by invoking a failure to comply with the requirement for the written form.

Should one or more of the provisions of this Annex be or become ineffective for any reason, the validity of the remaining provisions of the Annex will remain unaffected. In such a case, the parties must conclude an effective agreement which reflects the economic intent of the invalid provisions as closely as possible.

 

9


ANNEXES 1 to 4 below form a constituent part of this lease.

ANNEX 1.1 to 1.3 Office premises and indoor floor space in building sections E4 and D4

ANNEX 2.1 to 2.2 Office premises and indoor floor space in building section D3

ANNEX 3.1 to 3.2 Office premises in building section C4

ANNEX 4 Return of indoor floor space at Weismüllerstrasse 25

   Building section G 2 on the ground floor

 

Hamburg, 6 September 2011     Frankfurt, 2 September 2011
Union Investment Real Estate GmbH     Interxion Deutschland GmbH
[Stamp]     [Stamp]
[Signature]   [Signature]   [Signature]
(Philip La Pierre / Claas Zicke)     (Peter Knapp)
  [Stamp]:    
  Interxion   Interxion Deutschland GmbH  
    Hanauer Landstr. 298  
    D-60313 Frankfurt a. M.  
    T+49 (0) 69 40 147 0 F+49 (0) 69 40 147 199
    E-mail: care@interxion.com  
    www.interxion.com  
Names in print    
La Pierre / Zincke     Knapp

The lessee Interxion Deutschland GmbH will be bound by the quotation made on signature of the above Annex on conclusion hereof until 15 September 2011. The acceptance period will be deemed to have been observed if the countersigned Annex (declaration of acceptance) is posted by the lessor during this period, with date as postmark.

 

Frankfurt, 2 September 2011
  [Signature]
  (Peter Knapp)

 

10

Exhibit 12.1

CERTIFICATIONS

I, David Ruberg, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V.;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  (a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  (b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  (c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  (d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  (a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  (b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

/s/ David C. Ruberg
David C. Ruberg
Chief Executive Officer
Date: April 26, 2013

Exhibit 12.2

CERTIFICATIONS

I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V.;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  (a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  (b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  (c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  (d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  (a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  (b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

/s/ Josh Joshi
M.V. “Josh” Joshi
Chief Financial Officer
Date: April 26, 2013

Exhibit 13.1

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), the undersigned officer of the Company hereby certifies to the undersigned’s knowledge, pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (18 U.S.C. Section 1350), that:

 

1. The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2. The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

/s/ David C. Ruberg
David C. Ruberg
Chief Executive Officer
Date: April 26, 2013

Exhibit 13.2

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), the undersigned officer of the Company hereby certifies to the undersigned’s knowledge, pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (18 U.S.C. Section 1350), that:

 

1. The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2. The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

/s/ Josh Joshi
M.V. “Josh” Joshi
Chief Financial Officer
Date: April 26, 2013

Exhibit 15.1

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To: the Board of Directors of InterXion Holding N.V.:

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the registration statement on Form S-8 (No. 333-175099) of InterXion Holding N.V. of our report dated April 26, 2013 with respect to the consolidated statements of financial position of InterXion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in shareholders’ equity and cash flows for the years then ended, and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012, which report appears in the December 31, 2012 annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V.

/s/ KPMG Accountants N.V.

Rotterdam, The Netherlands

April 26, 2013